Operator's Handbook Alcatel 1661SM-C 2.5 Gbits Compact AddDrop Multiplexer

Operator s Handbook
Alcatel
1651SM & 1661SM-C
1651SM Rel.2.7.1
622Mbit/s (STM4) AddDrop Synchronous Multiplexer
1661SM-C Rel.1.7.1
2.5 Gbit/s (STM16) Compact ADM
957.140.152 R Ed.01
3AL 38249 AAAA Ed.01
957.140.152 R Ed.01
3AL 38249 AAAA Ed.01
1651SM 2.7.1&1661SMC 1.7.1 OPER.HDBK
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Product-release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 Handbook structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2 Notes on Ed.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 First aid for electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Norms and labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 HW/SW PREREQUISITES FOR SOFTWARE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Hardware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Operative ambient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 Year 2000 Data Time Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Physical supports of the release software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 OPERATIVE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Product Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Configuration Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 Alarms, status and remotecontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4 Maintenance Memory Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 13 15 15 15 16 16 17 18 19 19 20 21 21 23 25 31 33 33 34 34 35 37 37 38 38 39 41 45
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
010312 DATE CHANGE NOTE
G. CAPRIOLI ITAVE C. FAVERO APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
E. MONZANI ITAVE ORIGINATOR
ED
1651SM2.7.1&1661SMC1.7.1 OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 1 / 448
3 PRODUCT INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 DIALOGUE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Operator access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Alarm synthesis window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Administrative application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Operator option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Configuration Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Equipment Configuration Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 LINE SHELF Connection Configuration Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4 DROP SHELF Connection Configuration Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.5 Local Configuration Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.6 Routing Table Configuration Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Alarm, status & control application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 LINE SHELF AS&C description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2 DROP SHELF AS&C description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.3 Options of the AS&C application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Maintenance Memory Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2 Receive Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.3 File option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.4 Clear option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 G784 Performance Monitoring Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.2 File option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.3 View option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.4 Mode option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.5 Configure option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.6 Termination point description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 Software Download Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.1 SW downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 Remote Inventory Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.1 Remote Inventory operating sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.2 Remote Inventory detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 Mediation Function applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.2 Mediation Function: local configuration application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.3 Mediation Function: administrative application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12 Network Configuration For Remote Craft Terminal and Q2 Mediation Function . . . . 4.12.1 Configuration Procedure for Adm Networks Handled By Remote Craft Terminal . . . . 4.12.2 How to create the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.3 Basic concepts about mediation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.4 NECTAS activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.5 Configuration of the Network Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.6 Time Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47 49 49 50 52 63 63 64 71 71 82 119 170 178 189 192 194 247 254 262 262 265 278 280 282 282 289 290 291 294 299 303 306 311 316 316 317 324 327 331 332 332 333 335 343 345 347
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 2 / 448
2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8
G.784 Performance Monitoring Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mediation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46 46 46 46
COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
349 351 353 353 353 353 353 353 355 355 355 355 358 361 361 361 361 362 363 365
2 STARTUP OF THE PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Scope of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Check on the windows system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 Check on the Windows system by using WINDOWS 3.1 or 3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 Check on the Windows system by using WINDOWS 95 or 98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 INSTALLATION OF THE SWP CRAFT TERMINAL APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 Installation with WINDOWS 3.1 or 3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 Installation with WINDOWS 95 or 98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 STARTUP OF THE SWP CRAFT TERMINAL APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Startup with Windows 3.1 or 3.11 installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Startup with Windows 95 or 98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR REMOTE CRAFT TERMINAL AND Q2 MEDIATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 2.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 2.2 Graphical representation of the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 2.3 Definition of NEs name without Graph. Repres. of the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 2.4 Remote craft terminal option without Graphical support and without equipments label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 2.5 Configuration of the Network elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 3 NE 1651 SM/1661 SMC SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 DISPLAY OF THE NETWORK ELEMENT STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Display alarm status & control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Display G.784 performance monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 LOG ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Maintenance memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 CONFIGURATION FILES MODIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 How to modify files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 OPERATING ROUTINE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 369 369 371 371 371 372 373 373 373 374 375 375 375 377 377
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 3 / 448
8 CRAFT TERMINAL LOGOUT AND LOGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Craft Terminal logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Craft Terminal login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 PROBLEMS WITH CRAFT TERMINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1 Shut Down with WINDOWS 3.1 (or 3.11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 Craft terminal shutdown with Windows 95 or 98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3 Craft terminal restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (TROUBLESHOOTING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 Troubleshooting organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Troubleshooting by means of Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Details on the alarms / status common of the various units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Equipment Controller unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENERAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
379 379 379 379 381 383 383 385 385 385 385 385 387 387 387 392 397 415 415 419 421
2 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 2.1 SW Download from REL. equal/greater than 2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 2.1.1 Conversion Files from the previous Release to Rel. 2.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 2.2 Replacement or Extensions of Units other than Equipment Controller, with no updated SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 2.3 Spare Equipment Controller download, with unknown software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 2.3.1 Installing the SWP equipment controller SWDL applicative on the P.C. . . . . . . . . . . . 434 2.3.2 Downloading the running release on the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 3 UPGRADING PROCEDURE FROM REL. 2.5/2.5.1 C TO REL. 2.7/2.7.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Substitution of Connection Card with new 16x16 matrix Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Substitution of the Full Matrix Unit with new 16x16 matrix Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 DVB and 21x2 Mbit/s Retiming Units spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1 Insertion of a Rel.2.5 C spare unit into a Rel. 2.7 equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2 Insertion of a Rel.2.7 spare unit into a Rel. 2.5 C equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
443 443 443 444 444 444 445 445 445 446
4 1651SM RING NETWORK UPGRADING INTO 1661SMC RING NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Actions and preliminary verifications for 1651SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 4 / 448
7.1.1 How to backup files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Configuration files backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Stored alarms and events file backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 G.784 Performance monitoring file backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Remote Inventory file backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
377 378 378 378 378
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

FIGURES Figure 1. Operator identifier and password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2. Alarm synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3. Data on software product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4. View selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5. Main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6. Bell selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 7. Alarm synthesis Application choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 8. Alarm synthesis History, display, print or file selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9. Alarm synthesis Selection on history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10. Alarm synthesis Selection on secondary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11. Alarm synthesis Selection on mnemonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 12. Alarm synthesis History data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 13. Types of cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 14. Administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 15. Administrative Functions List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 16. Administrative Logout acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 17. Administrative Password change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 18. Administrative Password Change Successful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 19. Administrative Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 20. Administrative Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 21. Administrative Create Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 22. Administrative Modify. select Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 23. Administrative Modify Operator profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 24. Administrative Delete, Select Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 25. Administrative Delete acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 26. Equipment Configuration. Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 27. Equipment Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 28. Equipment Configuration Table Choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 29. Configuration File options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 30. Configuration Open File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 31. Configuration Open, detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 32. Configuration Save as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 33. Configuration Send file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 34. Configuration Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 35. Configuration Audit result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 36. Configuration Save previous file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 37. Equipment Configuration Subrack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 38. Equipment Configuration Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 39. Equipment Configuration EPS/APS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 40. Equipment Configuration APS configuration on Signal Degrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 41. Equipment Configuration Optical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 42. Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 43. Equipment Configuration Bidirectional transmission on single fiber. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 44. Equipment Configuration Sync. Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 45. Equipment Configuration Synch. ADM Type and Trib. Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 46. Equipment Configuration Synch. Priority List Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 47. Equipment Configuration Synch. SSM Value Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 48. Equipment Configuration BER Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 49. Equipment Configuration PPS activation on EXBER (B3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 50. Equipment Configuration Consequent actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
50 50 51 53 53 54 55 56 57 57 58 58 62 63 64 64 65 65 66 67 68 69 69 70 70 72 72 76 76 76 77 77 78 78 79 79 87 88 90 91 92 93 94 96 97 99 101 101 102 102
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 5 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 51. Equipment Configuration G.784 BBE Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 52. Equipment Configuration G.784 ES Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 53. Equipment Configuration G.784 SES Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 54. Equipment Configuration G.784 Performance Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 55. Equipment Configuration Equipment Alarm criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 56. Equipment Configuration STM4 Aggregate Alarm criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 57. Equipment Configuration Alarm Criterion Housekeeping indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 58. Equipment Configuration Office alarms delay configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 59. Equipment Configuration Housekeeping assignment in case of parallel alarm . . . . . . Figure 60. Output housekeeping criteria and label selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 61. Equipment Configuration Drop Shelf,subrack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 62. Equipment Configuration Drop Shelf, Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 63. Equipment Configuration Drop Shelf, EPS/APS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 64. Equipment Configuration Drop Shelf, synchronization:tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 65. Equipment Configuration Drop Shelf, alarm criterion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 66. Connection Configuration with . Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 67. Insert to East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 68. Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 69. Drop unprotected, East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 70. Drop protected, East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 71. Drop/Insert bidirectional unprotected, East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 72. Drop/Insert protected, East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 73. Passthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 74. Unidirectional. Trib. Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 75. BidirectionalTrib. Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 76. Unidirectional West Agg. Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 77. Bidirectional West Agg. Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 78. Drop and Continue West and Insert West . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 79. Drop and Continue East and Insert West . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 80. Drop and Continue East and Insert East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 81. Drop and Continue West and Insert East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 82. MS SPRING Drop and Continue Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 83. TRIB TO TRIB/AGGR WEST CONNECTIONS MODES & ACRONYMIC . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 84. TRIB TO TRIB/AGGR EAST CONNECTIONS MODES & ACRONYMIC . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 85. Broadcasting, Drop + Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 86. Tributary insert + crossconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 87. Connection configuration Enhanced Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 88. Connection Configuration West Agg. Payload structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 89. Connection Configuration Tributary payload structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 90. Connection Configuration Signal label Agg. VC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 91. Connection Configuration . Signal label for trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 92. Connection Configuration Path trace VC4 for aggregate West . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 93. Connection Configuration Path trace for tributaries 140 M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 94. Connection Configuration Path trace for tributaries STM 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 95. Connection Configuration AU4 drop/insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 96. Connection Configuration AU4s Concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 97. Equipment Configuration . MSSPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 98. Connection Configuration Squelching table for HO container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 99. Connection Configuration AU4 Crossconnection for Aggregates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 100. Connection Configuration AU4 CrossConnection for tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 101. Connection Configuration AU4 Passthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 102. Connection Configuration TU drop/insert, tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 103. Connection Configuration TU crossconnection. Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 104. Connection Configuration TU crossconnection Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
103 104 105 106 107 107 108 109 110 112 113 114 116 117 118 120 123 123 124 124 125 125 126 127 127 128 128 129 130 130 131 132 134 134 135 135 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 145 147 148 149 152 153 154 155 157 159 161
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 6 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 105. Connection Configuration . 2 Mb/s tributary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 106. Connection Configuration . 34 Mb/s, 45 Mbit/s or DVB tributary conditions . . . . . . . . . Figure 107. Connection Configuration 34/2 and 5x2 Tran Mux Trib. conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 108. Connection Configuration . 140 Mbit/s tributary port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 109. Connection Configuration 2 Mbit/s retiming configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 110. Connection Configuration TU passthrough Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 111. Connection Configuration AUX/EOW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 112. AUX/AEOW cross connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 113. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 114. DROP SHELF Connection config. STM1E module connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 115. DROP SHELF Connection Config. Drop/Insert allocation DS tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 116. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration TUs cross connection. DS tributaries . . . Figure 117. DROP SHELF Connection Config. 2 Mbit/s trib. condition DS trib.(choice of element) Figure 118. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration 2 Mbit/s tributary condition. DS trib. . . . . . Figure 119. 2 Mbit/s Retiming Tributary condition. DS Trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 120. Local Configuration Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 121. Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 122. Local Configuration OS configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 123. Local Configuration Server NTP Configuration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 124. Local Configuration MS LAPD configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 125. Mediation Function Configuration table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 126. Local Configuration Ethernet address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 127. Local Configuration L2 only parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 128. Local Configuration RECT configuration (choice of element) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 129. Local Configuration RECT configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 130. Routing Table Configuration Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 131. Routing Table Configuration Choice of Element (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 132. Routing Table Configuration Reachable address prefixes element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 133. Routing Table Configuration Choice of element (MESA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 134. Routing Table Configuration Manual ES adjacencies element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 135. Alarm,Status and Control Main screen, Line and Drop Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 136. Alarm Status and Control (AS & C) Line Shelf, Logical View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 137. AS & C Line Shelf, physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 138. AS & C Main screen Drop Shelf , Logical View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 139. AS & C Main screen, Drop Shelf, physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 140. AS & C Housekeeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 141. Line Shelf Power Supplies Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 142. Drop Shelf Power Supplies Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 143. AS & C AUX/EOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 144. AS & C 21 x 2Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 145. AS & C Port 1, Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 146. AS & C View option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 147. AS & C View option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 148. AS & C 3 x 34 Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 149. AS & C 3 x 45 Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 150. AS & C DVB tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 151. AS & C 34/2 and 5 x 2M Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 152. AS & C 34/2 and 5 x 2M Trans. Tributary 5 x 2Mbit/s ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 153. AS & C 34/2 and 5 x 2M Trans. Tributary 34 Mbit/s ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 154. AS & C 140 Mbit/s Switchable Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 155. AS & C STM1 Electrical Switchable Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 156. AS & C Optical LVC STM1 Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 157. AS & C Optical HVC STM1 Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 158. AS & C Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162 162 163 163 164 165 168 169 170 171 173 175 176 176 177 178 179 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 188 189 190 190 191 191 195 196 196 197 197 203 203 203 204 207 207 208 208 210 212 214 217 218 218 220 222 224 226 229
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 7 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 159. AS & C Matrix, LOM of HPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 160. AS & C Matrix, LOP of HPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 161. AS & C Matrix, LOP of HPA, TUG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 162. AS & C Matrix, PSE of LPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 163. AS & C Matrix, PSE of LPC, Trib 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 164. AS & C Matrix, Unequipped Signal Label C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 165. AS & C STM4 Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 166. AS & C STM16 Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 167. AS & C STM16 Aggregate, AU4 PSE of HPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 168. AS & C Clock Reference Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 169. AS & C Clock Reference Unit (Synch. Reference) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 170. AS & C PPS, units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 171. AS & C PPS, TUG3 and VC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 172. AS & C PPS, ports/TU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 173. AS & C Software version, units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 174. AS & C Software version, detail.(Data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 175. AS & C MS SPRING status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 176. AS & C OS status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 177. AS & C ADM 600 Interface, Drop Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 178. AS & C 21x2M trib, Drop Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 179. AS & C 21x2M port, Drop Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 180. AS&C PPS, units, Drop Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 181. AS&C PPS, ports, Drop Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 182. Drop Shelf Units Software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 183. Drop Shelf Software version, detail.(Data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 184. AS & C View option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 185. AS & C History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 186. AS & C History choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 187. AS & C History display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 188. AS & C Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 189. AS & C Remote Control Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 190. AS & C Remote Control, Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 191. AS & C Remote Control results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 192. Meaning of the loopback command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 193. Maintenance Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 194. Maintenance Memory Receive Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 195. Maintenance Memory Display selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 196. Maintenance Memory Group entity selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 197. Maintenance Memory Entity selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 198. Maintenance Memory Group event selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 199. Maintenance Memory Event selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 200. Maintenance Memory Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 201. Maintenance Memory Save File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 202. Maintenance Memory File option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 203. Maintenance Memory Open File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 204. Maintenance Memory Delete File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 205. Maintenance Memory Acknowledge Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 206. Maintenance Memory Clear Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 207. Maintenance Memory Clear acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 208. Maintenance Memory Clear OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 209. Maintenance Memory Selective clear selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 210. G.784 Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 211. G784 Performance Monitoring. Screen interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 212. G784 Performance Monitoring TPs synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
229 229 230 230 231 231 233 236 236 240 240 241 242 242 243 243 245 246 248 251 251 252 252 253 253 254 255 256 256 260 260 261 261 261 264 265 267 268 269 269 270 270 271 278 278 279 279 280 281 281 281 284 286 287
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 8 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 213. G784 Performance Monitoring TPs value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 214. G784 Performance Monitoring Example of result (Quarter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 215. G784 Performance Monitoring. File option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 216. G784 Performance Monitoring. Save File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 217. G784 Performance Monitoring. View option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 218. G784 Performance Monitoring. Mode option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 219. G784 Performance Monitoring. TP selection (start, stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 220. G.784 Performance Monitoring. Configure option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 221. G784 Performance Monitoring. G826 options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 222. G784 Performance Monitoring. G826 optionsSynch. Mux. Sect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 223. G.784 Performance Monitoring. Changing error criteria, SPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 224. Software Download selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 225. Software Download main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 226. Software Download Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 227. Download flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 228. SW Downloading choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 229. SW Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 230. Download in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 231. SW Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 232. Description File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 233. Software men . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 234. SW Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 235. SW Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 236. SW functionalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 237. Server identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 238. Remote inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 239. Remote inventory Receive option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 240. Remote inventory Display selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 241. Remote inventory Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 242. Remote inventory Save file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 243. Remote inventory File option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 244. Remote InventoryOpen File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 245. Remote InventoryDelete File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 246. Remote InventoryDelete Acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 247. Operator identifier and password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 248. Mediation Function selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 249. Alarm synthesis Application choice for Mediation Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 250. Mediation Function: alarms, status and control application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 251. Mediation Function: local configuration application list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 252. Mediation Function: OS configuration table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 253. Mediation Function: Local Q2 interface definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 254. Mediation Function: NE selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 255. Mediation Function: Slave NE address configuration table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 256. Graphical network ( background map with equipment located and labels ) . . . . . . . . . Figure 257. Network with NEs names defined (first column) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 258. Remote craft terminal activation without a graphical support and equipments label . . Figure 259. Popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 260. Network Configuration Network creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 261. Network Configuration Network name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 262. Network Configuration map open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 263. Network Configuration Save map GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 264. Network Configuration Network equipment creation Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 265. Network Configuration Network equipment creation Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 266. Network Configuration Network equipment creation Q2 devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
287 288 289 289 290 292 293 297 298 298 298 303 304 304 305 307 307 308 309 310 311 313 313 314 315 318 319 320 321 322 322 323 323 323 324 325 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 333 334 334 336 337 337 338 338 339 340 340
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 9 / 448
Figure 267. Network Configuration Locate Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Figure 268. Network Configuration Equipment Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Figure 269. Network Configuration Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Figure 270. Network configuration save and close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Figure 271. Nectas activation on local network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Figure 272. Windows International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Figure 273. Windows Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Figure 274. Icons to startup from windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Figure 275. General flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Figure 276. Power supply alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Figure 277. Transmission network level structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Figure 278. EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER Unit replacement 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Figure 279. EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER Unit replacement 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Figure 280. Install Software Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Figure 281. Application Choice Software Download (data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Figure 282. Software Download main screen (data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Figure 283. Software Download menu (data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Figure 284. SW downloading choice (data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Figure 285. Software downloading application (data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Figure 286. SW information (data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Figure 287. Conversion program first screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Figure 288. Conversion program Configuration Application Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Figure 289. Conversion program Old version of Connection Config. file selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Figure 290. Conversion program Old version of Equipment Config. file selection to be associated to the Connect. Config. File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Figure 291. Conversion program New version of Connection Config. file choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Figure 292. Conversion program New version converted file comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Figure 293. Conversion program Acknowledgement message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Figure 294. Initial setup SW Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Figure 295. Download installation interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Figure 296. Installation incomplete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Figure 297. Directory editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Figure 298. Installation in progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Figure 299. Installation completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Figure 300. Installation icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Figure 301. Software Download main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Figure 302. 1651SM ring network to be chanced in a1661SMC ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 TABLES Table 1. Handbooks related to the products hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3. Handbook Configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4. List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5. Software products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6. Synthesis labels and colours ( Global Synth., Network Stations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 7. Synthesis labels and colours ( Local NE ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 8. TU12 Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 9. ASC Colors of the Alarms Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 10. Card/slot relationship LINE SHELF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 11. Card/slot relationship DROP SHELF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 12. Common CARD STATUS indications ( active ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13. Group Event List and relevant Group Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 14. Events details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 15. Thresholds for SES for path types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
16 16 19 25 35 60 61 121 193 198 199 202 272 275 282
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 10 / 448
Table 16. Thresholds for SES for sections types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 17. Relationship between colours (motifs) and measurement result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 18. STM16 Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 19. STM4 Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 20. Optical HVC STM1 Tributary and Electrical STM1 Switch Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 21. Optical LVC STM1 Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 22. APS 1+1 Spare. All STM1 Tributaries (NB1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 23. Tributary 140Mb/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 24. Tributary 3x34 Mb/s and 3x45 Mb/s DVB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 25. Tributary 21x 2 Mb/s, 34/2 & 5Mb/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 26. Matrix (NB1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 27. Descriptor file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 28. Alarm Synthesis indication (Global Synthesis Network Stations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 29. Alarm Synthesis indication (Local NE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 30. Alarm status and remote control general indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 31. Alarms of the STM4/STM16 Aggregates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 32. Alarms of the STM1 Electrical Tributary (140/STM1 Switch. Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 33. Alarms of the STM1 Optical Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 34. Alarms of the 140 Mbit/s Trib. (140/STM1 Switch. unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 35. Alarms of the 3 x 34 / 3 x 45 Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 36. Alarms of the 21 x 2 / 21 x 1.5 Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 37. 3/2 TransMux & 5 x 2Mbit/s Trib. Unit alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 38. Matrix Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 39. Clock Reference Unit alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 40. AUX/EOW Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 41. ADM 600 INTERFACE Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 42. STM 1 E MODULE Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 43. Consequent Action Aggregate STM4/STM16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 44. Consequent Action Trib. STM1 (140/STM1 switch. trib.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 45. Consequent Action Optic STM1 Trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 46. Consequent Action 3 x 34 / 3 x 45 Mbit/s trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 47. Consequent Action Trib. 140 (140/STM1 switch. trib.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 48. Consequent Action 21 x 2 / 21 x 1.5 Mbit/s trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 49. Consequent Action 34/2 TransMux and 5 x 2Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 50. Consequent Action MATRIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 51. Consequent Action ADM 600 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 52. Connection Configurations to be used in the upgrade operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
282 288 299 299 300 300 301 301 301 302 302 310 394 395 396 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 407 408 408 409 409 410 410 411 411 412 413 413 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 11 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
12 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
HANDBOOK GUIDE
448
13 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
14 / 448
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK 1.1 General information

WARNING ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. NOTICE The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of ALCATEL. COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
1.2 Handbook applicability

This handbook applies to the following product-releases: PRODUCT 1651SM & 1661SM-C 1641SM-D PRODUCT 1651SM RELEASE 2.7.1 VERSION (N.B.) ANV P/N 3AL 34643 AAAA 3AL 34644 AAAA ANV P/N 3AL 37365 AAAA FACTORY P/N 521.200.100 521.200.200 FACTORY P/N 521.574.350
1661SM-C 1641SMD
1.7.1 1.0.0
3AL 37365 AAAA 3AL 34434 AAAA
521.574.350 521.551.800
N.B.
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator s Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software version distributed to Customers implies manmachine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures. Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-releases version marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if the screen contents are unchanged.
For further information on the software product and its physical distribution support refer to para.1.3 on page 35.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 15 / 448
1.3 General
Reference must be made to the Technical Handbook (see next para.1.4) with regard to the following general information: Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation Handbook supply to Customers Aims of standard Customer Documentation Handbook updating Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) Supplying updated handbooks to Customers Changes due to new product-release
1.4 Product-release handbooks

The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose product-release is stated in para.1.2 on page 15 consists of the following handbooks: Table 1. Handbooks related to the products hardware
HANDBOOK 1651SM Rel.2.7.1 & 1661SMC Rel.1.7.1 Technical Handbook 1641SM-D Rel.1.0 Technical Handbook
ANV Part No. 3AL 38248 AAAA 3AL 35754 AAAA
FACTORY Part No. 955.110.222 F 955.100.182 F
THIS HANDBOOK
Table 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control
HANDBOOK 1651SM Rel.2.7.1 & 1661SMC Rel.1.7.1 Operator s Handbook
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No. 957.140.152 R
THIS HANDBOOK
3AL 38249 AAAA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 16 / 448
1.5 Purpose of the handbook

This handbook describes the operations concerning commissioning, operation and maintenance that the operators must carry out as indicated by the specific software application(s) referred to in this handbook (see para.1.2 on page 15). This handbook must be used together with the associated Technical Handbook and does not replicate information contained into it. In particular, all cautions relevant to safety, rules for EMC and ESD, as well as warnings regarding operations that may cause damages to the equipment, are not duplicated here, but must be retrieved from the Technical Handbook. If the application can be accessed by different types of operators, the information for all the operators involved is properly subdivided into all the chapters constituting the handbook (see para. 1.6 on page 18). When using this handbook it is assumed that the Operators know: the structure (hardware composition) and all the possible operating modes of the equipment (product-release) this handbook refers to. how to use a PC and the Windows environment applications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 17 / 448
1.6 Handbook structure

This handbook has been edited according to the suggestions given by the Code of Practice for Instruction Handbooks issued by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU RACC. R29/82). This handbook is divided into the following main topics (SECTIONS) as described in the Table of Contents: HANDBOOK GUIDE: DESCRIPTION: It contains general information on safety rules and handbook structure. This section provides all the general and detailed descriptions (including eventual appendices) required by all types of operators to properly execute the procedures described in the sections that follow. The chapters of this section contain the procedures needed to load and activate the software application on the system. By operation it is meant the use of the software application needed to carry out the main functions according to the design objectives. Therefore, this section comprises all the application usage procedures, except those indicated in the MAINTENANCE section. This section contains all the procedures concerning maintenance (hardware) to the equipment on which the application is loaded, and to the software applicative. Section included (but not necessarily used) containing all the procedures common to the COMMISSIONING and/or OPERATION and/or MAINTENANCE functions. Section envisaged (but not necessarily included) containing additional documentation or general information on other topics not inherent to the chapters making up the handbook.
COMMISSIONING:
OPERATION:
MAINTENANCE:
GENERAL PROCEDURES:
ANNEX:
N.B.
The COMMISSIONING, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE and GENERAL PROCEDURES sections consist of chapters representing a specific procedure. Whenever possible, each procedure shall contain the information of a welldefined function so that the Customer can have various handbooks required for each type of operator.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 18 / 448
1.7 Handbook configuration check

1.7.1 List of the editions and modified parts The following table indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition. Legend n m p d = new part = modified part = provisional part = deleted part
Table 3. Handbook Configuration check EDITION DESCRIPTIONS 1. HW/SW Prerequisites For Software Loading 2. Operative Functions 3. Product Interface 4. Dialogue Mode COMMISSIONING 1. Introduction 2. Startup of the PC 3. Installation of the SWP Craft Terminal Applicative SW 4. Startup of the SWP Craft Terminal Applicative SW OPERATION 1. Introduction 2. Network Configuration for Remote Craft Terminal and Q2 Mediation Function 01 n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n 02 03 04 05 06
3. NE 1651SM / 1661SMC Software Configuration 4. Display of the Network Element Status 5. Log Access 6. Configuration files modification 7. Operating Routine Procedure 8. Software ShutDown and Restart MAINTENANCE 1. Introduction 2. PC Maintenance 3. Software ShutDown and PC Restart
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4. Corrective Maintenance (Troubleshooting) 5. Unit Replacement with a Spare Table continues
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 19 / 448
EDITION GENERAL PROCEDURES 1. Introduction 2. Software Download 3. Upgrading Proc. fro Rel. 2.6/2.6.1 C to Rel. 2.7/2.7.1 4. Upgrading Proc. from 1651SM to 1661SMC Ring Net. ANNEXES (LIST) 1. Annexes A Not envisaged
01 n n n n n n
02
03
04
05
06
1.7.2 Notes on Ed.01 Ed.01 created on March 12, 2001 is the first validated and officially released version of the handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 20 / 448
2 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS 2.1 First aid for electric shock
Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened. Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor. ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek doctor help immediately. TREATMENT OF BURNS This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present). WARNING: Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts; Apply dry gauze on the burns; Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 21 / 448
Mouth to mouth resuscitation method

Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in his mouth (dentures, chewinggum etc.), Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put a hand under the patients head and one under his neck (see fig.) Lift the patients head and let it recline backwards as far as possible Shift the hand from the patients neck to is chin: place your thumb between his chin and his mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers closed together (see fig.). While performing these operations take a good supply of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open. With your thumb between the patients chin and mouth keep his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities (see fig.)
While performing these operations observe if the patients chest rises (see fig.) If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that case open the patients mouth as much as possible by pressing on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patients chest heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first even when the patients nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the hand you were holding his head with. The patients head must be kept sloping backwards as much as possible. Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 22 / 448
2.2 Norms and labels

Refer to the Technical Handbook associated to ALCATELs designed and manufactured equipment to obtain the following information: COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS. SAFETY RULES General rules Harmful optical signals Risk of explosion Moving mechanical parts Heatradiating Mechanical Parts
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGERS (ESD) EQUIPMENT LABELS
Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, WorkStation etc., other than ALCATELs, loaded with software applicatives described in this Handbook, is supplied in the Constructor s technical documentation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 23 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
24 / 448
3 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Other abbreviations, besides the ones indicated below, are directly explained in the Figures, Tables, ect. containing them. For example, the alarm acronyms indicated on the SYNTHESIS and AS & C sceens are specified in the relevant paragraphs and described on the sceens. The unit alarm acronyms are specified in the MAINTENANCE section.
Table 4. List of abbreviations
ABBREVIATION ADM UPG AFI AIS ALS ANV AS&C APS ATTD AU AUX BBE BER BID BIP CIT (CT) CLEI CLNP CNF CRC 4 CRU
MEANING Upgrading AddDrop Multiplexer Authority and Format Identifier Alarm Indication Signal Automatic Laser Shutdown Alcatel Alarm Status and Control Automatic Protection Switching ( New terminology is : MS Linear Trail Protection) Attended (Alarm storing) Administrative Unit Auxiliary Background Block Error Bit Error Rate Bidirectional Byte Interleaving Parity Craft Interface Terminal (Craft Terminal) Common Language Equipment Identification Connectionless Network Protocol Configuration Cyclic Redundancy Code Clock Reference Unit Drop and Continue Drop Insert
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
D/C D/I
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 25 / 448
ABBREVIATION DCC2 DC/DC DL DRT E EACT ECT EEPROM EPS EOW EQT ERS ES ES ESD ESCT GOSIP HPA HPC HPT HVC IDI IECB IP IS IS ACT IS STBY ISO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MEANING Data Communication Channel Power Supply Download Drift East Equipment Assisted Configuration Tool Equipment Craft Terminal Electrically erasable/programmable read only memory Equipment Protection Switching Engineering Order Wire Equipment Element Regeneration Section Errored Seconds End System Electrostatic Discharge Enhanced Shelf Controller Telettra Governement Open System Interconnection Profile Higher order Path Adaptation Higher order Path Connection Higher order Path Termination Higher order Virtual Container Initial Domain Identifier Intra Equipment Card Bus Internet Protocol Intermediate System In service and active In service and standby International Standards Organization International Telecommunication Union Telecommunications sector Local Area Network
ITUT (NB1) LAN
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 26 / 448
ABBREVIATION LAPD
MEANING Link Acces Procedure on Dchannel Loss of Pointer Lower order Path Adaptation Lower order Path Connection Lower order Path Termination Lower order Virtual Container Medium Access Control Management Equipment ( referred to OS ) Maintenance Memory Master Network Element Multiplexer Multiplexer Section Multiplexer Section Termination Multiplexer Section Adaptation Multiplexer Section Shared Protection Ring Network Element Network Equipment Craft Terminal Application Software Network Service Access Point Network Time Synchronization Protocol Out of Frame Seconds OverHead Out of Range of LASER output Power Operation System Open System Interconnection Printed Board Assembly (synonymous with unit) Personal Computer Phisical Interface Pointer Justification Pointer Justification Counter Performance Monitoring Part Number Plesiochronous Physical Interface
LOP LPA LPC LPT LVC MAC ME MM MNE MPX MS MST MSA MS SPRING NE NETCAS NSAP NTP OFS OOFS OH ORA OS OSI PBA PC PI PJ PJC PM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
P/N PPI
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 27 / 448
ABBREVIATION PPS PSE QB3 QECC R RAM R ECT R EACT RS RST SA SDH SE SES SETG SM SMEC SMC SNCP SMS SPI SPS SSM SSMM SSMA SSMB SSU STM1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MEANING Path Protection Switching ( new terminology is : Sub Network Connection Protection ) Protection Switching Element Interface with Protocol B3 Interface with Q protocol for Embedded Control Channel Read Random Access Memory REMOTE ECT REMOTE EACT Regenerator Section Regenerator Section Termination Section Adaptation Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Errored seconds Severely Errored Seconds Sycrhonous Equipment Timing Generation Function Synchronous Multiplexer Synchronous Multiplexer Equipment Controller Compact Synchronous Multiplexer Sub Network Connection Protection (substitutes PPS) Synchronous Multiplexer Section Synchronous Physical Interface Synchronous Path Section Synchronous Status Messages Synchronous Status Messages Management Synchronous Status Messages Algorithm Synchronous Status Messages Byte Synchronous Supply Unit Synchronous Transport Module 155Mbit/s Synchronous Transport Module 622Mbit/s Synchronous Transport Module 2488Mbit/s
STM4 STM16
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 28 / 448
ABBREVIATION SW
MEANING Software Software Product Software Download Threshold cross Telecomunication Management Network Terminal Points Timing Physical Interface Tributary Unit Tributary Unit Group Unavailable Seconds Bidirectional Unavailable Seconds Unavailable Time Unequipped Signal label ( byte C2 ) Virtual Container West/Write Wait Time to Restore
SWP SWDW TCA TMN TP TPI TU TUG UAS UAS BIDI UATUT UN C2 VC W WTR
NB1 Owing to change of name, all documents issued by the two ITU committees (CCIR and CCITT) in 1992 ( and in some cases even before then) are classified as ITUR and ITUT, respectively.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 29 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
30 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
DESCRIPTIONS
31 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
32 / 448
1 HW/SW PREREQUISITES FOR SOFTWARE LOADING 1.1 Hardware configuration

With regard to the installation and the distribution of the product, the system configuration consists of: a 486 Personal Computer compliant with the following minimal configuration: a monochromatic video a Microsoft compatible mouse, an asynchronous communication port (referred as COM 1 or COM 2), one 3 1/2 floppy disk drives (1 , 44MB)
Using Windows 3.1 and 3.11 : at least 8 MB of RAM, one 40 MB hard disk (80 MB or more can be necessary depending on equipment and/or network size)
Using Windows 95 and 98 at least 16 MB of RAM (using a configuration with 24 MB of RAM will increase performances) one 270 MB hard disk
This configuration can be completed with: memory extensions a printer (serial or parallel known by WINDOWS) a color video with high resolution
Using Windows 95 or 98 it is necessary to check the desktop model and the screen resolution. Select the screen proprieties and select the Windows standard model for the desktop. Set the screen resolution to 640x480 16 colors.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 33 / 448
1.2 Operative ambient

The following software items are required: or : WINDOWS 95 (Copyright Microsoft Corporation) or 98. Applicative software SWP ECT 1651 SM implementing the equipment management functions. NECTAS (Copyright ALCATELCIT) is contained in this applicative. The above software applicative can be substituted with the SWP EACT 1651 SM featuring: Equipment Assisted Configuration Tool (EACT). The Applicative SWP RECT 1651 SM Remote Equip. Craft Terminal Software is available as an alternative where a centralized management for small SDH networks is requested ( F interface ). The previous SWP can be substituted with the SWP REACT 1651 SM that supplies the EACT feature for the Remote Craft Terminal functions. Applicative software SWP 1651 SM containing the software program to load on the equipment. The SWP EQ. CONTR. SWDL contains the SW which allows the direct access to the SW Download function . Through it the Equipment Controller will be updated to the SW release being currently used. In this Release the SW applicative managing the equipment is supplied in several versions, one excluding the other, with / without EACT ,with / without Remote Craft Terminal functions. This Handbook describes the SWP R ECT 1651 SM applicative software. The alternative applicative software SWP EACT 1651 SM or SWP R EACT 1651 SM performs congruence checks on the configuration functions, therefore some windows and options may differ from those supplied in this handbook and in no way affect correct equipment management. Each of these applicative SW may manage the DROP SHELF equipment (1641 SM D ) that is an optional 2Mbit/s extension of the 1651 SM Line Shelf one. The Drop Shelf is described in the relevant Technical Handbook, while the relevant PC management is described in this Operator s Manual. The Drop Shelf extension management is possible only using the SMEC 2 equipment controller unit and the DS Future Bus Termination Unit. Nevertheless the upgrading of the ESCT equipment controller unit at 2.4 Release is also allowed whether the Drop Shelf extension is not implemented. MSDOS Microsoft operative system of a version equal to or greater than 5.0. WINDOWS 3.1 (Copyright Microsoft Corporation) or 3.11.
N.B.
1.2.1 Year 2000 Data Time Compliance The SW product (NE SW Package and CT SW Packages) supplied, are Year 2000 compliant.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 34 / 448
1.3 Physical supports of the release software

The product is supplied on 3.5 disks formatted at 1.4 MB.
The diskettes are indicated in :
Table 5. Software products
FACTORY Part Number SWP 1651 SM Rel. 2.7 SWP ECT 1651 SM Rel. 2.7 SWP EACT 1651 SM Rel. 2.7 SWP RECT 1651 SM Rel. 2.7 SWP REACT 1651 SM Rel. 2.7 SWP EQ. CONTROLLER SWDL 415.100.625 D 415.100.622 A 415.100.621 H 415.100.624 C 415.100.623 B 415.100.125 Y
ANV Part Number 3AL 38237 AA 3AL 38234 AA 3AL 38213 AA 3AL 38236 AA 3AL 38235 AA 3AL 34939 AA
N.B. 3 1,4 1,5 1,6 1,7 2
NOTE 1:
Contains, in the first three diskettes, the 1320 NX NECTAS applicative ( ALCATELCIT). The release of NECTAS applicative can be read in the first of these diskettes, in the ETIQ.INF file. Software to be loaded onto the Craft Terminal to download the Equipment Controller when the management Software is not known or not available, starting from rel. 2.3 of the 1641SM or rel. 2.1 of the 1651SM or rel. 1.0 of the 1664SM or rel. 1.0 of the 1641SMT or rel. 1.0 of the 1655/66 SR. For details refer to para.2.3 on page 434. Software to load on the Equipment Controller and on the Card controller of the various Units Software containing the Craft Terminal Management Applicatives Software containing the Craft Terminal Management Applicatives with EACT Software containing the Remote Craft Terminal Management Applicative Software containing the Remote Craft Terminal Management Applicative with EACT
NOTE 2 :
NOTE 3 :
NOTE 4 : NOTE 5 : NOTE 6 : NOTE 7 :
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 35 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
36 / 448
2 OPERATIVE FUNCTIONS 2.1 Introduction

As stated in ITUT Rec. G.784, the NE 1651 SM/1661 SMC can be controlled: by a PC (CIT) through interface F (in a local mode). NB. by a workstation utilized for the TMN through interface QB3* (in a remote mode).
This Operator s Manual describes the PC management. N.B. By a PC and F interface each NE can control in a remote way the NEs of a SDH network (max 32 NEs included itself) by means of the R ECT / R EACT SWP. This SW Product executes the management functions required by a local operator to locally manage the NE 1651 SM / 1661 SMC, (included the 1641SMD equipment that in the following it will be considered always present) and performs the same management function for all the NEs connected to the master in a network. This applicative contains the facilities to recognise and reach the NEs of the network and to perform a dialogue between Master and the other NEs of the network. While the Master NE must be downloaded with the RECT (or R EACT) SWP, all the NEs must be downloaded with a SWP in current release (not necessarily RECT or REACT) because this release support the remote function. The procedure for a Network Creation is described in para 4.12 on page 332. In the Local and Remote management the main functions permit to: know the failure/event conditions on the equipment perform the remote controls know information about the service quality level set, know and modify information about configurations. update equipment release through software download (in the local management only)
The SWP 1651 SM software product is used to software load the equipment by the local operator. The operative sequences of the software download are described in the GENERAL PROCEDURES section.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 37 / 448
2.2 Product Applications

After having physically connected the PC to the Equipment, open the NECTAS tool. The first screen You see, referred as Alarm Synthesis, presents managements options, alarms & status synthesis for each of the handeled NEs, global alarm & status synthesis. The complete list of indication and meanings is reported in para 4.3 on page 52. The SWP CRAFT TERMINAL 1651 SM functions are carried out through the following applications: Administrative Equipment configuration Connections configuration with Matrix Drop Shelf Connections configuration Local configuration Routing Table configuration Alarms, status and remotecontrols Maintenance Memory G.784 Performance Monitoring Software download Remote Inventory
Besides each of these 1651SM/1661SM C equipment can be connected to a 1641SM D equipment. In the following the first will be cited as LINE SHELF and the last one as DROP SHELF. The 1651SM/1661SM C equipment can be utilized as a Mediation device to manage, from Craft Terminal or Operation System, other Alcatel non SDH equipment. For this function the following applications are available to the operator: Administrative Alarms, status and remotecontrols Local configuration
2.2.1 Administrative The Administrative application is used for the station operators management. It is not used for the NE management (except for the logout) The Administrative application allows to:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
execute equipment logout operation (disconnect the operators from the NE) modify the password for the current operators create or delete the permission for the operators to access the NE The relevant password is defined define the level of each operator by enabling him or not to use the applications available. display the operations made available through the software applications for each configured operator
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 38 / 448
2.2.2 Configuration Application The configuration applications are used for the software setting of the NE. The main use of these applications concerns the turnon of the NE in order to put it in service (operation). They are also utilized in all the plant extension or modification. It is also possible to verify the configuration without modification. Different configuration applications are possible: Equipment configuration Connection configuration with Matrix Drop Shelf Connection configuration ( SMEC EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER UNIT AND DS FUTURE BUS TERMINATION NEEDED) Local configuration Routing Table configuration
Each of the above can carry out the following operations: Create a configuration file. The operator can utilize a list of tables called configuration parameters. The default values of each table can be modified and saved in a configuration file. This file will have an univocal name and will be added to the list of the configuration files that can be sent to the NE. Open/Modify an existing configuration file The operator can modify the previously created and identified configuration files as long as they are open. The modified data can be then stored again in the same file or a new configuration file can be created. Forward a previously stored configuration file to the NE. This condition corresponds to a change or reset of configuration data on the NE so as to activate a specific function of the NE. When the operator selects this option, a list of all the configuration files available for the NE appears. The operator can select the desired configuration file. Receive the current configuration of the NE. This option permits to know the configuration present on the NE. The required configuration is stored in a file that the operator can read and control. Check the configuration values present on different configuration files (audit). With this option the operator can compare different configuration files so as to detect differences and then clear those files not corresponding to certain criteria. Clear a configuration file from the list. A configuration file is cleared only after having selected its name from the list shown to the operator Fill/checkin the File Header, title and indication on files Check the Default Status of the configuration tables.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The tables of each different configuration application can be modified and updated. After having updated the configuration, the tables are sent to the NE. The TMN authorizes the execution of the configuration procedure. The authorization is managed by the NE. If the Craft Terminal cannot modify the configuration because it has been disabled by TMN, the NE forwards the Access Enabled alarm. The latter is signalled in the general synthesis (AE).
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 39 / 448
2.2.2.1 Equipment Configuration Application The application allows to realize the main software setting relating to equipments units functionalities as, for example, the subrack configuration, the synchronization, the EPS/APS protection, the alarm criteria, etc. For the complete list refer to para.4.5.2 on page 82.
2.2.2.2 Connection Configuration with Matrix Application The application allows to realize the software setting relating to the connection of the equipment as, for example, the connection between the incoming/outgoing signals (dropinsert, passthrough, etc), to define the signal structure etc. For the complete list refer to para.4.5.3 on page 119.
2.2.2.3 Drop Shelf Connection configuration The application allows to realize the software setting relating to the connection of the DROP SHELF equipment as, for example, the connection between the incoming/outgoing signals (dropinsert, passthrough, etc). These selections are only possible with the use of the SMEC and DS Future Bus Termination unit. For the complete list refer to para.4.5.4 on page 170.
2.2.2.4 Local Configuration Application This application is utilized for local data configuration inherent to the NE with TMN supervisory network management with OS or Remote Craft Terminal Management. For the complete list refer to para. 4.5.5 on page 178 .
2.2.2.5 Routing Table Configuration Application For the TMN management routing of messages between NE and OS is automatically carried out by means of ISIS Routing. Only for elements not supporting this function it is necessary to fill the Routing tables. The Routing configuration tables are listed in para.4.5.6 on page 189.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 40 / 448
2.2.3 Alarms, status and remotecontrols The alarm, status and remotecontrol application permits to:
display the alarm and status display/print the alarm history and status enter the remote controls
The application is mainly used by the operator during the maintenance phase for troubleshooting purposes. It also permits, both in the turnon and in operation phases, to check the alarms and status conditions. By means of the Remote Control, it is possible to test NE operative functions (for turnon and maintenance ). The following description applies to both local or remote NE pertaining to a SDH subnetwork when properly activated. The AS & C subsystem (Alarms, Status and Remotecontrols) systematically polls the equipment. The polling time is established by the equipment when this is connected. The messages received from the NE 1651 SM/1661 SMC can be: alarms/alarm clearing entity status changes answers to the remote controls sent to the NE by the Craft Terminal.
Upon receiving the message, the AS & C must identify and display the contents and afterwards file it with all the other alarms that have occurred on the NE. The video shows both the logical and physical aspects of the NE. The logical and physical structure will depend on the configuration that the operator has sent to the NE. Only the configured units appear on the screen. Each displayed unit is assigned with an alarmindicating label. When the AS&C displays a received alarm, it uses different symbols. Depending on the severity of the alarm, i.e.: URGENT NOT URGENT INDICATIVE
The boxes assigned to the alarms can assume different colours and symbols according to the category assigned to the alarm the type of alarm occurred on the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each alarm has an identifier (mnemonic name) associated to a specific source (processed device). The current alarms can be simultaneously displayed in a graphic and text format. The alarm location can be accessed with the aid of the mouse or a set of keys on the keyboard. The ZOOMING function gives a detailed view of each unit.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 41 / 448
2.2.3.1 Alarm and status handling The NE forwards alarms and status criteria. The Alarm, Status and Control applications (AS&C) offer three different informations on the errors: 1) 2) 3) Alarm synthesis indicating the active alarms and states. Detail of the alarm states Alarm history and status
The alarm synthesis displays the alarms occurred on the NE This synthesis is an ORing of alarms classified as URGENT, NOT URGENT, INDICATIVE etc. The alarm report is displayed when the alarms occur. Each alarm or event is recorded in a history file containing the following information on each alarm: date hour unit type of alarm alarm severity alarm status
Data research in an alarm history file occurs through: date unit type of alarm alarm severity
or reading all the alarms THE ALARM HISTORY IS STORED ON THE P.C. HARD DISK. The storing procedure depends on the hard disk configuration (min. 80 Mbyte). The video indication of the AS&C application is divided into different levels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 42 / 448
2.2.3.1.1 First level: Logic and Physic blocks The first level, for both Line and Drop shelf shows the following functional blocks:
Alarm Synthesis block Logic block rapresentation of the Equipment Physical block rapresentation of the Equipment
On the screen are also represented the following functions: MS SPRING Node and command Status, with reference to the MS SPRING protection (1661SMC Line Shelf only) OS (Operating System Status), it shows which OS,Main or Spare, is active (Line Shelf only) SW VERSION shows the SW version for all units PPS (SNCP) contains two forced switch (EAST/WEST) indications
The synthesis indicates the status of the equipment through highlighted screen labels that reports general alarms and status indication as urgent / not urgent alarm, power fail, OS isolation, etc. The complete list can be found in Table 9. on page 193. The logic block if opened by clicking on it, describes the functional units making up the equipment and it contains two alarm indications. Logical Alarm Synthesis It is a synthesis of all alarms coming from all units of the equipment Abnormal Conditions Synthesis of AC status indications pertaining the units housed in the Equipment The physical block shows the equipment hardware configuration and the states of the NE units (the units are as those of the Logical Block). It contains the following indications: Card Fail Internal Failure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 43 / 448
2.2.3.1.2 Second level Clicking inside the Logic box we reach the 2nd screen level. Each unit housed in both Line and Drop Shelf is provided with the following indicators: unit alarm unit abnormal condition (not for AUX/EOW Unit) Unit inservice or outofservice status Active or standby status
Clicking inside the physical box the following indication are provided : Card Fail Unit alarm and only for the Switch unit: Card missing Card mismatch Card Fail
The following indication is provided for the Drop Shelf STM 1 E Module: Card fail or card missing
When the slot indicates ACTIVE, the AS&C application displays the units that are really inservice with a blue coloring. When the slot indicates NOT ASSIGNED, the AS&C application displays a blank slot. If the unit is faulty, extracted or inserted in a not assigned slot, the NE will send an alarm report.
Clicking inside the Physical box we reach a 2nd screen level in which is shown a HW configuration. The slot No. indicated on the screen is the position of the unit inside the subrack in their sequential order starting from left to right and from top to bottom.
2.2.3.1.3 Detailed levels For the equipments unit and for the functional blocks of the main screen, deepest levels of detail are provided. They are activated by means of the zooming function. They represent, for example, ITUT compliant functional blocks with the detailed alarm and status indications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 44 / 448
2.2.3.2 Remote controls These commands are utilized to force functions on the NE as for example: restart the software on the equipment, alarm attending, enable/disable loopback on the units, force/clear EPS/APS protections and synchronizations. A complete list of the commands can be found in para 4.6.3 on page 254 . TMN (if present) must authorize the commands because these reconfigure the NE. The NE manages the authorization protocol. If the alarm indicating OS isolation is present, authorization is not necessary.
2.2.4 Maintenance Memory Application The Maintenance Memory application enables access to a NE memory area. The latter shall contain the data concerning beginning/ending of the events (alarms, status etc.).that have occurred on the NE proper. The mainly application is used by the operator during the maintenance phase for troubleshooting purposes. It also permits, both in the turnon and in operation phases, to check the alarms and status history. The Maintenance Memory is structured in a series of blocks each of which is associated to an entity defined inside the NE. Each entity consists of a series of events which, by means of blocks, can be stored inside the Maintenance Memory. The entities are arranged into groups. The events can be read from the NE following operator request only, through selections carried out in the application proper. Moreover it is possible to: save the maintenance data in a file delete a maintenance data file clear the whole maintenance memory.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 45 / 448
2.2.5 G.784 Performance Monitoring Application The Performance Monitoring Application permits to check the quality of the links on Sections and Path (tributary and aggregate). This permits to make checks, in sequence of day or quarterof hour periods, during the in service operation and for Routing Maintenance. This application permits to: Enable/disable the performance monitoring counters of the NE Terminal Points (TP) by means of different operation and configuration modes Display and/or print the performance monitoring results received from the NE. Store the performance monitoring results in a history file
The performance monitoring information is displayed on the three screen levels: The first level displays the error synthesis of all the enabled TPs. The second level screen displays the error synthesis of the counters of the selected TP. The third and last level displayes the values of the counters of the selected TP.
2.2.6 Software Download This application permits to update the software version of the Equipment without interrupting regular operation. In this way the equipment follows the product evolution. Software download is carried out by sending through the F interface, the NE equipment software previously installed in the P.C. Software download can be carried out from the Operation System, in a centralized mode in the network.
2.2.7 Remote Inventory Remote Inventory application allow to display information about all the unit of the equipment, needed by the customer to check and monitor the installed equipment (identification, construction data ect.). In this way it makes easier the NE station management.
2.2.8 Mediation function The 1651SM/1661SM C equipment can be utilized as a Mediation device to manage, from Craft Terminal or Operation System, other Alcatel non SDH equipment. When this function is used, the following application (referred to the mediation function), are present: Alarms, status and remotecontrols Local configuration Administrative
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 46 / 448
3 PRODUCT INTERFACE
The product has two main interfaces:
User interface 1651 SM/1661 SMC interface
The first interface consists of the Windows Microsoft system with windows, scrollingdown menu and mouse functions. The local operator can traverse the treestructured environment thus selecting the applications and functions allowed. With regard to the second interface, the 1651 SM/1661 SMC is linked to the PC through the RS 232 C port.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 47 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
48 / 448
4 DIALOGUE MODE 4.1 Introduction

In this chapter all the management operations carried out by means the craft terminal are presented. This is made by means description of all the available screens. The description given herein, concerns only the equipment management applications obtained with the SWP Equipment Craft Terminal applicative. The para 4.12 on page 332 describes the creation of a network to remote manage several NEs with a Craft Terminal. The software product utilizes the MicroSoft WINDOWS system which facilitates the management of the video masks utilized for the NE 1651 SM/1661 SMC. The operator can utilize two different instruments (one cannot exclude the other) to move across the video to select applications, operations and various menus: a MOUSE which permits to move the cursor (arrow) across the screen, and selections are made by clicking one of the 2 buttons; a KEYBOARD which permits to use some function keys, i.e.,: TAB and arrows for vertical and horizontal movements.
Each mask is always provided with some functional keys, specifically: < RETURN > < OK > \ < Cancel > < ESC > < F1 > to confirm the choice made to confirm or cancel a choice/request/modification to quit the operation in progress The Help information depends on the selected screen. It is arranged in pages and the operator can scroll all the pages thus viewing all the instructions inherent to the application involved.
The information stated above is applicable to all the operations handled by the operator. The operative sequences concerning download is given in the GENERAL PROCEDURES section. In different screen of this handbook is not indicated the release number which is instead present in the screen displayed to the operator. This is due to the fact that the same screen is associated to different release. Sometimes the release number reported is only for example.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 49 / 448
4.2 Operator access

After having activated the procedure (see Chapter 4 on page 361 , Commissioning Section) the screen of Figure 1. is displayed indicating the need for operator identifier and password to login.
Figure 1. Operator identifier and password Hence the Alarm Synthesis window will appear. The window is referred to the whole network which the present NE belongs to (see Figure 2. ) The screen shows the following indications: the title the options the Global Synthesis alarm pertaining to all NEs of the Network the equipment above / below (if any ) alarm synthesis for all those NEs that dont take place in main screen. the alarm synthesis of the NEs
TITLE OPTIONS GLOBAL ABOVE NEs (LOCAL)
BELOW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 2. Alarm synthesis
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 50 / 448
For each Network Element is presented one string with the relevant synthesis of the alarm. When for a NE the Q2 Mediation Function is activated (to manage non SDH equipment), another synthesis string is present. Further, for each non SDH equipment, a proper accessible synthesis string is activated. The software is suitable for: operators without technical knowhow operators with technical knowhow
The ADMINISTRATIVE application assigns operators of different technical knowhow with various levels of applications. For example, operators having no technical background must be assigned with a level which prevents them accessing Configurations or Remote Controls. Moreover, each operators must be given a PASSWORD. Upon activating the application, the Synthesis line of the PC screen will display the DC alarm indicating the Default Configuration. The indication will disappear after that the operator sends a configuration file for each of the configuration applications. Moreover, each window can display the software product utilized by clicking the mouse button on the triangular glyph at the topleft screen in the options row ( see as an example the Figure 3. )
Figure 3. Data on software product
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 51 / 448
4.3 Alarm synthesis window

Through the Alarm synthesis window is utilized the software product and displayed the alarms without detailing the applications. This window provides the following options: VIEW, BELL, APPLICATION CHOICE, HISTORY and HELP VIEW this option, if selected, shows the following choices (see Figure 4. on page 53 ). ALPHAMODE GRAPHIC MODE FAULTY ELEMENT / ALL ELEMENT COMPLETE SYNTHESIS LIST NETWORK SUBNETWORK / EQUIPMENT REFERENCES
The ALPHA MODE and GRAPHICAL MODE options allows to choose between textual or graphical equipment synthesis and equipment management. The FAULTY ELEMENT / ALL ELEMENT option permits to display the alarm synthesis of the NEs with active alarms or the alarm synthesis of all the NEs. By activating the COMPLETE SYNTHESIS LIST option is activated the string inherent to the master NE 1651SM in addition to the Global Synthesis alarm string. See Figure 5. on page 53. By clicking on the NE 1651SM string, the Application Choice option is activated. The NETWORK option allows to initialize the Remote functionalities after having applied the RECT configuration, stated in the Chapter 4.12 on page 332. The alternative SUBNETWORK / EQUIPMENT choice if selected deactivates the Remote functions and enable the simple local management. The REFERENCE OPTION is not active. For each unit the SW version is indicated in the file SWKIT.TXT of SWP 1651SM of the current release (diskette 1).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 52 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 4. View selection
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 5. Main screen
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
53 / 448
BELL
this option permits to choose the DISABLE, the CUT OFF and the ALARM CUT OFF functions. See Figure 6.
The first disables the BEEP that indicates an alarm condition on the NE, symbol V denotes disabling; the second disables the BIP but enables the Craft Terminal to receive the N.E.s further alarms; the third ALARM CUT OFF attents the alarms (AT label indication) One alarm at time is attended.
Figure 6. Bell selection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 54 / 448
APPLICATION CHOICE
this option opens a subwindow (see Figure 7. ) which permits to select one application among those available. The application choice option is accessible after having activated the NE local alarm synthesis string. When activating the Mediation function, another different list of application choice is presented. This function is presented at para 4.11 on page 324.
Figure 7. Alarm synthesis Application choice
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 55 / 448
HISTORY
The operator can select the data to DISPLAY or PRINT through the following choices ( See Figure 9. on page 57 ): Secondary Mnemonic to define which NE of the network to select the data See Figure 10. on page 57. it is possible to select ALL the synthesis alarms or a specific Synthesis alarm from the presented list. See Figure 11. on page 58. When enabled (X) permits to define the Begin/end data time of the selected MNEMONIC Synthesis alarm.
Date Filter
After having selected the desired data, a 12row video window (containing the last 12 alarms) is available. This window can be scrolled so as to display all the alarms concerned with the selections made, listed from the most recent to the least recent ones (see Figure 12. on page 58). If printing had been selected instead, the printer will receive all the messages inherent to the characteristics entered.
HELP
This option permits to obtain information on the alarm synthesis option and display the types of cursors.
To select an option, click the mouse leftbutton once.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 8. Alarm synthesis History, display, print or file selection
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 56 / 448
This function allows to store in the PC events occurred during the operation, only when the PC is connected th the NE. The HISTORY option permits to DISPLAY, PRINT or save in a FILE the synthesis information received from the NE (see Figure 8. ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 9. Alarm synthesis Selection on history
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 10. Alarm synthesis Selection on secondary
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
57 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 11. Alarm synthesis Selection on mnemonic
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 12. Alarm synthesis History data
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
58 / 448
In this release by means of the RECT functionality the 1651SM equipment can manage device functions towards a max of 32 equipment pertaining to the same local network.
The management functionalities offered by the RECT function are similar to those offered by an OS In fact the R ECT product allows a centralized management system for small SDH networks. The RECT functions provide a remote login facility allowing the R_ECT operator attached to one NE via F interface, to monitor several NEs and to start a login session on the local NE or on any of the remote configured NEs on condition that they had been loaded with a software version supporting the RECT feature. The RECT product permits to realize the same application of the Craft Terminal Local management except for the Software Download, not allowed. The RECT operator can select by means of the VIEW option the connection with all the NEs of the network or the local connection directly through the F interface. For all these connections the operator is requested to type the relevant LOGIN. The Figure 5. on page 53 shows the Main screen in the case of single NE alarm synthesis. It is shown the alarm synthesis of the whole network that is the Global synthesis alarm string. It is the system synthesis alarms ORing of the NEs managed by the R_ECT operator. The Equipment above and the Equipment below alarm synthesis concern the NEs managed by the R_ECT operator and not displayed on the current screen. The Application choice option associated with the equipment selected, is accessed when selecting the Equipment string. The window also indicates the equipment name and release and the OSI address (M for ADM NE of the network and S, not applicable in this release, for eventual PDH equipment connected to the single NE acting as a Mediation Device). As an alternative the R_ECT operator can give a name to the NE . The Equipment above / below alarm indication rows are always present.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 59 / 448
The labels on these windows will change colours when an alarm condition arises. See Table 6. and Table 7. on page 61.
The Global Synthesis labels on the Network Stations window with reference to Figure 5. on page 53 are the followings: Table 6. Synthesis labels and colours ( Global Synth., Network Stations)
NORMAL EF DF AS AT UG NG HA SA DA SF ST TC Equipment Failure No answer from NE Dialogue Failure Wrong answer from NE Alarm Stop Bell disable Alarm receiving attention Urgent Alarm Not Urgent Alarm Housekeeping Alarms Service affecting (dialog with OS) Distant Alarm (IND Network alarm synthesis) Signal Failure (dialog with OS) Status indicator (abnormal indication) Craft Terminal Connected to the NE Access Enable: Local Craft Terminal access enabled by the management Operative System. When disabled the Local operator can read information without writing. Default Configuration: the NE is configured with the default values Loss of Configuration: The configurations in the N.E. are lost Three Remote F Terminals connected. It rises in the case of three RECT operators opened a management session at the same time on the present NE. NB2 White White White White White White White White White White White Green Red Red
ALARM (or active)
Green Magenta Red Yellow NB1 Magenta Magenta Magenta Green White (Not connected)
AE
Green
White (disabled)
DC LC
White White
Black (default) Red (loss)
BU
White
Blue
NB1 :
The colour of the label depends on the severity of the Housekeeping Alarms received: red for Urgent, yellow for Not urgent, magenta for Indicative. The colour associated to the most severe alarm is present when more than one alarm is detected. BU indication is only shown when a network has been created for the Remote Craft Terminal management.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NB2 :
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 60 / 448
The managed labels and colours relevant to the Local NE are:
Table 7. Synthesis labels and colours ( Local NE )
NORMAL EF DF AT UG NG HI IN AC TC Equipment Failure No answer from NE Dialogue Failure Wrong answer from NE Alarm receiving attention Urgent Alarm Not Urgent Alarm Housekeeping Indication Indicative alarm Abnormal Condition Craft Terminal Connected to the NE Access Enable: Local Craft Terminal access enabled by the management Operative System. When disabled the Local operator can read information without writing. Default Configuration: the NE is configured with the default values Loss of Configuration: The configurations in the N.E. are lost Three Remote F Terminals connected. It rises in the case of three RECT operators opened a management session at the same time on the present NE. NB2 White White White White White White White White Green Red Red
ALARM (or active)
Magenta Red Yellow NB1 Magenta Magenta White (Not connected)
AE
Green
White (disabled)
DC LC
White White White
Black (default) Red (loss) Blue
BU
NB1 :
The colour of the label depends on the severity of the Housekeeping received: red for Urgent, yellow for Not urgent, magenta for Indicative. The colour associated to the most severe alarm is present when more than one alarm is detected. BU indication is only shown when a network has been created for remote Craft Terminal management.
NB2 :
The labels report the alarm mnemonic only. To display the whole name of the alarm, position the mouse pointer (depicted as a hand with pointing forefinger, see Figure 13. on page 62) on the relative label and click and keep pressed the left mousebutton. The alarm name will appear. This condition does not indicate if the alarm is present or not.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 61 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 13. Types of cursor
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
62 / 448
4.4 Administrative application

4.4.1 Description By means of the Administrative application the following functions are carried out: Logout, thus interrupting connection between the Craft Terminal and NE. Modify the operator s current password Display the enabled operator list and relevant allowed applications Create new operators Modify the level of the enabled operators Delete operators enable
The Administrative application can be activated by executing the following selections: the option Application choice from the main menu. This selection displays the list of applications available. the option Administrative from the list of applications available.
Upon selecting the Administrative option the following menu is displayed (see Figure 14. ): File Receive Operator Help
Figure 14. Administrative A small triangle is displayed on the same line of the above described maintenance menu. General information on the Administrative product is displayed by clicking on this triangle. The Help option displays the description of each administrative command. The File and Receive options are not operative.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Operator options is detailed in the paragraph that follow.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 63 / 448
4.4.2 Operator option By selecting this option the operator accesses the administrative function (see Figure 15. ) described hereinafter.
Figure 15. Administrative Functions List
4.4.2.1 Logout The selection of the Logout option permits to interrupt the connection between the Craft Terminal and the NE. The screen of Figure 16. displays the request for logout acknowledgement. By pressing OK the Craft Terminal and the NE are disconnected and the procedure returns to the initial phase illustrated in Figure 1. on page 50. The Logout must be executed at the end of the operations for safety reasons.
Figure 16. Administrative Logout acknowledgement

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 64 / 448
4.4.2.2 Password The selection of the Password option allows to modify the password of the operator that is executing the application. The screen of Figure 17. is displayed. It is necessary to enter the previous password and twice the new password. Hence click on OK, at this point the screen of Figure 18. is displayed indicating that operation has taken place.
Figure 17. Administrative Password change
Figure 18. Administrative Password Change Successful
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 65 / 448
4.4.2.3 Date Date and Time are given to the NE from one of the following sources (according to their presence) in the following order: from the NTP (Network Time synchronization Protocol) server from the OS from the RECT
Current date represents the NE date received from one of the above listed sources. New date represents the date the user wants to set if the NE receives date and time from the RECT .To modify it, connect the Craft Terminal to the MASTER NE and use the Windows Control Panel . If the NE receives date and time from the NTP / OS a change of date performed from CT is not effective. TZ represent the time zone . Please refer to para 4.12.6 on page 347 for Time Management.
Figure 19. Administrative Date
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 66 / 448
4.4.2.4 Display The selection of the Display option permits to view the list of authorized operators and the applications which he is authorized to read (consult) and eventually write (intervene) (see Figure 20. ).
Figure 20. Administrative Display
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 67 / 448
4.4.2.5 Create The Create option permits to enter a new operator. The screen of Figure 21. is displayed and the following operations must be carried out: Enter the Operator s identifier Select the operator s level for which he has been enabled Figure 21. illustrates the levels and relevant names of the enabled applications (R=read consult, W=write modification) enter the relevant password twice.
To enable click on OK.
Figure 21. Administrative Create Operator
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 68 / 448
4.4.2.6 Modify The Modify option permits to modify the operator s profile (level). The screen of Figure 22. is displayed, the operation required here is that of entering the selected operator s identifier. By clicking on OK the screen of Figure 23. is displayed. The operator s level can be modified. To enable, click on OK.
Figure 22. Administrative Modify. select Operator
Figure 23. Administrative Modify Operator profile
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 69 / 448
4.4.2.7 Delete The Delete option permits to cancel one of the authorized operators. The screen of Figure 24. allows to enter the operator s identifier. Hence by clicking on OK the screen of Figure 25. is displayed requesting acknowledgement. By clicking on OK cancelling is enabled. Create, Modify and Delete option are enabled only for ADMINistrator.
Figure 24. Administrative Delete, Select Operator
Figure 25. Administrative Delete acknowledge

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 70 / 448
4.5 Configuration Applications

4.5.1 General There are the following types of configuration applications: Equipment Configuration Connection Configuration with Full Matrix Drop Shelf Connection Configuration. Local Configuration Routing Table Configuration
Each of the above permit to: build and change a configuration file containing the connection information for the NE. Download and upload the file display or print the file audit the file.
The Configuration applications can be activated only by a privileged user executing the following selections: the Application Choice option from the main menu; this selection displays the list of the available applications. one out of the Configuration Applications option from the list of applications available.
When opening a configuration application the craft terminal upload the configuration of the NE. A window shows this function (see Figure 26. on page 72) that can be stopped with CANCEL. It is possible to SAVE in a file the uploaded data (see details in the next paragraphs). The following menu is displayed (see Figure 27. on page 72 i.e., if Equipment or Connection Configurations are involved): File Clear Screen Tables Help
Note that the option Clear Screen is active only for SWPRECT and SWPECT 1651SM packages if you are dealing with Equipment or Connection Configuration. Other two SW products indicated as SWPREACT and SWPEACT 1651 SM are available. Differences with the previous cited SWP are indicated in the next paragraphs. A small triangle is displayed on the same line of the above described configuration menu. General information on the user product is displayed by clicking on this triangle. The functions of the above three options are identical for all the Configuration Applications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 71 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 26. Equipment Configuration. Upload
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 27. Equipment Configuration
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
72 / 448
4.5.1.1 Configuration with SWP ECT or SWP RECT 1651SM Rel.2.7 Option tables
This option allows the user to access the configuration tables of the NE (see Figure 28. on page 76 if Equipment Configuration is involved). By selecting option Table the user can: display the tables of a previously built configuration file build a configuration file
The user can display a configuration file in the following manner: select the option File from the configuration menu. This selection displays the list of commands select the option Open from the list of commands and choose the configuration file to be displayed
select the option Tables from the configuration menu. This choice displays the list of tables containing the chosen configuration file. select the tables to be displayed
The user can build a configuration file By using an already existing configuration file the user can: select the option File from the configuration menu. This selection displays the list of commands. select the option Open from the list of commands and chooses the configuration file to be modified. select the option Tables from the configuration menu. This choice displays the list of tables containing the selected configuration file. select the tables to be modified modify the tables select the option Save as or Save from the list of commands of the option File to store the listed table in a new configuration file or in the same previously opened file.
by selecting the option Tables directly the listed tables are loaded with default values. The user: selects the tables to be modified modifies the tables selects the option Save as or Save from the list of commands of the option File to store the listed table in a new configuration file.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When the application is executed for the first time, no configuration file will be present; therefore if the operator selects the option Open.... from Menu File, no file will appear.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 73 / 448
To create a configuration file the operator must select the option Tables, and then he can access all the tables of the NE Configuration.
The operator receives the list of all the NE configuration tables through a window system. The operator can browse through the whole list by scrolling it up and down using the arrow keys. The operator can select the table with the Mouse or the enabled functional keys and click the left mousebutton when the arrow is positioned on the <OK> indication. He can also press the <RETURN> key to confirm selection. Further confirmation is required to save the data that has been inserted/modified in the table. The data is confirmed through the <OK> key which appears on each screen concerning Data insertion in table. To clear the modified/inserted data the operator must utilize the <Cancel> key. Out of the two, the <Cancel> key has been assumed as default, because if the <Return> key is accidentally pressed, important previously filed information could be lost. To notify the selection made by the operator, the data of the table selected has a darker background respect to the data of the other tables. Options File When the operator has inserted or modified all the table values, the save operation is still not terminated. All the values must be saved through the option Save as, or Save. This option can be selected through the FILE option in the Configuration window (see Figure 29. on page 76). The figures concern Equipment Configuration. The complete list of the options is: Open.... Save As .... Save .... Delete.... Default Status... File Header... Print... Send.... Receive... Audit...
The following analyzes in detail each option: The option Open displays the list of all the configuration files present on the hard disk and also accesses the other disks to read other configurations (see Figure 30. on page 76). The user can select the configuration file to open, and then by means of the TABLE option can modify the tables of the file. With the Detail selection the screen of Figure 31. on page 77. is obtained, showing more detailed information on the selected file. The option Save As permits to save the modifications made in the configuration tables. The operator can insert the name of a new file or that of an existing file (see Figure 32. on page77 ). In the first case the created file will contain the new configuration tables; in the second case the new tables will be written over the existing tables if authorized by the operator. The same screen permits to the selections: the configuration can be stored on different disk units description of the file (title) can be inserted into the created configuration file the operator name can be inserted. 01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 74 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
After this operation the operator store the configuration.

The option Save permits to save the modifications made in the configuration table over writing the existing table with the same name. When the option Delete is chosen by the user, the application displays the list of all the built configuration files stored on the hard disk. The application allows access to other configuration files on the hard disks, the user can then select the configuration file to delete. Detail on the files can be obtained The option Default Status permits to access a new configuration file that holds tables containing default values. The option File Header displays the Detail information of the currently opened configuration file. The option Print permits to print the configuration tables of a particular file. The name of the file to print as well as the disk must be stated in the window. It is also possible to print only tables different from the defend values ( x ) The option Send permits to send the selected configuration file to the NE. After having selected this option, the operator receives the list of the configuration files that can be sent to the NE (see Figure 33. on page78 ). The operator must choose (from the selected disk) the configuration file to send to the NE and confirm it through the <OK> key. Detail on the files can be obtained. The selected configuration is sent to the NE, and the download of the tables is indicated. The option Receive permits to receive the configuration loaded on the NE. The upload function of the table is presented in a new window, in which is possible (CANCEL) to stop the procedure. The user inserts the file name which will store the NE configuration, as well the disk and the Detail on the file. The option Audit permits to compare the two configuration files (see Figure 34. on page 78): Current file: the currently opened configuration file File on disk: the user selected configuration file
If differences are encountered, the application will display the relevant data for each configuration table (see Figure 35. on page 79). Option clearscreen After having utilized the audit option, the clearscreen option permits to clear any information from the Application window, by clicking the left mousebutton on the Clear Screen option. ATTENTION: when a FILE is open and the operator needs: open another file Select the Default Status Send a file Receive a fail
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
another screen is present, in which is possible to decide to save the previous file data (see for example Figure 36. on page 79 ).
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 75 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 28. Equipment Configuration Table Choice Figure 29. Configuration File options
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 30. Configuration Open File
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
76 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 31. Configuration Open, detail
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 32. Configuration Save as
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
77 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 33. Configuration Send file
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 34. Configuration Audit
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
78 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 35. Configuration Audit result
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 36. Configuration Save previous file
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
79 / 448
4.5.1.2 Configuration with SWPECT or SWPREACT 1651SM Rel. 2.7 This software product performs checks while compiling the Equipment and Connections configurations tables to prevent the operator from making errors when introducing the configuration data. To that purpose the options of the two applications are enabled in subsequent steps in compliancy with the configurations that the operator realizes. The operator is therefore guided while compiling the tables. The Equipment configuration tables are to be compiled before any other. In particular, as far as concerns the equipment synchronization, the following compiling order has to be followed : 1) 2) 3) Synchronization : ADM type and Tributary configuration Synchronization : priority list configuration Synchronization : SSM value configuration
Also the tables compilation is guided : the only options enabled are those compliant with the previously made configurations. Checks are operative inside each application (Equipment and Connection Configuration) and between the two applications. Logical mistakes in the configuration data interrupt the configuration proper and explanatory error messages are displayed to help the operator removing incoherences. Two types of messages are displayed : the warning and the error messages . The latter prevents the operator from proceeding in configuring the equipment and the connections. The Equipment Configurations allowed through the EACT control function are stored in a .b60 extension file. The system opens a file using the same file name with extension .b56 (Connection Configuration file extension) or .b58 (Drop Shelf Connection Configuration file extension ) into which are stored the Connection configurations tables associated to the previously defined Equipment Configuration. The two files are interdependent in that the control system allows changes to be made (e.g., equipment configuration) only if compatible with the contents of the Connection configuration file. When accessing the Connection Configuration application it is mandatory to open the relevant file automatically created. It is possible to modify it only in compliancy with the equipment connections made with the Equipment Configuration application ( only the possible options are enabled ) . The file changes can be saved only if the Equipment Configuration application is closed. When a receive operation is performed and the equipment has been configured by using the EACT SWP, both the Equipment and the Connection configuration files are received from the equipment. When a send operation is performed , the two files are sent independently. If a receive operation is performed using the EACT SWP and the equipment was configured using ECT SWP, checks are performed between the Equipment and the Connection configuration files. Messages will appear if the files are not congruent according to EACT rules. Option Tables. The only difference is that in the Connection Configuration the Table function is accessed after having opened one of the .B56 files if for example we have to configure connections (untitled .B56 in the first work session) through the OPEN command of the options File.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 80 / 448
Option File The following is a complete list of the applications provided by the option File (see Figure 29. on page 76):
Open.... Save as .... Save .... Delete.... Default Status... File Header... Print... Send.... Partial Send (not used).... Receive... Audit...
Through these applications are carried out the operations described for the option File, except for: The option Update... it can be applied to the Equipment and Connection configurations. It permits to send the modifications made on the configuration file to the Controller. Graphic format of the screens and files. The latter are located through extension number and directory. The option Exit that closes the application.
4.5.1.3 How to select In either case (software product with/without EACT) and for all the Tables, configuration is achieved through selection. Selections are possible by clicking on the small box or small circle or on the relevant string present in each table. The cross (X) or the circled dot indicates selection mode enabled. By clicking again, the cross or the circled dot disappears thus disabling the selection mode. When selecting from a list, the selection operated is displayed next to the circle to which the selection is referred. To confirm the selections made click the OK button; to cancel click the CANCEL button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 81 / 448
4.5.2 Equipment Configuration Application The following is a list of the equipment configuration table available (see Figure 28. on page 76): LINE SHELF CONFIGURATION: Subrack Configuration Power Supply Configuration 1664OA Subrack Configuration EPS APS Configuration APS Configuration on Signal Degrade Optical Safety Configuration Bidir. Transmission on single Fiber Configuration Synchronization: ADM Type and Tributary Configuration Priority List Configuration SSM Value Configuration
BER Threshold Configuration PPS Activation on Excessive B3 Consequent Actions G.784 BBE Threshold Configuration G.784 ES Threshold Configuration G.784 SES Threshold Configuration G.784 Performance Points Configuration Alarm Criterion: Equipment STM4/STM16 Aggregate East/West Electrical HVC STM1 Trib. 140M Switchable Trib. 21x2M Trib. (13) 21x2M Trib. (13) Port (121) 3x34 Trib./3x45M Trib. Full Matrix Optical HVC STM1 Trib. CRU AUX/EOW Optical LVC STM1 Trib. 34/2 and 5x2M Tran. Mux Trib. (13) 34/2 Tran Mux 8M Port (13) 5x2M Tran Mux Trib (13) port (15) Housekeeping indication
Office alarms delay facility configuration Input Housekeeping alarm indication labels Output Housekeeping criteria and alarm selection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 82 / 448
DROP SHELF CONFIGURATION Subrack Configuration Power Supply Configuration EPS APS Configuration Synchronization: tributary configuration Alarm criterion: Equipment ADM 600 Interface unit STM1 Module 21x2Mbit/s DS trib (1 to 9 ) 21x2Mbit/s DS trib (1 to 9 ) port (1 to 21 )
Each of the above tables will be described in detail in the paragraphs that follow.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 83 / 448
4.5.2.1 Subrack configuration The SUBRACK CONFIGURATION table, displayed as in Figure 37. on page 87, permits to configure each of the cards in the slots of the NE. Each slot is represented by a rectangle which in turn displays the following elements: slot number identifies its position in the NEs physical configuration slot name identifies the type of card to be inserted into the slot small circle and associated string defining card insertion into the slot. By clicking on the circle or on the string, the user can select from the list shown in the middle of the screen. The selected option is displayed next to the circle. Displaying after a selection is applicable to all the configuration screens.
The selectable options for the SWITCH UNIT / ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS MODULE (NB) slots 1 and 15 are: Unassigned Card SW Unit 34 M or 45 M SW Unit 140 M or 155 M
The selectable options for SWITCH UNIT / ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS MODULE (NB) slot 14 are: N.B. Unassigned Card SW Unit 34 M or 45 M With the New Practice equipment physical structure, the SWITCH UNITS are not present. The switching function is realized by means the ACCESS MODULES connected to the units. Nevertheless to configure also in this case the different types of switching, the same selections previously indicated must be done.
The selectable options for the AUX (slot 17) are: AUX/EOW Unassigned Card
The selectable options for the Aggregate, slots 18 and 22 are: L4.1 Aggregate L4.2 Aggregate S4.1 Aggregate Unassigned Card STM4 STM4 STM4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 84 / 448
The selectable options for the Aggregate, slots 19 and 23 are: L4.1 Aggregate L4.2 Aggregate S4.1 Aggregate S.16.1 Aggregate L16.1 Aggregate L16.2 Aggregate UP S16.1 Aggregate UP L16.1 Aggregate UP L16.2 Aggregate UPE S16.1 Aggregate UPE L16.1 Aggregate UPE L16.2 Aggregate Unassigned Card STM4 STM4 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM16
ATTENTION: STM4 Aggregate STM16 Aggregate slot 18 West 1, slot 19 East 2 slot 22 East 1, slot 23 West 2 slot 18+19 East, slot 22+23 West.
two slots (18+19, 22+ 23) are assigned to each STM16 Aggregate. The selectable options for TRIBUTARY slots 2, 3, 4 are: Unassigned Card 21x2Mb Tributary 21x2Mb Retiming Tributary 34/2 5x2M Trib. 3x34M Trib. 3x45M Trib. 140M SW Tributary (*) Elect HVC STM1 Tributaries (*) both are referred to the 140/STM1 Switch. Trib. unit software selection) S1.1 LVC Trib. or L1.1 LVC Trib. or L1.2 LVC Trib. S1.1 HVC Trib. or L1.1 HVC Trib. or L1.2 HVC Trib. DVB Trib
(*)
The select option for Tributary slots 5, 9, 10, 11, 12 are:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Unassigned card 3x34M Trib. 3x45M Trib. 140M SW Trib. Elect HVC STM1 Trib. S1.1 LVC Trib. or L1.1 LVC Trib. or L1.2 LVC Trib. S1.1 HVC Trib. or L1.1 HVC Trib. or L1.2 HVC Trib. DVB Trib
The select option for Trib. spare 1, (slots 6), are: Unassigned card 21x2 M Trib. 01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 85 / 448
ED
The select option for Trib. spare 2, (slots 13), are: Unassigned card 140 M SW Trib. Elect HVC STM1 Trib. 3 x 34 M Trib. 3 x 45 M Trib. 140 M SW Trib. Elect HVC STM1 Trib. 140M/EL STM1 Trib. (*)
To protect a mixed composition of 140 M SW and Elect HVC STM1 Tributaries, select the 140 M / EC STM1 TRIB (*) option for the TRIB. Spare 1 or 2 configuration. The select option for Matrix main. slot 7 are: Full Matrix
The select option for Matrix spare slot 8 are: Full Matrix Unassigned card
The selected options for CRU Spare, slot 20 are: Assigned card Unassigned card
The selected option for CRU Main, slot 21 is only Assigned Card. DROP SHELF supported This block is present to declare (with a cross) the possibility to manage the DROP SHELF Equipment . To store the selections made, click the OK key. This operation is applicable to all the configuration screens. This configuration table will be utilized by the AS & C to read the value assigned to each slot in order to display the logic and physical configuration of the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 86 / 448
21x2Mb Retiming Tributary 34/2 5x2M Trib. 3 x 34 M Trib. 3 x 45 M Trib. 140 M SW Trib. Elect HVC STM1 Trib. 140M/EL STM1 Trib. (*)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 37. Equipment Configuration Subrack configuration
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
87 / 448
4.5.2.2 Power Supply Configuration The table shown in Figure 38. defines the availability of each of the three converters installed on the NE. Each converter is represented by a small box and by a string indicating the converter s name. By clicking on the box or on the string, a cross (X) will appear inside it to define the converter as Assigned. Click again to remove the cross. This selection operation is applicable to all the configuration screens.
Figure 38. Equipment Configuration Power Supply
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 88 / 448
4.5.2.3 EPS/APS Configuration The table shown in Figure 39. on page 90 permits to select the protections available in the NE. The EPS/APS protection functions are described in the Technical Handbook. While selecting the options are listed on the right of the screen. The different units are selected as follows: CRU units Type of protection D None D EPS (protection against unit failure) Full Matrix (16x16 Matrix) unit Type of protection D None D EPS Protection Architecture D Unset (of no significance, when NONE has been previously selected) D 1+1 (1 Main + 1 Spare) Protection Mode D Unset D Revertive: After protection intervenes, the initial condition is restored (Main Working) when the unit alarm disappears. D Not Revertive: The Spare works even if Main returns to normal condition Wait Time to Restore D Select the waiting time to Revert (0 to 900 seconds.), when the Revertive mode has been selected. Unset selection is possible. Aggregate units (East and West) Type of Protection D None D APS (protection against unit and line failure) Protection Architecture D Unset D 1+1 (1 Main + 1 Spare) Protection Operation D Unset D Simplified. Unidirectional (single ended) Protection Mode D Only Unset (automatically not revertive) Wait Time to Restore D Only Unset
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tributary units (1 to 8) Type of protection D None D EPS (for electrical tributary) D APS (for optical tributary)
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 89 / 448
When EPS 1+1 is selected for main trib. (odd slots) the spare Trib. (subsequent even slot) must be None
Protection Architecture D Unset (of no significance, when NONE has been previously selected) D 1+1 (1 Main + 1 Spare). Not available for 21 x 2 M Trib. D N+1 (1 spare for N main). Not available for APS Not available for optical STM1 Trib. When 1+1 is selected for main trib. (odd slots) the spare Trib. (subsequent even slot) must be unset.
Protection priority D Unset D Default. Only possible for N+1. The sequence priority is 1> 2>3>4. Protection operation D D Unset Simplified (Unidirectional). Only for APS optical STM1 Trib.
Protection Mode D Unset D Revertive. (for the 1+1 EPS only). After protection intervention, the initial condition is restored (Main Working) when the unit alarm disappears. D Not revertive. The spare works even if main returns to manual conditions (for the 1+1 EPS only). Wait time to Restore (WTR) Fixed at 5 min.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 39. Equipment Configuration EPS/APS
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 90 / 448
4.5.2.4 APS configuration on Signal Degrade The table shown in Figure 40. allows to enable or disable the activation of the APS protection in case of Signal Degrade alarm.
Figure 40. Equipment Configuration APS configuration on Signal Degrade
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 91 / 448
4.5.2.5 Optical Safety Configuration The Table shown in Figure 41. contains the configuration parameters for the optical safety management of each of the optical cards. For each optical card the table allows: to select the ALS implemented option. If not selected (no cross inside the box) there is no need to configure the next data. To define the ALS status after having implemented it, select one of the following values from the list: Automatic Laser Shutdown enabled, or Automatic Laser Shutdown disabled and Laser forced ON (useful during tests) or Automatic Laser Shutdown disabled and Laser forced OFF (useful during maintenance operation)
The latter two selections force the ABN condition. When ALS is enabled, to define the ALS procedure parameter by selecting one or both the following values from the list: Automatic Restart Enabled (ALS automatically operated by the equipment) Manual Restart Enabled (ALS commanded by the operator, with equipment pushbutton)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 41. Equipment Configuration Optical Safety
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 92 / 448
4.5.2.6 Bidirectional Transmission on single Fiber Configuration This type of connection has been set up with passive optical couplers ( see Figure 42. ) The interruption of the optical fiber must not loop the Tx signal onto the local Rx. To this concern and in general to avoid poor decoupling performance of the hybrid , an identification label has been assigned to the local Tx an to the Rx one of the opposite side. ( 1 given in the Figure 42. , from Tx1 to Rx2) Spare bits (14) of bite S1 are utilized by the Aggregate units. The STM1 optical tributaries also use , as an alternative , byte MD1 ( Media Dependent byte on 2,2 RSOH byte position) .
Tx
1 Tx
Label : 1
Tx
Label : 2
Tx
OPTICAL PASSIVE COUPLER Rx Rx 1 Label : 2
OPTICAL PASSIVE COUPLER Rx Rx 2
Label : 1
Figure 42. Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 93 / 448
Figure 43. illustrates the configuration concerning the Aggregate units and the STM1 tributaries: first column select the transmit mode on the single fiber ( X on the chosen window). second and third column for the STM1 Trib. only. Select, as alternative, the byte to use : M1 or S1 fourth and fifth columns label assignment to Rx and Tx, to be selected in the window on the right of the screen.
Figure 43. Equipment Configuration Bidirectional transmission on single fiber.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 94 / 448
4.5.2.7 Synchronous Source Selection The configuration tables defining the Synch. parameters are shown in Figure 45. on page 97, Figure 46. on page 99 and Figure 47. on page 101. Specifically: ADM Type and Tributary Configuration Priority List Configuration SSM Value Configuration
The tables are used to preset the selection criteria for the synch. references within the Timing Marker function managing network synchronization. This function allows to receive, select and transmit the synchronism reference inside the SDH network. It also reconstructs the synchronism and automatically reroutes it should a failure arise on the synchronization distribution network. The first Z1 (S1) of the SDH frame is utilized as Synchronous Status Messages vector (SSM). The S1 byte information is managed by the Synchronous Status Messages Management (SSMM) function and is utilized by the equipment to implement the SSM Algorithm (SSMA). This algorithm permits the selection of higher quality synchronism sources. The Synchronization Equipment Timing Set architecture complies with ITUT G.783. Figure 44. on page 96 illustrates the synchronous source selection for single ADM. In this figure, T1, T2 and T3 are the input reference signals from which the selection algorithm must choose the timing references T0 and T4. T0 is the synch. reference signal for the NE, while T4 is utilized to synchronize other external equipment. The SQUELCH function can be activated either on the basis of four settable quality threshold levels of the signal, or through operator presetting. The SQUELCH function is always enabled on the T1T4 path, while it can be disabled on path T0T4. To activate the selection process, the following must be defined: the Allowable Synch. sources the Priority level assigned to each the Quality associated to the timing that does not carry the synchronization status message.
In this paragraph are defined the Allowable Timing References for a max of 6 prioritized inputs. Selectors A and B (see Figure 44. on page96 ) have their own reference list with relevant priority. Several inputs can have the same priority level. Therefore, a non revertive switching mode is obtained from these timing references. The quality level of the SDH inputs is read through the SSMB.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
During the configuration phase the operators assign the quality level of those inputs that are not SDH (2 MHz and 2 Mbit/s)or come from equipment not managing the SSMB.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 95 / 448
Having to select among signals with the same quality level, the one with the highest priority will be chosen. Selection depends on the alarm indications associated to the reference signals. If all the sources are disabled by the manager, the local oscillator will be activated as synchronism reference. Timing Reference might not be available for: alarms on the received reference signals the operatordriven LOCKOUT command the QL6 quality level (dont use), only if the SSM algorithm is active and not applicable when the criteria based on Priority is active.
During the configuration phase the byte S1 management might be disabled. In this case the prioritybased algorithm is utilized.
Select A
Squelch
T4 Select C
EXTERNAL REFERENCE
Squelch INPUTS: (STMN) (2Mbit/s) (2MHz) T1 T2 T3 T0 Select B SETG NE TIMING REFERENCE
INTERNAL OSC.
Figure 44. Equipment Configuration Sync. Source Selection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 96 / 448
4.5.2.7.1 Synchronization. ADM Type & Tributary Configuration This table ( see Figure 45. ) allows:
To configure the equipment type for the Timing Marker management. The user can choose the equipment type from the list on the right of the screen named Equipment Type. The possible selections are: Single ADM ADM with SSU (when an external SSU Equipment is connected to filter the Clock signal)
to configure (if ADM with SSU has been already selected) the quality level for the ADM with SSU equipment type from a list named SSU Quality displayed on the right of the screen. The user can select the following values from the list named SSU Quality: G.812T G.812L G.81s None
to select a clock source coming from the tributary cards.
For each main tributary the user can select: the clock sources from a list named Tributary Reference displayed on the right of the screen. The possible tributary clock sources are the STM1 tributaries, the 21x2Mb tributaries and the 34/2 & 5x2Mb Tributaries. For the 21x2Mb tributary sources the user can select one of the twentyone 2 Mbit/s ports. For the 34/2 & 5x2Mb tributary sources, the user can select one of the five 2 Mb ports. the mode from a list named Mode displayed on the right of the screen only is he has chosen the 21x2M Tributary as clock source. The possible modes are: Not Used, Not Framed, PCM, PCM CRC4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 45. Equipment Configuration Synch. ADM Type and Trib. Config.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 97 / 448
4.5.2.7.2 Synchronization: Priority List Configuration This table (see Figure 46. on page 99) defines the synchronization parameters for an equipment configured as Single ADM or ADM with SSU. The table allows the user: To enable/disable T0T4 selection for the External synchronization T0: clock supplied to the equipment. T4: external clock
to configure six clock references for the External/Internal synchronization, and for each of them the user can select: the clock source from a list named Reference Type displayed on the right of the screen. The possible values are: D D D D D D D D Not Used 2 MHz A 2 MHz B Aggregate STM4 West 1 Aggregate STM16 West Aggregate STM4 East 1 Aggregate STM16 East Tributary 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
the priority level from a list named Priority Level displayed on the right of the screen. The possible values are: D 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and None
to enable/disable the SSM algorithm for the External/Internal synchronization a priority based selection is performed when the algorithm is disabled
N.B.
If T0 is utilized to supply T4 towards the outside of the equipment, the operator must not fillin selection table External Synchronization. When SSU is present , T0 must be set different from T4. to select the T1/T4 Squelch criteria from a list named Squelch Criteria displayed on the right of the screen. The possible values are: Threshold G.811 Threshold G.812T Threshold G.812L Threshold G.81s
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
to select and enable/disable the T0/T4 Squelch Criteria from the list named Squelch Criteria displayed on the right of the screen. The possible values are as those described fro the T1/T4 Squelch Criteria. to enable/disable the Force Squelch. In this case the external clock T4 will be inhibited. 01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 98 / 448
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 46. Equipment Configuration Synch. Priority List Config.
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
99 / 448
4.5.2.7.3 Synchronization: SSM Value Configuration This table (see Figure 47. on page 101 ) defines the management of the SSM bytes in both Reception (see 2nd column), and Transmission (see 3rd column). For the Reference signals see 1st column. In Reception and in Transmission, the table allows (only for the Single ADM, the case of ADM with SSU being already defined in Figure 45. on page 97 ) for each Aggregate and Tributary clock reference, to choose the quality value to supply to the Selection Algorithm, chosen from a list named Quality Level displayed on the right of the screen (only in reception for the 2MHz A and 2 MHz B clock references). The user can select, for each port, the following values from the list named Quality Level for both the management of the Rx SSM Byte and Tx SSM Byte: Rx SSM Byte
The user can select the following from the Rx Quality Level: Extracted Threshold G.811 Threshold G.812T Threshold G.812L Threshold G.81s Q. Unknown Dont Use
Setting the Extracted quality level on the single port enables the termination of Byte S1 received on the STMN Aggregates or Tributaries coming from the equipment managing the Byte. The selection algorithm will choose from the six Rx signals that to use as timing reference for the equipment. Choosing a Quality Level other than the Extracted one means that the relevant signal will be sent to the selection algorithm with this set Q.L.. This presetting operation is optional for the STMN signals, but is mandatory for the 2 Mbit/s and 2 MHz signals. Tx SSM Byte
The user can select the following from the Tx Quality Level: Insert Threshold G.811 Threshold G.812T Threshold G.812L Threshold G.81s Q. Unknown Dont Use
Setting the Insert criteria on the single port the operator enables to transmit on the output signal the Quality Level selected with the algorithm . A chosen Q.L. other than Insert is preset when wanting to transmit a fixed Q.L. preset value whatever it is the Q.L. of the reference signal selected with the algorithm. This modality applies only to STMN signals assigned to the equipment managing Byte S1.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 100 / 448
Figure 47. Equipment Configuration Synch. SSM Value Configuration 4.5.2.8 BER Threshold Configuration The BER THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION table shown in Figure 48. indicates information on the ACTIVATION and DEACTIVATION thresholds of B2 Signal Degrade. The application defines the activation/deactivation threshold values selected by the user and the default values. The Signal Degrade alarm values are 105, 106, 107, 108, 109 (for activation), 106, 107, 108, 109, 1010 (for deactivation). The normal values for activation/deactivation are 105/ 106.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 48. Equipment Configuration BER Threshold
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 101 / 448
4.5.2.9 PPS activation on EX B3 See Figure 49. on page 102 This option permits to enable PPS protection on excessive BER B3 .
Figure 49. Equipment Configuration PPS activation on EXBER (B3) 4.5.2.10 Consequent Actions The table shown in Figure 50. allows to enable or disable the consequent actions for the B2 Excessive BER alarm of the Aggregate and STM1 Tributary.
Figure 50. Equipment Configuration Consequent actions
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 102 / 448
4.5.2.11 G.784 BBE Thresholds configuration The table shown in Figure 51. allows to configure the BBE (Background Block Errors detected on the Parity Bytes) thresholds values of the Performance Monitoring counters over a 15 minutes period and over a one day period. For the 15 minutes period, it is possible to configure a low and a high threshold. For STMn flows it is possible to declare the Multiplex Section or the Regeneration Section thresholds. BBE STM16 RS (B1) BBE STM16 MS (B2) BBE STM4 RS (B1) BBE STM4 MS (B2) BBE STM1 RS (B1) BBE STM1 MS (B2) BBE VC4 (B3) BBE VC3 (B3) BBE VC12 (BIP2) The Operation System is informed on the results. Figure 51. indicates the default values within the range defined by ITUT Rec. G.784. When exceeding the selected threshold value , the event is stored in the Maintenance Memory and lights the labels 15 M TCA or DAY TCA on the corresponding tributary in the Alarm Status & Control application. 15 M TCA lights on when exceeding the High Threshold and lights off when decreasing below the Low Threshold. To activate the counters it is necessary to start the Terminal Points in the Performance Monitoring application (see para 4.8.4 on page 291).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 51. Equipment Configuration G.784 BBE Thresholds
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 103 / 448
4.5.2.12 G.784 ES Thresholds configuration The table Figure 52. shown in allows to configure the ES (Errored seconds) thresholds values of the Performance Monitoring counters over a 15 minutes period and over a one day period. For the 15 minutes period, it is possible to configure a low and a high threshold. For STMn flows it is possible declare the Multiplex Section or the Regeneration Section thresholds. ES STM16 RS (B1) ES STM16 MS (B2) ES STM4 RS (B1) ES STM4 MS (B2) ES STM1 RS (B1) ES STM1 MS (B2) ES VC4 (B3) ES VC3 (B3) ES VC12 (BIP2) The Operation System is informed on the results. Figure 52. indicates the default values within the range defined by ITUT Rec. G.784. When exceeding the selected threshold value , the event is stored in the Maintenance Memory and lights the labels 15 M TCA and DAY TCA on the corresponding tributary in the Alarm Status & Control application. 15 M TCA lights on when exceeding the High Threshold and lights off when decreasing below the Low Threshold. To activate the counters it is necessary to start the Terminal Points in the Performance Monitoring application (see para 4.8.4 on page 291).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 52. Equipment Configuration G.784 ES Thresholds
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 104 / 448
4.5.2.13 G.784 SES Thresholds configuration The table shown in Figure 53. allows to configure the SES (Severely Errored seconds) thresholds values of the Performance Monitoring counters over a 15 minutes period and over a one day period. For the 15 minutes period, it is possible to configure a low and a high threshold. For STMn flows it is possible to declare the Multiplex Section or the Regeneration Section thresholds. SES STM16 RS (B1) SES STM16 MS (B2) SES STM4 RS (B1) SES STM4 MS (B2) SES STM1 RS (B1) SES STM1 MS (B2) SES VC4 (B3) SES VC3 (B3) SES VC12 (BIP2) The Operation System is informed on the results. Figure 53. indicates the default values within the range defined by ITUT Rec. G.784. When exceed the selected threshold value , the event is stored in the Maintenance Memory and lights the labels 15 M TCA and DAY TCA on the corresponding tributary and of the UT label in the Alarm Status & Control application. 15 M TCA lights on when exceeding the High Threshold and lights off when decreasing below the Low Threshold. To activate the counters it is necessary to start the Terminal Points in the Performance Monitoring application (see para 4.8.4 on page 291).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 53. Equipment Configuration G.784 SES Thresholds
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 105 / 448
4.5.2.14 G.784 Performance points configuration From the table shown in Figure 54. is selected, for each STM4 or STM16 Aggregate, the AU channel for the PJC/B3 performance point. Clicking on the circle in one of the unit presented, the operator can select from the list of AU4 displayed on the right of the screen. The selected AU4 will appear next to the circle. This AU4 will be checked to verify the quality of the network synchronization and of the VC4 payload in the G 784 Performance Monitoring.
Figure 54. Equipment Configuration G.784 Performance Points
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 106 / 448
4.5.2.15 Alarm Criteria The alarms detected on the Units can be classified as:
Urgent / Not Urgent / Indicative (if pertaining) / Disabled
Figure 55. up to Figure 57. on page 108 illustrate some examples of the various selections for each unit.
Figure 55. Equipment Configuration Equipment Alarm criteria
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 56. Equipment Configuration STM4 Aggregate Alarm criteria
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 107 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R Figure 57. Equipment Configuration Alarm Criterion Housekeeping indications

3AL 38249 AA AA
448
108 / 448
4.5.2.16 Office alarms delay facility configuration The screen of Figure 58. allows to select the Filter period for the activation of the following remote alarms: URG, which is the ORing of the urgent alarms occurred in the NE, NURG, which is the ORing of the not urgent alarms occurred in the NE.
For each remote alarm the application displays a string specifying the alarm, and a small circle. Clicking on the circle, the user can select the alarm filter period from a list displayed on the right of the screen. The periods are expressed in seconds and the default value is 10.
Figure 58. Equipment Configuration Office alarms delay configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 109 / 448
4.5.2.17 Input Housekeeping alarm indication configuration The table shown in Figure 59. allows to define the HOUSEKEEPING signal received from the external Housekeeping 1,2,3, can be defined by the operator according to the type of alarm/signal connected (default CP1, CP2, CP3). Housekeeping 4 is devoted to alarm of the external Synchronous Supply unit. Housekeeping 5, 6, 7 are assigned to the alarms (URG / ABN / NURG) of external Optical Fiber Amplifier Housekeeping 8 is assigned to the AND BATT EXT (Optical Fiber Amplifier station power supply alarm) or for the DROP SHELF the AND BATT ALARM.
Housekeeping 4 to 8 cannot be modified For Housekeeping 1, 2, 3, 4 and 8, the alarm criterion can be selected as indicated in para 4.5.2.15. on page 107. These alarms are so managed by the control function. N.B. The Housekeeping string label can have 16 characters Max.
Figure 59. Equipment Configuration Housekeeping assignment in case of parallel alarm When the serial alarm signal is sent from the OA the CPI#5 is not used, the CPI#6 carries the Synchronism signal and the CPI#7 carries the serial data stream from the external OFA. The Operator can consistently modify the relevant label.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 110 / 448
4.5.2.18 Output housekeeping criteria and label selection See Figure 60. on page 112.
If a serial external 1664 OFA is not present , all the Output Housekeeping are all labelling from the user. If a serial 1661 OFA is present , CPO_5 is reserved for the clock outputting from the equipment controller towards the external OFA. N.B. The Housekeeping string label can have 16 characters Max.
The CPO can be managed in two possible ways: dynamic output : the CPO is coupled to an event ( among the listed ones) . When the event is set also the CPO is set, moving from the idle status to the events status. fixed output : the CPO are defined in a persistent configuration , not depending from an event. In this case NONE must be chosen from the list.
At the power off / restart of the equipment controller the value of the dynamic output is reestablished only if the specified criteria is still present. Following there is the list of possible criteria selectable for dynamic output management : EXTLOS: a LOS on any equipped aggregate LOS AGG W : a LOS on the WEST aggregate LOS AGG E : a LOS on the EAST aggregate RDI AGG W : an RDI on the WEST aggregate RDI AGG E : an RDI on the EST aggregate WRK AGG W : the aggregate WEST main is active ( the status is closed to ground) WRK AGG W : the aggregate EST main is active ( the status is closed to ground)
The IDLE selection defines an output not connected. The CPO VALIDATION selection will set to ground the chosen CPO to validate the status of all the others. This selection is usually applied after an equipment controller restart in order to validate ( declare correct) the status of the CPOs after the transient due to the restart itself. The OUTPUT FORCED selection force the output in the open state.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 111 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R Figure 60. Output housekeeping criteria and label selection

3AL 38249 AA AA
448
112 / 448
4.5.2.19 Drop Shelf Subrack Configuration The SUBRACK CONFIGURATION table, displayed as in Figure 61. permits to configure each of the cards in the slots of the Drop Shelf . Each slot is represented by a rectangle which in turn displays the following elements: slot number identifies its position in the subrack physical configuration slot name identifies the type of card to be inserted into the slot small circle and associated string defining card insertion into the slot. By clicking on the circle or on the string, the user can select from the list shown in the middle of the screen. The selected option is displayed next to the circle. Displaying after a selection is applicable to all the configuration screens.
The options for the OH Interface Unit (slot 1 ) are not selectable in this release: Unassigned Card The selectable options for Tributaries (slots 2, 3, 4, 5 , 6 , 7 12, 13, 14 ), are: 21x2Mb Tributary Unassigned Card The selectable option for Trib. spare , (slots 11), is: 21x2 M Trib. The options for Switch Unit, (slot 10 ) are not selectable in this release : Unassigned Card The selectable options for ADM 600 Interface (slots 8, 9 ) : Assigned Card Unassigned Card The selectable options for STM 1 E Modules (slots M1, M2. M3 ): Assigned Card Unassigned Card
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 61. Equipment Configuration Drop Shelf,subrack configuration
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 113 / 448
4.5.2.20 Drop Shelf Power Supply Configuration The table shown in Figure 62. ,defines the availability of each of the two converters installed on the extension subrack. Each converter is represented by a small box and by a string indicating the converter s name. By clicking on the box or on the string, a cross (X) will appear inside it to define the converter as Assigned. Click again to remove the cross. This selection operation is applicable to all the configuration screens.
Figure 62. Equipment Configuration Drop Shelf, Power Supply
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 114 / 448
4.5.2.21 Drop Shelf EPS/APS Configuration The table shown in Figure 63. on page 116 permits to select the protections available in the D.S. extension. The EPS/APS protection functions are generally speaking described in the Technical Handbook. While selecting the options are listed on the right of the screen. The different units are selected as follows: ADM 600 A Type of Protection D None D EPS Protection Architecture D Unset D 1+1 (1 Main + 1 Spare) Protection Mode D Unset D Revertive: After protection intervention, the initial condition is restored (Main Working) when the unit alarm disappears. D Not Revertive: The Spare works even if Main returns to normal condition Wait Time to Restore Select the waiting time to Revert (0 to 900 secs) when the revertive mode has been selected. Unset selection is possible.
Tributary units (1 to 9) Type of protection D None D EPS (for electrical tributary) Protection Architecture D Unset (of no significance, when NONE has been previously selected) D N+1 (1 spare for N main). Protection priority D Unset D Default. Only possible for N+1. The sequence priority is 1> 2>3>4...>8>9. Protection operation D Unset Protection Mode D Unset D Revertive. After protection intervention, the initial condition is restored (Main Working) when the unit alarm disappears. D Not Revertive: The Spare works even if Main returns to normal condition. With the N+1 EPS protection the Protection Mode should be always Revertive. Wait time to Restore The waiting time to Revert is fixed at 5 min. when the revertive mode has been selected. Unset selection is possible.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 115 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R Figure 63. Equipment Configuration Drop Shelf, EPS/APS

3AL 38249 AA AA
448
116 / 448
4.5.2.22 Drop Shelf Synchronization: Tributary Configuration The configuration tables defining the Synch. parameters are shown in Figure 64. Specifically:
ADM 600 Interface (A /B ) and Tributary Configuration
The tables are used to preset the selection criteria for the synchronous references within the Timing Marker function managing network synchronization. For each main tributary the user can select: the reference Tributary from a list named Tributary Number displayed on the top right of the screen. the clock sources from a list named Tributary Reference displayed on the right of the screen. The possible tributary clock sources are the 21x2Mb tributaries . For these the user can select one of the twentyone 2 Mbit/s ports. the mode from a list named Mode displayed on the right of the screen . The possible modes are: Not Used, Not Framed, PCM, PCM CRC4
Figure 64. Equipment Configuration Drop Shelf, synchronization:tributary
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 117 / 448
4.5.2.23 Drop Shelf Alarm criterion Configuration The alarms detected on the Units can be classified as: Urgent / Not Urgent / Indicative / Disabled
Figure 65. illustrates an example of the various selections for the ADM 600 I/F unit.
Figure 65. Equipment Configuration Drop Shelf, alarm criterion
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 118 / 448
4.5.3 LINE SHELF Connection Configuration Application For LINE SHELF Connection Configuration the following is a list of the connection configuration Tables available (see Figure 66. on page 120):
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ENHANCED CONNECTIVITY WEST AGGREGATE PAYLOAD STRUCTURE EAST AGGREGATE PAYLOAD STRUCTURE TRIBUTARY PAYLOAD STRUCTURE SIGNAL LABEL FOR AGGREGATE VC4 SIGNAL LABEL FOR TRIBUTARY CARDS PATH TRACE VC4 FOR AGGREGATE WEST PATH TRACE VC4 FOR AGGREGATE EAST PATH TRACE VC4 FOR TRIBUTARIES 140 M PATH TRACE VC4 FOR TRIBUTARIES STM1 AU4s DROP/INSERT ALLOCATION AU4s CONCATENATION MSSPRING CONFIGURATION SQUELCHING TABLE FOR EAST HO CONTAINERS SQUELCHING TABLE FOR WEST HO CONTAINERS AU4s CROSSCONNECTION FOR AGGREGATES AU4s CROSSCONNECTION FOR TRIBUTARIES AU4s PASSTHROUGH ALLOCATION TUs D/I ALLOCATION TRIBUTARY 1 TUG3 TUs D/I ALLOCATION TRIBUTARY 8 TUG3 TUs CROSS CONNECTION AGG. WEST AU41 TUG3 TUs CROSS CONNECTION AGG. WEST AU416 TUG3 TUs CROSS CONNECTION AGG. EAST AU41 TUG3 TUs CROSS CONNECTION AGG. EAST AU416 TUG3 TUs CROSS CONNECTION TRIBUTARY 1 TUG3 TUs CROSS CONNECTION TRIBUTARY 8 TUG3 2 M TRIBUTARIES CONDITION 34M TRIBUTARIES CONDITION (and 45M TRIBUTARIES CONDITION) 2/34 CONDITIONS OF 34/2 AND 5X2M TRIB. #1 TO #3 140M TRIBUTARY PORT CONFIGURATION 2M RETIMING CONFIGURATION
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 119 / 448
CONNECTIONS CONFIGURATION by AUX/EOW AUX/EOW CROSS CONNECTION
Each of the above Tables will be detailed in the paragraphs that follow. Herebelow are briefly described some of the parameters indicated in the configuration tables: TUs allocation inside the AU4 structure Definition of the connection traffic Connection possibilities
Figure 66. Connection Configuration with . Tables
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 120 / 448
TUs PASSTHROUGH FOR AGG. EAST AU41 TUG3 TUs PASSTHROUGH FOR AGG. EAST AU416 TUG3
TUs allocation inside the AU4 structure

TU12 Allocation
The sixtythree TU12s of the STM frame are located through: TUG3 (1, 2, 3) TUG2 (1, 2 ... 6,7) VC12 (1, 2, 3)
Therefore, each TU12 is located through a sequence of three numbers e.g., 1, 7, 2) where the 1st number indicates the TUG3, the 2nd the TUG2, the 3rd the VC12. Table 8. states TUs relationship. TU3 Allocation
With regard to TU3 (13) allocation inside the frame use is made of the relevant TUG3. TUG3 (1, 2, 3)
Table 8. TU12 Allocation
TUG 3 1st Number 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 . . . . 1 2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TUG 2 2nd Number 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 . . . . 7 7 7
VC 12 3rd Number 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 . . . . 3 3 3
TU12 (163) Position in the frame 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 . . . . 61 62 63
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 121 / 448
4.5.3.1 General information un Connection Configuration Herebelow are briefly described some of the parameters indicated in the configuration tables: Definition of the connection traffic (see para 4.5.3.1.1 on page 122) Connection possibilities (see para 4.5.3.1.2 on page 136) MS SPRING connection advices (see para 4.5.3.1.3 on page 137)
4.5.3.1.1 Definition of the connection traffic The main type of connection are: Drop/Insert
Terminated connections between tributaries and Aggregates (Trib. to Agg.) PassThrough
Connection between Aggregate west and Aggregates East (Agg. to Agg.) Cross Connection
Connections within the Aggregate of one side or between tributaries (Trib. to Trib. or AGG. to AGG.) This connection are possible only with Matrix unit. Drop and Continue
Unidirectional passthrough, protected drop, insert in one direction are simultaneously allowed. Mixed configuration of previous connections
All the previous connections are possible on: AU4
can be referred to tributaries (140 Mbit/s plesiochronous or STM1) or Aggregate TU
can be referred to: plesiochronous tributaries 2 Mbit/s (TU12) or 34 Mbit/s and 45 Mbit/s (TU3) STM1 tributaries structured with TU12 or TU3. Aggregate
By utilizing the Matrix all the streams can be managed. For each type of main connection is listed the available mode. In order to simplify the figure the MATRIX is not indicated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 122 / 448
Drop/Insert Insert to West (or East) (see Figure 67. ) The selected TU/AU is transmitted from the tributary to only one of the Aggregate
WEST Rx Tx AGGREGATES
EAST Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY Tx Rx
Figure 67. Insert to East
Bridge (see Figure 68. ) The selected TU/AU is transmitted to both side Aggregates.
EAST Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx
Rx
Figure 68. Bridge
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 123 / 448
Drop unprotected West (or East) (see Figure 69. ) The selected TU/AU is received from only one Aggregate.
EAST Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx
Rx
Figure 69. Drop unprotected, East
Drop protected West (or East) (see Figure 70. ) The selected TU/AU is received from one side Aggregate. When this side is out of service, the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite side Aggregate.
EAST Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY Tx Rx
Figure 70. Drop protected, East

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 124 / 448
Drop/insert bidirectional unprotected West (or East) (see Figure 71. ) The selected TU/AU is transmitted and received by only one side Aggregate
EAST Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY Tx Rx
Figure 71. Drop/Insert bidirectional unprotected, East
Drop/insert protected West (or East) (see Figure 72. ) The selected TU/AU is transmitted to both side Aggregates and received from the selected side Aggregate. When this side is out of service, the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite side Aggregate
EAST Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx
Rx
Figure 72. Drop/Insert protected, East
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 125 / 448
Passthrough (see Figure 73. ) With regard to passthrough traffic the same TU/AU can be used for both directions, i.e., West to East, East to West). Both modes can be selected, therefore, a bidirectional channel can be obtained by selecting both modes using the same TU/AU. The following modes can be distinguished: West to East East to West
Reference is made to the TU/AU accessing the East Aggregate
EAST Tx PASS THROUGH WEST TO EAST
Rx PASS THROUGH EAST TO WEST BIDIRECTIONAL
Rx Tx
WEST 1 EAST 1 AGGREGATES
Tx Rx PASS THROUGH WEST TO EAST
WEST 2 Rx Tx
EAST 2 Tx Rx PASS THROUGH EAST TO WEST
UNIDIRECTIONALS
Figure 73. Passthrough
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 126 / 448
Crossconnection Cross connection between tributaries With this kind of traffic a TU/AU is connected between tributaries, without connection with Aggregates. The following mode can be distinguished: Unidirectional The TU/AU is transmitted from the tributary indicated to the selected TU/AU tributary (Figure 74. ) Bidirectional A TU/AU is transmitted/received between the tributary indicated and the selected TU/AU tributary (Figure 75. )
INDICATED TU/AU TRIB.
SELECTED TU/AU TRIB.
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Figure 74. Unidirectional. Trib. Cross Connection
INDICATED TU/AU TRIB.
SELECTED TU/AU TRIB.
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Figure 75. BidirectionalTrib. Cross Connection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 127 / 448
Cross connection between TU/AU of the same side Aggregate With this type of traffic the TU/AU is not connected with tributaries or opposite side Aggregate.
The following mode can be distinguished : Unidirectional
A TU/AU is transmitted to another TU/AU of the same side Aggregate (see Figure 76. ) Bidirectional
A TU/AU is transmitted/received between TU/AU indicated and the TU/AU selected of the same side Aggregate (see Figure 77. )
WEST Rx AGG. WEST Tx
INDICATED TU/AU
SELECTED TU/AU
Figure 76. Unidirectional West Agg. Cross Connection
WEST Rx AGG. WEST Tx Rx Tx
INDICATED TU/AU
SELECTED TU/AU
Figure 77. Bidirectional West Agg. Cross Connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 128 / 448
Drop and Continue for SNC/P (PPS) The allowed selections are:
D/C W INS W D/C E INS W D/C E INS E D/C W INS E D/C stands for Drop and Continue The letter that follows (W=West, E=East) indicates the drop protected side ( e.g., W means West main, and East spare side). The last indication (INS E or INS W) indicates the insert side. The unidirectional passthrough is always in the direction opposite to that of the insert side, e.g. when INS E, the passthrough is from East to West.
D/C W INS W ( see Figure 78. ) The selected TU/AU is simultaneously: Dropprotected West, received from the West side Aggregate. When this side is outofservice, the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite East side Aggregate. Insert West, transmitted from the tributary to the West side Aggregate Passthrough from the West to the East side (unidirectional)
EAST Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx
Rx
Figure 78. Drop and Continue West and Insert West
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 129 / 448
D/C E INS W (see Figure 79. ) The selected TU/AU is simultaneously: Dropprotected East, received from the East side Aggregate. When this side is outofservice, the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite West side Aggregate. Insert West, transmitted from the tributary to the West side Aggregate Passthrough from the West to the East side (unidirectional)
WEST Rx Tx AGGREGATES EAST Tx Rx All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
TRIBUTARY
Tx
Rx
Figure 79. Drop and Continue East and Insert West
D/C E INS E (see Figure 80. ) The selected TU/AU is simultaneously: Dropprotected East, received from the East side Aggregate. When this side is outofservice, the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite West side Aggregate. Insert East, transmitted from the tributary to the East side Aggregate Passthrough from the East to the West side (unidirectional)
WEST Rx Tx AGGREGATES EAST Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx
Rx
Figure 80. Drop and Continue East and Insert East

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 130 / 448
D/C W INS E (see Figure 81. ) The selected TU/AU is simultaneously:
Dropprotected West, received from the West side Aggregate. When this side is outofservice, the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite East side Aggregate. Insert East, transmitted from the tributary to the East side Aggregate Passthrough from the East to the West side (unidirectional)
EAST Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY Rx
Tx
Figure 81. Drop and Continue West and Insert East
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 131 / 448
Drop and Continue Interconnection
See Figure 82. It is used in case of interworking between SNCP MS SPRING or MS SPRING MS SPRING or SNCP SNCP, to protect the AU4s flowing through these rings. The allowed selections are: D/C IC W D/C IC E D/C IC PASS THROUGH W D/C IC PASS THROUGH E The acronym D/C IC W (E) means: D/C: DROP and CONTINUE RX signal : DROP towards the tributary and CONTINUE towards opposite side IC W (E): INTERCONNECTION West (or East) TX side: INSERT towards TX West (or East) selected between the incoming tributary (MAIN) or the PASS THROUGH received from the opposite LINE side (PROTECTION).
The acronym D/C IC PASS THROUGH W (E) indicates that the main side is not from the Tributary like the previous case but from the Aggregate Line side and the protection is realized by the Tributary.
If one of the D/C IC connections cited above is applied on a NE inserted in a ring not MS SPRING protected, all the 16 AU4s of the STM 16 frame are available.
WEST Tx Rx
AGGREGATES
EAST Rx
(*)
Tx
TRIBUTARY
(*) SS= Service Selector
Tx
Rx
Figure 82. MS SPRING Drop and Continue Interconnection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 132 / 448
Trib to Trib / Aggregate Connection (TTA)
This connection is used in SNCP/I and MS SPRING ring interworking

The path protection is realized in the node where this TTA connection has been defined, through a switch function that sends to the path termination Tributary either the signal coming from the line (Aggregate) or the signal coming from a second Tributary (that must be always an STM1 Trib.) equipped in the node. The selection is based on pathAIS (AU, TU) detection. The Tributary receiving the protected path inserts the transmitted signal towards both the line (Aggregate E or W) and a second Tributary (STM1). The connections between the rings at the interconnection nodes have always to be at STM1 level. The stream accessing this STM1 Tributary will be crossconnected on the path termination Tributary. It is to be noticed that SNCP/I connections terminated on MS SPRING nodes are not supported. The available TTA connections are the following: D/I PROT W (or E) /TRIB D/I PROT TRIB / W (or E) DROP PROT W (or E) / TRIB DROP PROT TRIB / W (or E)
The TTA connection can be established both in a Bidirectional and a Unidirectional mode. The Bidirectional connection is realized by the following operations:
for the Drop/Insert protected mode an insert from tributary to aggregate a TTA mode of protected drop. an bidirectional crossconnection from trib to trib. The Unidirectional connection is realized in the following way:
for the Insert mode an insert from tributary to aggregate an unidirectional crossconnection from trib to trib.
for the Drop protected mode a TTA mode of protected drop. an unidirectional crossconnection from trib to trib.
Note that the TU allocation at STM1 and Aggregate side must be the same. As defined for every Path Protection connection, the switch function can be either Revertive or Not Revertive. In Revertive mode, a fixed 5 minutes of Wait Time to Restore (W.T.R.) before restoring the Main position, is available. Figure 83. on page 134 and Figure 84. on page 134 report some examples of the TTA connections and their acronymic.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Notice that, with reference to the acronymic, the card type on the left side of the slash, indicates the Main side of the switch. For example the indication D/I PROT AGG W/TRIB is related to West Aggregate as Main position of the switch, the indication D/I PROT TRIB/AGG W is related to STM1 Tributary as Main position of the switch.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 133 / 448
Trib W E W
Trib E
Agg W
Agg
SM1 Trib a. D/I PROT W/TRIB W Trib E
SM1 Trib b. DROP PROT TRIB/ W
Agg
SM1 Trib
c. INSERT TO WEST + CROSSCONN. UNIDIR TRIB TO TRIB
Figure 83. TRIB TO TRIB/AGGR WEST CONNECTIONS MODES & ACRONYMIC
Trib W E
Trib W E
Agg E
Agg E
SM1 Trib a. D/I PROT E/TRIB Trib W E
SM1 Trib b. DROP PROT TRIB/E
Agg E
SM1 Trib c. INSERT TO EAST + CROSSCONN. UNIDIR TRIB TO TRIB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 84. TRIB TO TRIB/AGGR EAST CONNECTIONS MODES & ACRONYMIC
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 134 / 448
Mixed Connection To realize this connection the operator must correctly set different connection tables
Broadcasting: Drop + Pass through (see Figure 85. ) The TU/AU received from one Aggregate side is simultaneously dropped towards the tributary side and sent in passthrough toward the opposite Aggregate side. One tributary only (in one station) can also insert the proper signal.
Tributary insert + crossconnection (see Figure 86. ) The TU/AU of one tributary can be simultaneously sent towards Aggregate (also both sides) and toward other tributary TU/AU (crossconnection). One of the two connections can use both directions (drop/insert for Aggregates side bidirectional for cross connection)
WEST Rx Tx AGGREGATES EAST Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx
Rx
Figure 85. Broadcasting, Drop + Pass Through
EAST Tx Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Figure 86. Tributary insert + crossconnection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 135 / 448
4.5.3.1.2 Connection Possibilities STM4 Aggregate There are no connection limits: four AU4 West side and four AU4 East side can be utilized. When PPS is used, the same AU/TU is present on both West and East sides. Obviously streams employed for a connection type cannot be utilized in other not coherent selection (for example: add/drop and bidirectional passthrough of the same AU/TU). STM16 Aggregate Each STM16 West and East Aggregate is organized with 16 AU4. No limits are present for AU4 passthrough (max 16 AU4). For other connections eight MAX AU4 can be utilized, as alternative. These AU4 can be subdivided among the different connection types and, besides not exceeding the max permitted number, must not be selected in a not coherent way on the same AU4. The connection possibilities and the relevant max number of AU4 that can be utilized are: TU passthrough: a max. of four AU4 East and four AU4 West TU/AU Aggregate CrossConnection: a max of eight AU4 (West East) Add/Drop: AU4 without SNCP: max 8, East + West AU4 with SNCP: max 8 East or West, protected on other side AU4 containing TU12/TU3 with PPS: max 4, East or West, protected on other side (unless we use the Enhanced Connectivity application, see para 4.5.3.2 on page 138.
The TU both in add/drop protected (SNCP) and in passthrough utilize a pair of AU4 (with the same number). If, for example, add/drop protected TUs are realized by using 1 AU4, the AU4 on the opposite side (with same number) will also be utilized. So only 6 AU4 will be available for the previous type of connections.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 136 / 448
4.5.3.1.3 MS SPRING connection configuration advices The following suggestions must be considered in the MS SPRING connection configuration:
SNCP connections cannot be installed in a MSSPRING network. This leads to an unprotected connections installation. Enhanced Connectivity AU4s is not allowed when MS SPRING protection is running. Only TUs unprotected connections must be considered. AU4s from #9 to #16 dont have to be used for connections nor considered in any parameter of Connections configuration provisioning. Only AU4s from #1 to #8 must be used and configured for paths installation. AU4 permutation ( change of AU4 allocation ) is not allowed in AU4 passthrough connections ( HVC connections ). The AU4 allocated to passthrough in HVC connections, must be the same through the node, while AU4 permutation in TU passthrough (LVC connections) is allowed. AU4/TU crossconnection Aggregate side, that is paths received from Aggregate line and loopedback to the ( same ) Aggregate line, are not allowed. Follow the indication of para 4.5.3.11 on page 151 in order to define, in the same step, the Squelching Table HO for East and for West aggregates describing, for each connection installed, as Source Node, the Node Identifier of the node generating the considered AU4 and as Destination Node, the Node Identifier of the node terminating the AU4.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 137 / 448
4.5.3.2 Enhanced Connectivity The Figure 87. allows the user to define, only for 1661SMC equipment, the configuration parameters concerning the Enhanced Connectivity function on the aggregate AU4s . This function allows to select structured AU4s and connect them in Enhanced connectivity. Thanks to this facility it is possible to PPS protect up to 8 AU4s TUG structured streams. The structured AU4 connected in Enhanced Connectivity can hosts TU 12 and TU3 structures. No mixed set and connection modes are allowed. These AU4 must be TU12 or TU3 structured, and the connection mode must be the same for all the pertaining TUs . The protection works at server layer level and therefor it switches when AU AIS, AU LOP, EXBER (B3) arise. The switch for the AU4 declared in Enhanced connectivity doesnt operate if the single contained TU is alarmed, but only for alarms relevant to the AU. For the AU4s not wholly TU12 or TU3 managed or with different connection modes, the limit of AU4 number that can be PPS protected is always up to 4. Each of the 16 aggregate AU4s (1st column) is settable by: 2nd column the small box allows to enable / disable the Enhanced Connectivity function on the AU4. Clicking on the box the symbol X is displayed on the box; this symbol enables the Enhanced Connectivity function. Clicking it again the symbol Xis removed from the box and the Enhanced Connectivity function is disabled. 3rd column the small circle and an associated string allows to configure the connection mode. By clicking on the circle the user can select from the list displayed on the right side of the screen. When the table is shown the default option (None ) is displayed near the circle. The user can select the mode of connection from the list: None Bridge (Insert to both) Drop from East protected (SNCP) Drop from West protected (SNCP) Drop/Insert West protected (SNCP) Drop/Insert East protected (SNCP) Drop and Continue D/C W INS W Drop protected West, Passthrough W to E, Insert West Drop and Continue D/C E to W Drop Protected East, PassThrough W to E, insert West Drop and Continue D/C E INS Drop Protected East, PassThrough to Insert East Drop and Continue D/C W INS E Drop Protected West, PassThrough E to W, Insert East

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4th column a cross inside the box allows to configure for the relevant AU a Revertive mode PPS (SNCP) with a fixed WTR ( 5 min.). If not selected (no cross inside the box) the PPS (SNCP) is performed in not Revertive mode.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 138 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 87. Connection configuration Enhanced Connectivity
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
139 / 448
4.5.3.3 Aggregate Payload Structure The data indicated in Figure 88. defines the payload structure for aggregate AU4s, West. The application allows to configure the frame composition for each Aggregate AU4 by selecting the options. When selecting the structured option the user can choose the composition of the 3 TUG3 inside the payload. Each AU4 is represented by: a small circle on the left that allows to select the frame composition. By clicking on the circle the user can choose the following option from the list: Not structured structured
a group of three small circles that allow to select the composition of three structured frame TUG3s. By clicking on each circle the user can select the value for the associated TUG3 from the list displayed at the bottomleft of the screen. The selected value is displayed next to the associated circle. The possible value to select are: TUG2 TU3
The selections must comply with the Signal Label for Aggregate VC4 Table. As indicated on the screen the AU4 5 to 16 can be used only for STM16 Aggregate.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 88. Connection Configuration West Agg. Payload structure
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 140 / 448
4.5.3.4 Tributary Payload Structure The data indicated in Figure 89. defines the payload structure for the eight Tributary cards. The application allows to configure the frame composition for each Tributary card by selecting the relevant options. When selecting the Structured option the user can choose the composition of the 3 TUG3 inside the payload. Each card is represented by: a small circle on the left that allows to select the frame composition. By clicking on the circle the user can choose the following option from the list: Not structured structured
a group of three small circles that allow to select the composition of three structured frame TUG3s. By clicking on each circle the user can select the value for the associated TUG3 from the list displayed at the bottomleft of the screen. The possible values to select are: TUG2 TU3
If the Drop Shelf is used, the Line Shelf Trib # 5,6,7 Tributary Payload Structure , must be declared as TUG 2 structured. The selections must comply with the Signal Label for Tributary card Table.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 89. Connection Configuration Tributary payload structure
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 141 / 448
4.5.3.5 Signal Label for Aggregate VC4 The table shown in Figure 90. indicates information on the signal label to be compared (Rx side) and the signal label to be transmitted (Tx side) of the Aggregate VC4. For each VC4 (1 to 16) of the West and East Aggregate the application allows to configure a couple of signal labels, and displays. a small circle and an associated string for the signal label to be compared a small circle and an associated string for the signal label to be transmitted.
By clicking on the circle or on the string, the user can select the proper signal label from the table on the right of the screen: Unequipped (the VC4 informative contents must not be taken into consideration, it si not carrying a pay load). Equipped not specified ( the VC4 is managed whichever structured or not structured; all type of pay load structures are accepted). TUG structure (if equipped with 2 Mbit/s, 34 or 45 Mbit/s Tribs. and 34/2 5x2Mbit/s Tribs.).
The cited selections must be realized only if the signals have been structured (through TUG selection). For all the other cases selections are not operative.
Figure 90. Connection Configuration Signal label Agg. VC4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 142 / 448
4.5.3.6 Signal Label for Tributary cards The table shown in Figure 91. indicates information on the signal label to be compared (Rx side) and the signal label to be transmitted (Tx side) of the tributary units. For each Tributary units the application allows to configure a couple of signal labels, and displays: a small circle and an associated string for the signal label to be compared a small circle and an associated string for the signal label to be transmitted.
By clicking on the circle or on the string, the user can select the proper signal label from the table on the right of the screen. For the Matrix tributaries indication the table defines the VC4 signal labels belonging to the STM1 Tributaries (8 tributaries access, only for STM1 signals). The possible signal labels are: Unequipped (the VC4 informative contents must not be taken into consideration, it si not carrying a pay load). Equipped not specified ( the VC4 is managed whichever structured or not structured; all type of pay load structures are accepted). TUG structure (if equipped with 2 Mbit/s, 34 or 45 Mbit/s Tribs. and 34/2 5x2Mbit/s Tribs.).
The cited selections must be realized only if the signals have been structured (through TUG selection). For all the other cases selections are not operative. For the 140M Tributaries, 21X2 M Tributaries, 5X2M Tributaries 3 x 45M Tributaries and 3X34 Mbit/s Tributaries units the possible VC4/VC12/VC3 signal labels are: Unequipped Equipped not specified Asynchronous
For the tributaries used the value to fix is Asynchronous.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 91. Connection Configuration . Signal label for trib.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 143 / 448
4.5.3.7 Path trace VC4 for Aggregates and Tributaries 16 byte multiframe format is described in ITUT Rec. G 707 table 4/G707. Expected and transmitted fields are editable by the operator. The Path Trace is 16 bytes long, the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by NE. The 15 charactes editable by operator are: a to z, A to Z and 0 to 9 or SPACE. If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 Bytes or no value has been entered in the field, the latter is filled in with some zeros. Figure 92. shows the table relative to the Aggregate unit toghether with the fields associated to the sixteen STM16 Aggregate AU4s; should the aquipment be provided with STM4 Aggregate, the field to be compiled are the firts four (AU4#1 AU4#4) The tables relative to the 140 and STM1 Mbit/s Tributaries units (Figure 93. and Figure 94. ) are likewise filled in. In case of Aggregates and STM1 Tributaries, the received path trace value can be read in the same way, i.e.: Through the AS&C application,open the window of the Full Matrix unit and, in HPT block, clic on the label relative to the Path Trace Mismatch alarm, the value can be read only if J1 is in the alarm state. To read the correct values, upload the VC4 Path Trace. In case of 140 Mbit/s tributaries, open the 140 Mbit/s tributary window and proceed as above mentioned.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 92. Connection Configuration Path trace VC4 for aggregate West
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 144 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R Figure 93. Connection Configuration Path trace for tributaries 140 M
Figure 94. Connection Configuration Path trace for tributaries STM 1
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
145 / 448
4.5.3.8 AU4s Drop/Insert Allocation The data indicated in Figure 95. on page 147 allows the user: to configure the connections between the 140M/STM1 Electrical and STM1 Optical Tributary units and the Aggregate AU4s. to configure the connection types towards the Aggregate AU4s.
Each Tributary (1st. column) is represented by: 2nd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate AU4 to which the Tributary card will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the Aggregate AU4s list displayed at the topright of the screen. 3rd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type of connection. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the list displayed at the bottomright of the screen. The user can select the following types of connections from the list: None Insert To West ( East) Bridge (Insert to both) Drop from West ( East) not protected Drop from West (East) protected (SNCP) Drop from protected (SNCP) Drop/Insert West (East) bidirectional not protected Drop/Insert West (East) protected (SNCP) Drop and Continue D/C W INS W Drop protected West, Passthrough W to E, Insert West Drop and Continue D/C E INS W Drop Protected East, PassThrough W to E, insert West Drop and Continue D/C E INS W Drop Protected East, PassThrough to Insert East Drop and Continue D/C W INS E Drop Protected West, PassThrough E to W, Insert East MS SPRING Drop and Continue D/C IC W or E Drop from W and Continue toward E, Insert W and pass through connection E to W Drop and Continue D/C IC PassThrough W or E. This facility can be used in SNCP, MSSPRING (or a mixed of these rings) interworking to protect the 8 main AU4. Drop/Insert protected West (East)/Trib Drop/Insert protected Trib/West (East) Drop protected West (East)/Trib Drop protected Trib/West (East)
4th column a cross inside the box allows to configure for the relevant AU a Revertible mode PPS (SNCP) with a fixed WTR ( 5 min.). If not selected (no cross inside the box) the PPS (SNCP) is performed in not Revertible mode.
Attention ! The selections on this screen are operative when the AU4 payloads have been selected as NOT STRUCTURED AU4 5 to 16 can be used for the STM16 Aggregates only.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 146 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 95. Connection Configuration AU4 drop/insert
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
147 / 448
4.5.3.9 AU4S Concatenation The AU4 contiguos transport provides the ability to transport a single 622 Mbit/s payload on a set of four contiguous AU4s according to the ITUT G.707 recs. The affected traffic ports need to be STM4 or STM16. In the latter case there are four fixed time slots available to allocate AU4x4C: AU4#1AU4#4 AU4#5AU4#8 AU4#9AU4#12 AU4#13AU4#16
The table shown in Figure 96. permits to configure STM16 or STM4 optical interface as AU4 concatenation structure. Clicking on the box the user can enable the concatenation at groups of four AU4.
Figure 96. Connection Configuration AU4s Concatenation 4.5.3.10 MSSPRING Configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The table shown in Figure 97. permits to configure the equipment data for the MSSPRING protection. The parameter to set are:
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 148 / 448
MS SPRING Enabled
Enable the MSSPRING messages among the NEs, without really activate the protection in case of alarm condition Activate the MSSPRING protection. Insert the number of the NEs on which we are operating. Insert the sequence of the NE of the ring, in clockwise direction. For each node insert the relevant number. Anyone can be the starting node. Permits to select the time to wait, before restore the previously condition, when the alarm that cause the switching operation disappears. The values are selectable at the bottom left of the screen (5 sec, 5 min.,10 min.,15 min.).
MS SPRING Activate Node Identifier
: :
Ring Map : (Clockwise Direction : W to E)
Wait Time to Restore
N.B.
MS SPRING and SNCP algorithm are not compatible in the same Ring. When MS SPRING is enabled and active the eventual configuration of an SNCP protection will cause a removal of the MS SPRING. Vice versa having done an SNCP connection we cant activate MS SPRING otherwise the SNCP protection wouldnt act. In this release the SWP EACT provides suitable warnings.
Figure 97. Equipment Configuration . MSSPRING 4.5.3.10.1 Operative sequence to configure the MS SPRING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The operative sequence are listed in the following. Activation procedure:
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 149 / 448
a)
provision the Connection Configuration files with MSSPRING= ENABLE, W.T.R, Node Ientifier and Ring Map previously set and the related Squelching Tables previously set to each node of the ring in the desired order. (see para. 4.5.3 on page119 ) . MSSPRING must be NOT active provision the Connection Configuration files with MSSPRING= ACTIVE ( MSSPRING is already enabled ), to each node of the ring in the desired order. Consider that, in this step, Default K byte W or E detection by A, S & C application (under MS SPRING label > Protocol exception detected) , will occur on those Aggregates connected to the nodes not provisioned yet, with the MSSPRING protection Active.
b)
Verify, by A, S & C at the end of provisioning update, that all the nodes of the ring are in Idle state. Deactivation procedure: a) provision the Connection Configuration files with MSSPRING= DEACTIVE, to each node of the ring . Consider that, in this step, Default K byte W or E detection by A, S & C application (under MS SPRING label > Protocol exception detected) , will occur on those Aggregates of the activated nodes, connected to the nodes just provisioned. provision the Connection Configuration files with MSSPRING= DISABLE, to each node of the ring. When the D/C IC connection is working on the NE for activate or deactivate the MSSPRING protection is necessary before execute the above procedure to change the D/C IC connection as following: Modify D/C IC connection into Drop/Insert unprotected when the Main side is set from the Tributary. If the Main side is Pass Through, modify into AU4 Pass Through. Send new configuration to the NE. Execute the activation/deactivation phase of MSSPRING procedure. Restored the D/C IC connection.
b)
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 150 / 448
4.5.3.11 Squelching table for EAST and WEST HO container The Figure 98. on page 152 shows how the user can configure the Squelching table for 8 High Priority HO containers of the Aggregate East in TX and in RX direction ; a similar screen is available for the West HO containers. This table must be configured when a ring network made of 1661SMC equipment is managed with a MS SPRING protection. The target of the Squelching Function is to avoid misconnections in case a Node on which we had Inserted and Dropped an High Priority stream, remains isolated as a consequence of a double failure, one before and another after it . In fact in this case all streams directed to and dropped from this node, are definitively lost and it cannot be recovered. Nevertheless, following the MS SPRING rules, the protection algorithm trays to recover the connection interrupted by the double failure. Both adjacent Nodes should route the interrupted stream into the relevant Low Priority AU4 stream changing the previously defined connection. To avoid that misconnection the Squelching Function inserts the AIS criterion into the Low Priority AU4, relevant to that stream that should have been Inserted and Dropped in /from the isolated Node. In this way the use of the Low priority AU4 to recover the connection becomes impossible. All Nodes have been identified with a progressive number filling the relevant table in the Equipment Configuration Application (para. 4.5.3.10 on page 148) in order to describe the Node succession in the Ring. For the High Priority AU4 streams the user is request to set the Node (number) into which they are GENERATED ( SOURCE NODE ) and the Node from which they are TERMINATED ( DESTINATION NODE). The High Priority AU4 stream is GENERATED in a node when either it is inserted (AU4 Insert or TU12/3 Insert Connection Mode) or when, in case of AU4 structured, a TU 12/3 Pass Through connection mode is implemented in that node. Then in both cases the node involved must be indicated as SOURCE NODE in HO Squelching Table. Notice that a AU4 not structured in AU4 Pass through connection mode is never generated by the passed through node. In this case the passed through node DOES NOT have to be indicated as SOURCE NODE in HO Squelching Table. Similarly, the High Priority AU4 stream is TERMINATED in a node when either it is dropped (AU4 Drop or TU12/3 Drop connection mode) or when, in case of AU4 structured a TU12/3 pass through connection mode is implemented in that node. Then in both cases the node involved must be indicated as DESTINATION NODE in HO Squelching Table. Notice that a AU4 not structured in AU4 Pass through connection mode is never terminated by the passed through node. In this case the passed through node DOES NOT have to be indicated as DESTINATION NODE in HO Squelching Table. To fill the table of Figure 98. on page 152 for each High Priority AU4 in TX and in RX direction the user: can select the identifier of the source node can select the identifier of the destination node can specify if the HO container is VC12/3 accessed. (Not operative in this release).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 151 / 448
In the Figure 98. each AU4 (1st. column) is represented as a Transmission and Receiving stream: 2nd column Source Node the small circle and an associated string allows to define the Node into which the relevant stream is Inserted. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select the Node number from the list displayed on the right side of the screen. 3rd column Destination Node the small circle and an associated string allows to define the Node form which the relevant stream is Dropped . By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select the Node number from the list displayed on the right side of the screen. 4th column VC Access (not operative in this release ).
Figure 98. Connection Configuration Squelching table for HO container
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 152 / 448
4.5.3.12 AU4s Cross Connection for Aggregates The data indicated in Figure 99. allows the user:
among the AU4s of the Aggregate West among the AU4s of the Aggregate East
to configure the type of crossconnection
Each Aggregate West AU4 and each Aggregate East AU4 (1st column) is represented by: 2nd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate AU4 of the same side to which the AU4 port will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the destination Aggregate AU4s list displayed at the bottom left of the screen. 3rd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type of crossconnection. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the list displayed at the bottomright of the screen The user can select the following types of connections from the list: Attention ! The AU4 payload managed must have already been selected as NOT STRUCTURED. As indicated on the screen the AU4 5 to 16 can be used only for the STM16 Aggregate. None Unidirectional Bidirectional
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 99. Connection Configuration AU4 Crossconnection for Aggregates
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 153 / 448
4.5.3.13 AU4s Cross Connection for Tributaries The date indicated in Figure 100. allows the user : to configure the CrossConnection: among the AU4s of the Tributary units Each Tributary AU4 (1st column) is represented by: 2nd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the destination tributary AU4 to which the AU4 port will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the destination tributary AU4s list displayed at the bottom left of the screen. 3rd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type of cross Connection (list of the bottom right). The user can select the same type of CrossConnection as described for the aggregate AU4.
Attention ! The AU4 payload managed must have already been selected as NOT STRUCTURED.
Figure 100. Connection Configuration AU4 CrossConnection for tributaries
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 154 / 448
4.5.3.14 AU4s PassThrough Allocation The data indicated in Figure 101. allows the user to configure the AU4s PassThrough Connection between the East Aggregate and West Aggregate. For each of the four AU4 channels of the East Aggregate the user can select the West side AU4 channels to connect. Each East side AU4 is represented by: 1st column The number identifies the East side AU4 that is kept as reference for the AU4 channel connection . 2nd column the small circle on the left and an associated string that allow to define what West side AU4 transmits towards the aggregate East AU4 channel of the 1st column (W E). By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the West side AU4 channels list displayed on the right of the screen. 3rd column as above to define the West side AU4 to which the aggregate East AU4 channel of the 1st column will be sent (E W).
In case of AU4C concatenation mode is sufficient to define the first of the groups of four AU4. Attention ! The AU4 payload managed must have already been selected as NOT STRUCTURED. As indicated on the screen the AU4 5 to 16 can be used only for the STM16 Aggregate.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 101. Connection Configuration AU4 Passthrough
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 155 / 448
4.5.3.15 TUs Drop/Insert Allocation for Tributary The following description concerns Tributary (1 to 8) configuration. The data indicated in Figure 102. on page 157 allows the user: to configure the TU connections between the 21x2M or 3x34M or 3 x 45M or STM1 Tributary 1 and the Aggregates. to configure the types of connection towards the Aggregates.
In order to configure the above connections, the application uses three different screens for each Tributary. Each screen is dedicated to one of the three possible TUG3 inside the tributary payload. Each TUG3 (1 up to 3) is correlated with the relevant physical 34Mbit/s reference port (1 up to 3). For the 21x2M Tributaries only the first screen must be used. By clicking on the NEXT and PREVIOUS keys allow the user to move within the three TUG3s. For the 34Mbit/s tributaries and TU3 of STM1 Tributaries, only the first line (TU3/34M/45M Port) is used. Each TU is represented by: 1st column The number identifying the TU or the 2Mb/s port (or 34/45 Mb/s port) 2nd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate AU4 to which the Tributary TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the Aggregate AU4s list displayed at the topright of the screen. 3rd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate TU to which the Tributary channel will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the third list displayed on the right of the screen for the TU12, or the second list on the right for the TU3. 4th column the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type of connection. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the list displayed at the bottomright of the screen The user can select the following types of connections from the list: None Insert to West Insert to East Bridge Drop from West not protected Drop from East not protected Drop from East protected Drop from West protected Drop/Insert West bidirectional not protected Drop/Insert East bidirectional not protected Drop/Insert West protected Drop/Insert East protected Drop and Continue W/E Insert W/E
5th column a Cross inside the box allows to configure for the relevant TU a revertible mode PPS (SNCP) with a fixed WTR (5 min.). If not selected (no cross inside the box) the PPS (SNCP) is performed in not revertible mode.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Attention ! The AU4 payload must have already been selected as STRUCTURED. The AU4 5 to 16 (first list) can be used only for STM16 Aggregates.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 156 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 102. Connection Configuration TU drop/insert, tributary
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
157 / 448
4.5.3.16 TUs CrossConnection for Aggregate East/West Crossconnection configurations for AU4 1 of the Aggregate WEST are specified herein. The cited information permit to also configure the other AU4 of Aggregates WEST and EAST through the selection of further 31 tables. Tables referred to AU4 5 to 16 can be used only for STM16 Aggregate. The data indicated in Figure 103. on page 159 allows the user: to configure the crossconnections between the TUs of the Aggregate West AU4 #1 and the TUs of the Aggregate AU4s on the same side, to configure the type of crossconnection
To configure the above crossconnections, the application uses three different screens. Each screen is dedicated to one of the three possible TUG3 inside the aggregate AU4 #1 payload. By clicking on keys NEXT or PREVIOUS the user can move within the three TUG3s. Only the first line of the configuration (TU3) is used for the TU3. Each TU of the Aggregate West AU4 #1 is represented by: 1st column the number identifying the TU 2nd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate AU4 of the same side to which the TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the Aggregate AU4s list displayed at the topright of the screen. 3rd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the TU of the selected AU4 to which the TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the third list displayed on the right of the screen for the TU12, or the second list on the right for the TU3. 4th column the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type of connection. By clicking on the circle or on the user can select from the list displayed at the bottomright of the screen. The user can select the following types of connections from the list: Attention ! The AU4 payload must have already been selected as STRUCTURED. The AU4 5 to 16 (first list) can be used only for STM16 Aggregates. None Unidirectional Bidirectional
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 158 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 103. Connection Configuration TU crossconnection. Aggregate
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
159 / 448
4.5.3.17 TUs CrossConnection for Tributary Crossconnection configurations for Tributary 1 are specified herein. The cited information also permits to configure the other Tributaries through a further selection of tables. The data indicated in Figure 104. on page 161 allows the user: to configure the crossconnections between the TUs of Tributary 1 and the TUs of the Tributaries to configure the type of crossconnection
To configure the above crossconnections, the application uses three different screens. Each screen is dedicated to one of the three possible TUG3 inside the Tributary 1 payload. By clicking on keys NEXT or PREVIOUS the user can move within the three screen. Only the first screen must be used for the 21 x 2 M Tributaries. Only the first line of the Configuration (TU3/34M/45M) must be used for the 3 x 34Mbit/s or 3x45Mbit/s units or TU3 of STM1 Tributaries. Each TU of Tributary 1 is represented by: 1st column the number identifying the TU or the 2Mbit/s port (or 34/45 Mb/s port). 2nd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Tributary to which the TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the Tributaries list displayed at the topright of the screen. 3rd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the TU of the selected tributary to which the TU of tributary 1 channel will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the Tributary TUs list displayed at the centerright of the screen for TU12, the list at the topright for the TU3/34 M or 45M port. When the TU12/2 M Port refer to crossconnections with the 21x2M Tributaries, only the TU12s with Port 1 to Port 21 indication have to be selected. 4th column the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type of crossconnection. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the list displayed at the bottomright of the screen The user can select the following types of connections from the list: Attention ! The AU4 payload must have already been selected as STRUCTURED. None Unidirectional (Insert, Drop) Bidirectional
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 160 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R Figure 104. Connection Configuration TU crossconnection Tributary
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
161 / 448
4.5.3.18 2 M Tributary Conditions The table shown in Figure 105. allows to enable or disable each of the sixtythree 2 Mb tributary ports of the three possible 2Mb Trib. units.
Figure 105. Connection Configuration . 2 Mb/s tributary conditions
4.5.3.19 34M and 45M and DVB Tributary Conditions The table shown in Figure 106. allows to enable or disable each of the three 34 Mbit/s, 45Mbit/s or DVB Tributary ports of the eight possible units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 106. Connection Configuration . 34 Mb/s, 45 Mbit/s or DVB tributary conditions
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 162 / 448
4.5.3.20 2/34M Conditions of 34/2 and 5x2M Tributary. The table shown in Figure 107. allows to enable or disable, for each of the three tributaries, the five 2 Mbit/s port and the four groups of four 2 Mbit/s ports making up the 34 Mbit/s stream.
Figure 107. Connection Configuration 34/2 and 5x2 Tran Mux Trib. conditions 4.5.3.21 140Mbit/s tributary port Configuration The table shown in Figure 105. allows to enable or disable each of the eight possible 140Mbit/s port of the relevant Tributary units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 108. Connection Configuration . 140 Mbit/s tributary port Configuration
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 163 / 448
4.5.3.22 2M Retiming configuration This table must be compiled for each used port of the 2 Mbit/s retiming tributary in order to enable the retiming function for the selected port. The mixed configuration with and without Retiming is not allowed.
Figure 109. Connection Configuration 2 Mbit/s retiming configurations
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 164 / 448
4.5.3.23 TUs PassThrough Allocation for Aggr. East AU4 The data indicated in Figure 110. on page 165 allows the user to configure the TUs PassThrough Connections between the East Aggregate AU4 #1 and West Aggregate AU4s. To configure the above passthrough connections, the application uses three different screens. Each screen is dedicated to one of the three possible TUG3 inside the East Aggregate AU4 #1 payload. By clicking on keys NEXT or PREVIOUS the user can move within the three screens. Only the first line of the Configuration (East TU3) must be used if TU3 are in the passthrough condition. Each TU of the East Aggregate AU4 #1 is represented by: 1st column the number which identifies the East side (that is kept as reference for the connection) TU channel 2nd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define what West side AU4 transmits towards the Aggregate East TU of the 1st column (W E). By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the Aggregate Au4s list displayed at the topright of the screen. 3rd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the what TU pertaining to the AU previously defined, transmits towards the Aggregate East TU of the 1st column (W E). By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the West side TUs list on the right (third list for TU12, second list for TU3). 4th column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define what West side AU4 receives the Aggregate channel coming from East (E W). By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the Aggregate AU4s list displayed at the topright of the screen. 5th column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the TU of the selected incoming AU4 West side that receives the Aggregate East TU of the 1st column. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the West side TUs list.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 110. Connection Configuration TU passthrough Aggregate
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 165 / 448
4.5.3.24 Connection Configuration by AUX/EOW The table shown in Figure 111. on page 168 allow the user to configure: the Passthrough connections and the Termination of the data channels, V11 and G.703. the voice channel connections
The user can choose the following: for each Termination channel (V11 #1, V11 #2, V11 #3, G.703 #1, G.703 #2, G.703 #3) the options are: none Agg West/East Main / Active (available bytes: E1, E2, F1 and all free bytes of SOH. Besides the F2 byte for the structured AU4) Agg West/East AU4 # 1 16 (available bytes: F2, if the AU4 is structured) Agg West/East Spare /Standby (available bytes: E1, F1) STM1 Trib # 18 (available bytes: E1, E2, F1) 140M Trib #18 (available bytes: F2, F3) select the OverHead byte devoted to the channel (Table: OH selection for Termination Channels.) It is also possible to select both the Aggregates Spare to convey to the terminations the E1 and F1 bytes. for each of the possible Passthrough channels choose between: none Agg West/East Main / Active Agg West/East Spare/Standby select the OverHead byte assigned to the channel (OHs table for the PassThrough Channels.)
Eow Extension Enabled. In the following we describe how to use this function since the AUX/EOW Units that can be used are: AUX/EOW EXTENSION / 2 AUX/EOW / 2
1)
Using the AUX/EOW EXTENSION / 2 unit. Select the Eow Extension Enabled option. The User must HW preset the unit for the extension on the third voice channel (see the Technical Handbook, HW Presetting section). Voice 3 channel must not SW set in this case because it is already used to realize the extension. The Voice 3 channel cant be used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2)
With this unit and under the previous conditions, the analogic bypass functionality, that allows the party line connection between Voice 1,2 and the voice extension towards the external by means the access panel of the equipment, will be activate. The unit converts the speech signal passing through from East to West from digital to analog and vice versa. Using the AUX/EOW / 2 unit.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 166 / 448

Do not select the EOW Extension Enabled when using the AUX/EOW / 2 unit for WIDE NETWORK otherwise the analogic bypass would permanently activated. Voice 3 channel must not SW set.
3)
With this Unit , no digital to analog conversion is operated on the speech signal passing through from East to West (digital bypass activated) and there is no limit on the number of NE connected. When the AUX/EOW unit is for the WIDE NETWORK and Voice 3 is configured and connected to a Tributary the analogic bypass is automatically activated. With both unit. Voice 3 channel can SW set using Tributary unit. Do not select the EOW Extension Enabled. The User must HW preset the unit to enable the Voice 3 channel on Tributary. Having engaged the voice 3 channel, the digital bypass will be disabled and the EOW passes through the double conversion
select the MSOH Passthrough option (all the Multiplex Section OverHead bytes are bypassed between the EastWest Aggregates). Only RSOH bytes remain available for the Pass through connection filling the PassThrough Channels selection of the Figure 111. on page 168 . for the Voice channel Voice 1: select among: AGG. West main; bytes E1, E2. AGG. West Spare; bytes E1. AGG. West AU4 #116; bytes F2. STM1 Tribs ; byte E1 or E2. 140 Mbit/s Trib.; byte F2. Voice 2: select among: AGG. East main; byte E1, E2 AGG. East Spare; bytes E1. AGG. East AU4 #116; bytes F2. STM1 Tribs ; byte E1 or E2. 140 Mbit/s Trib.; byte F2. Voice 3: select among: AGG. West/East main; byte E1, E2. AGG. West/East Spare; byte E1. AGG. West/East AU4 #116; bytes F2. STM1 Tribs ; byte E1 or E2. 140 Mbit/s Trib.; byte F2.
When in a ring connection, in one of the node only one Aggregate side must be used to avoid loop of the speech. Select the phone number ( 10 to 99 )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All the operative selections appear on the lists on the right.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 167 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R Figure 111. Connection Configuration AUX/EOW Connection

3AL 38249 AA AA
448
168 / 448
4.5.3.25 AUX/EOW cross connections As cross connection we mean a connection between two tributaries or between an aggregate and a tributary. For each tributary /aggregate and for each AU4 # inside the STM N that has been cross connected in term of payload, it is possible to cross connect also the SOH /POH bytes of the OverHead section. For each of the involved tributary/aggregates it is possible to select the byte to cross connect. List of the cross connectable SOH bytes: E1, E2, F1, F2 for STMN, using SOH for Aggregate and OH bus for Trib. E1, E2, F1, F2 for STMN. The spare Agg uses the E1 and F1 bytes. Agg. West/East AU4#14 or #116; F2 byte. List of the cross connectable POH bytes: F2/F3 for 140 Mb Trib, using OH bus F2, for STMN, using Matrix via OH bus The cross connection is bidirectional.
Figure 112. AUX/AEOW cross connections
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 169 / 448
4.5.4 DROP SHELF Connection Configuration Application For the DROP SHELF Connection Configuration the following is a list of the connection configuration extension available ( see Figure 113. ): STM 1 E MODULES CONNECTION TUs D / I ALLOCATION DS_ TRIB #1 TO # 9 TUs CROSS CONNECTION DS_ TRIB #1 TO # 9 2 M TRIBUTARIES CONDITION 2 M RETIMING TRIBUTARIES CONDITION
Each of the above Tables will be detailed in the paragraphs that follow.
It must be noted that, starting from this Release: The connections involving the Drop Shelf 2mBit/s streams and set using the Applications cited above, are performed by the Line Shelf Matrix Unit. The links between Drop Shelf STM1 E Modules and the Line Shelf STM1 streams are fixed. (STM1 E Module #1,#2,#3 are connected respectively with the Switchable STM1 units #5, #6, #7). The allocation of the Drop Shelf 2Mbit/s flows with the Drop Shelf STM1 E Modules is fixed. The Drop Shelf 21x2 Mbit/s Units #1, #2 and #3 flows , are collected by the STM1 E Module #1 that grooms the Trib #1 flows into the TUG3 #1 of the proper STM1 #1......till the last possible allocation that is relevant to the Drop Shelf 21x2 Mbit/s Units #7, #8 and #9 flows that are collected by the STM1 E Module #3 that grooms the Trib #9 flows into the TUG3 #3 of the proper STM1 #3. Fixed allocation means also that we are not obliged to equip the Line Shelf Switchable Trib. starting from the 5th one. It is possible for example to equip only the LINE SHELF TRIB. # 7 with its relevant DROP SHELF 21x2 Mb Units #7, #8 and #9.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 113. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration Tables
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 170 / 448
4.5.4.1 STM1E module connection The table shown in Figure 114. allows to configure the connection between the DROP SHELF STM 1 E Module and the LINE SHELF STM 1 TRIBUTARIES #5 to #7. these connections are fixed. By clicking on the small circle the user can choose the following options from the list: Not connected LINE SHELF STM 1 Trib. # n
Figure 114. DROP SHELF Connection config. STM1E module connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 171 / 448
4.5.4.2 TUs drop/insert allocation. DS Tributaries The data indicated in Figure 115. on page 173 allows the user: to configure the TU connections between the 21x2M Tributary #1 to #9 to configure the types of connection towards the Aggregates.
Each TU is represented by: 1st column The number identifying the TU or the 2Mb/s port. 2nd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate AU4 to which the Tributary TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the Aggregate AU4s list displayed at the topright of the screen. 3rd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate TU to which the Tributary channel will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the third list displayed on the right of the screen for the TU12. 4th column the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type of connection. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the list displayed at the bottomright of the screen The user can select the following types of connections from the list: None Insert to West Insert to East Bridge Drop from West not protected Drop from East not protected Drop from East protected Drop from West protected Drop/Insert West bidirectional not protected Drop/Insert East bidirectional not protected Drop/Insert West protected Drop/Insert East protected Drop and Continue W/E Insert W/E D/I Prot W(E)/Trib D/I Prot Trib/W(E) D Prot W(E)/Trib D Prot Trib/W(E)
5th column a Cross inside the box allows to configure for the relevant TU a revertible mode PPS (SNCP) with a fixed WTR (5 min.). If not selected (no cross inside the box) the PPS (SNCP) is performed in not revertible mode.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 172 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R Figure 115. DROP SHELF Connection Config. Drop/Insert allocation DS tributary
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
173 / 448
4.5.4.3 TUs cross connection. DS Tributaries Crossconnection configurations for a Tributary are specified herein. The cited information also permits to configure the other Tributaries through a further selection of tables. The data indicated in Figure 116. on page 175 allows the user: to configure the crossconnections between the TUs of Tributary #2 in the example and the TUs of all the DROP SHELF and LINE SHELF Tributaries. to configure the type of crossconnection
Each TU of Tributary is represented by: 1st column the number identifying the TU or the 2Mbit/s port. 2nd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Tributary to which the TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the Tributaries list displayed at the topright of the screen (8 LINE SHELF Tribs and 9 DROP SHELF Tribs). 3rd column the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the TU of the selected tributary to which the TU of tributary #2 in the example will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the Tributary TUs list displayed at the centerright of the screen for TU12. 4th column the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type of crossconnection. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the list displayed at the bottomright of the screen The user can select the following types of connections from the list: Attention ! The AU4 payload must have already been selected as STRUCTURED. None Unidirectional (Insert, Drop) Bidirectional
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 174 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 116. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration TUs cross connection. DS tributaries
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
175 / 448
4.5.4.4 2 Mbit/s Tributary condition. DS Trib. The Tributaries are selected through the table indicated in Figure 117.
Figure 117. DROP SHELF Connection Config. 2 Mbit/s trib. condition DS trib.(choice of element)
Figure 118. allows to enable or disable each of the twenty one 2 Mb tributary ports of the 2Mb Trib. units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 118. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration 2 Mbit/s tributary condition. DS trib.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 176 / 448
4.5.4.5 2 Mbit/s Retiming Tributary condition. DS Trib. The Tributaries are selected through the table indicated in Figure 119. Mixed configuration of 2M Trib with and without Retiming function are not allowed.
Figure 119. 2 Mbit/s Retiming Tributary condition. DS Trib.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 177 / 448
4.5.5 Local Configuration Application This application is used to manage the local configuration data of the NE. Before starting any dialog the cited data must be loaded onto the NE. Through this data the OS or the MNE ( Master NE that performs the RECT functions) can locate the NE. The NE can configure the protocol stacks. The following local configuration tables are available for the user ( see Figure 120. ): Local Configuration OS Configuration Server NTP Configuration MS LAPD Configuration RS LAPD Configuration MF Configuration table ETHERNET Address Configuration R ECT Configuration Entry
The above are now defined as follows:
Figure 120. Local Configuration Tables

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 178 / 448
4.5.5.1 Local Configuration Table This table, shown in Figure 121. allows the user to configure the LOCAL NE in order to be recognized by the OS or by the Remote Craft Terminal The LOCAL address consists of the following data fields: Area address System ID 7.1 address Intermediate system
Figure 121. Local Configuration In details the Local Address is represented by : The Area addresses (up to 3) and system ID constitute the NSAP address (Network Service Access Point) of the NE. It is mandatory to set the first area address field. Area address 2 or 3 can be used as alias to obtain different manual area addresses within one single TMN Routing subdomain. The operators compiling it must be familiar with ISO 10589 ISIS Routing Recs. Area address 2 or 3 can be changed by the operator without prompting equipment restart and can have different lengths. On the contrary, changes in mandatory Area Address, System ID and Intermediate System automatically restart the equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The NSAP address refers to level 3 (Network layer) of stack OSI and its structure complies with GOSIP V2, ISO_DCC or LOCAL format.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 179 / 448
The AREA address is composed by the following fields: AFI : Authority and Format Identifier; IDI : Initial Domain Identifier (identifies the Nation); VER : indicates the format of the following fields; AUTH : identifies the department; RES : reserved field; (2 digit) (4 digit) (2 digit) (6 digit) (4 digit)
DOMAIN & AREA : free fields for defining the network levels; (4 digit each one)
Another field, named SELECTOR (not presented to the operator) automatically inserts 2 digit.
For the GOSIP V2 format the AFI field is 47 other fields : depend on network management structure
An example of GOSIP V2 format hypothetical address and System Id is:
47 AFI
0005 IDI
80 VER
010203 AUTH
0000 RES *
0405 DOMAIN
0607 AREA
00206000001 SYSTEM ID * = value automatically inserted
* = value automatically inserted
For the ISO_DCC format the AFI field is 39 other fields : depend on network management structure
For these formats the SYSTEM ID filed must be 6 bytes long.
For the LOCAL format

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
the AFI field is 49 other fields : depend on network management structure
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 180 / 448
The value of the SYSTEM ID field (12digit long) might be:

the equipment MAC Ethernet address supplied by ALCATELTELECOM (level 2) selected by the operator
However it must be unique in the network.
The NSAP address (Area addresses and System ID) length can range from 8 v byte v 20. N.B. When using a NSAP length < 20 the not used fields must be filled with star characters : * When using the LOCAL format, the equipments SW download from OS is supported only if the OS is using the ISO DCC format (AFI 39) or the GOSIP V2 format (AFI 47)
N.B.
The value of the 7.1 ADDRESS identifying the NE must be greater than 4 and must be different for each NE. INTERMEDIATE SYSTEM: the operator can select whether the 1651 SM will work as an L1 or as an L2 Intermediate System by clicking on the L1 or L2 circle. All the NEs belonging to an Area Address connected to other Area Address must be configured as L2 Intermediate Systems (I.S.).The NEs connected together inside the same Area Address must be configured as L1. For example, a NE Gateway connected to the OS and having different Area Address must be configured as L2 I.S. All the ADMs in the ring including the gateway NE should have the same mandatory area address.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 181 / 448
4.5.5.2 OS configuration The screen of Figure 122. is dedicated to the MAIN and SPARE OS Local Address: The OS NSAP address is composed by: Area address System ID
At the bottom of the screen the table defines the switch condition between Main and Spare OS: enable / disable the Automatic Switch Over enable / disable Automatic Switch Back WARNING Be carefull, in order to avoid loss of dialogue with the OS , the operator must insert correctly the Area Address code of OS main. If the OS cant dialogue with the N.E because of the wrong address, the only way to restore the connection is to connect physically the P.C to the N.E and fill again correctly the OS configuration table.
Figure 122. Local Configuration OS configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 182 / 448
4.5.5.3 Server NTP Configuration Table The NTP (Network Time synchronization Protocol) has been introduced to improve the precision of the present QB3* mechanism for time distribution in the network; the server can be configured following the indications given in the Figure 123. . The NSAP address ( Area address and System ID ) must be given . Two NTP servers can be present , the Main and the Spare. A further selection permits to enable the NTP server. If the NTP server is coincident with the OS ( same hardware ) , the same NSAP address of the OS must be assigned. Refer to Technical Handbook for details.
Figure 123. Local Configuration Server NTP Configuration Table
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 183 / 448
4.5.5.4 MS (RS) LAPD Configuration table These tables permit to configure the LAPD use and ROLE for Aggregate and Tributary units in the DCCM (MS) and DCCR (RS) channel connections. The table shown in Figure 124. is referred to the MS LAPD. For each card the table defines the following: LAPD interface NO: card not concerned with DCC connections YES: card concerned with DCC connections
LAPD role which is selected when the LAPD interface is used (YES). USER NETWORK
This selection is a must to establish connection between two NEs and one network role with one user role interfaced.
Figure 124. Local Configuration MS LAPD configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 184 / 448
4.5.5.5 Mediation Function Configuration table This table (see Figure 125. ) allows the user to enable the Mediation Function, when interfacing non SDH equipment with Q2 management. The table permits to: insert the 7.1 address of the Q2 interface enable the Mediation Function
The application possible on the Mediation Function are presented at para 4.11 on page 324 . The Network Configuration with Mediation Function is presented at para 4.12 on page 332 .
Figure 125. Mediation Function Configuration table
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 185 / 448
4.5.5.6 ETHERNET Address Configuration table This table ( see Figure 126. ) allows the user to configure the following information associated to the Ethernet address to be used when the NE is connected to the Ethernet interface: Ethernet interface, click YES if the Q3 interface is present. LOCAL Address; the MAC Ethernet Address must be inserted ( level 2 ).
The value can be copied by means of the RECEIVE function of the FILE option. Hence the value, if present, is automatically received from the Futurebus Termination subunit of the Network Element. In this case, even if the value is manually modified, it will not be operative. The operator can also manually insert the MAC Ethernet Address value received from ALCATEL. L2 only parameter ( see Figure 127. on page 187 ) False: if on the same interface, the L2 GNE also links NE pertaining to the same Area (e.g. NE B). True : if on the same interface, the L2 GNE links only GNE pertaining to the other Areas (e.g. NE A).
However the operator must refer to the ISO 10589 ISIS Routing Recs.
Figure 126. Local Configuration Ethernet address
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 186 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
L2 NE AREA 2 L2 only = FALSE NE B OS AREA 1 L2only = TRUE NE A
01
957.140.152 R AREA 3
Figure 127. Local Configuration L2 only parameter
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
187 / 448
4.5.5.7 RECT configuration The NEs are selected through the table indicated in Figure 128.
Figure 128. Local Configuration RECT configuration (choice of element) The table of Figure 129. allows the user to configure the remote NE that must be managed by a MNE ( Master Network Element ). The table contains 31 entries, each of them describing one remote NE. For each entry the user can configure the following information: enabling of the Entry when the NE must be controlled by the Master NE of the Network or not. NSAP address of the Remote NE: Area Address System identifier
7.1 address of Remote NE
In order to configure such information the application uses 31 different screens, one for each possible NE of the network. The keys NEXT and PREVIOUS allow the user to move among the 31 screens.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 129. Local Configuration RECT configuration
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 188 / 448
4.5.6 Routing Table Configuration Application This application is activated from the OPTIONS bar of Alarm Synthesis window, by clicking on Application_Choice and then on Routing Table Configuration, after selection of a given equipment of the list. Messages are needed to be continuously exchanged between any NE or between OS and the NEs of the SDH network. In a large and complex network it is necessary to build some tables to route the messages and data transfers. For this equipment the TMN management routing is automatically carried out by means of ISIS Routing function. Only for elements not supporting the ISIS function it is necessary to fill the Routing tables. The operator must intervene only in the following conditions: Reachable Address Prefix Element (RAP) when the NE interfaces other routing domains not supporting the ISIS function (e.g., OS with a different area address). Manual ES Adjacencies Element (MESA) when the NE interfaces the same domain, with NEs not acknowledging the ISIS Routing (also for OS when it has the same Area Address).
The user can work on the following tables ( see Figure 130. ): Reachable Address Prefixes Element (RAP) Manual ES Adjacencies Element (MESA)
The above are defined in the description that follows.
Figure 130. Routing Table Configuration Tables

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 189 / 448
4.5.6.1 Reachable Address Prefixes (RAP) Element table The Elements are selected through the table indicated in Figure 131. A max. of 32 RAPs per NE can be configured. The Reachable Address Prefixes Element table must be compiled only with those elements configured as L2 Intermediate System in the LOCAL configuration. These tables will be later used when the NEs are connected to other routing subdomains. When selecting an element the operator will set the information given in Figure 132. Physical Interface to be selected from a list shown on the right of the screen (LAN or Aggregates or Tribs).DCCR channels and DCCM channels are used for both Aggregate and Tributary units. RAP: Area Address by inserting the value of the Area Address of the routing subdomain which is connected through the previously indicated physical interface. MAC Address (level 2) of the connected element. It must de inserted only when the physical interface operates as a LAN.
Figure 131. Routing Table Configuration Choice of Element (RAP)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 132. Routing Table Configuration Reachable address prefixes element
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 190 / 448
4.5.6.2 Manual ES adjacencies (MESA) Element table The table shown in Figure 133. is utilized to select the elements.
A max. of 32 MESAs per NE can be configured. The MESA is used to define the reachability of an adjacent NE not supporting neither the ISIS protocol nor the ESIS protocol. The Operator will have to define the characteristics of this NE (MAC address and System ID) to enable the ISIS to acknowledge it. The MESA must be inserted to define how to reach a NE not supporting the ISIS protocol but belonging to the same Routing domain (and having the same Area Address). The MESA is supported by the LAN interface and can be applied to the L1 and L2 Intermediate Systems, e.g., it can be applied to an OS if it belongs to the same subdomain (same Area Address). As can be seen from Figure 134. the operator must insert the System ID of the NE not supporting the ISIS protocol along with its ETHERNET MAC Address. These values are usually different. If the System ID is assigned with the default value FFFF... then the two values are identical (the MAC address is automatically copied in the System ID field).
Figure 133. Routing Table Configuration Choice of element (MESA)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 134. Routing Table Configuration Manual ES adjacencies element
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 191 / 448
4.6 Alarm, status & control application

The A.S. & C. application: displays the failure condition and the status changes that have occurred on the NE, allows to move easily and quickly among the different screen levels (option view see Figure 146. on page 208 and Figure 147. on page 208) displays/prints the alarms and the statuses history, provides remote control access to force functionalities on the NE (see para 4.6.3 on page 254 for details ).
The data to display is arranged on different screen levels. The alarm general information of the NE is displayed at the top of each AS & C screen. Each synthesis is represented by a label which is green in normal condition. If one of the alarms arises on the NE, the label changes colors. The color of the alarm labels in alarm condition is indicated in Table 9. on page 193.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 192 / 448
Table 9. ASC Colors of the Alarms Synthesis
AT UG NG IN AC AE
Alarm receiving attention Urgent Alarm Not Urgent Alarm Indicative Alarm Abnormal Condition Access enable for remote control operation: Local Craft Terminal access enabled by the management operative system. Environmental indication (Housekeeping alarm) Unavailable Time. 10 consecutive severely errored seconds. Ethernet Fail LINE SHELF Battery : Fusebroken alarm (Fuses housed in the Top Rack Unit). OR alarm due to station power supply failure due to any causes. The alarm criterion sent to the EC is :ORALIMI LINE SHELF Battery control Failure / Missing (Service Batt. missing/ AND OR failure or missing). The alarm criterion sent to the EC is : PWANDOR OS Isolation: link failed between Management Equipment Operation System and NE Mediation function OS isolation (Link failed between MF and OS) LINE SHELF Converters Synthesis Converters Fail
Magenta Red Yellow Magenta Magenta Light blue (not enabled) NB1 Magenta NB1 Yellow
HI UT ET LF
LB
Yellow
OS MF
Yellow Red Yellow
DF
DROP SHELF Battery Fusebroken alarm DROP SHELF Battery control Failure / Missing (Service Batt. missing/ AND OR failure or missing) DROP SHELF Converters Synthesis Converters Fail
Yellow
DB
Yellow
Yellow
NB1 :
The colour of the label depends on the severity of the Housekeeping Alarms received: red for Urgent, yellow for Not urgent, magenta for Indicative. The colour associated to the most severe alarm is present when more than one alarm is detected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To reset the UT labels, send the relevant AS & C Remote Control.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 193 / 448
4.6.1 LINE SHELF AS&C description The Figure 135. on page 195 represents the first screen level showing the first alarm synthesis for the Line and Drop Shelf, FOX Equipment eventually connected and the OA alarm collection. At the top of the main screen the label : New Practice if present indicates that the composition of the Equipment is made with a shelf and subunits of a new mechanical structure. For both Line and Drop Shelf the first level screen shows two boxes representing the Logical view of cards and a Physical structure with the indication of the numbered card slot. In these boxes are shown the following synthesis of alarm: LOGIC VIEW (logic representation of the NE) Reports the units and some function of the equipment in form of blocks Two boxes shown the following synthesis of alarm: Logical Alarm Synthesis (color depending on the alarm severity) Abnormal Condition (magenta)
PHYSIC VIEW (physical structure of the NE ) Reports the position of the units inside the equipment Card Fail (red) Internal Failure (red or yellow)
On the first level screen is also depicted the following function: PPS: The first two small labels indicate the Forced Switch West or East of Path Protection Switching relevant to Tributary TU protection and to the Aggregate AU set in Enhanced Connectivity and PPS protected. The third small label is relevant to the Force Switch Trib in case of TTA connection. They are the OR indications for all PPS forced in the Remote Control option. They can be: green if there are not forced PPS magenta if there are forced PPS SW VERSION: OS : Shows the OS status :Active or Stand by (Line Shelf Only ) shows the SW versions of all the Shelf Units
MS SPRING: Node and Command Status (1661SMC Line Shelf only ) To show the NODE behavior when the first fault occurs in the ring network MS SPRING protected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 194 / 448
Figure 135. Alarm,Status and Control Main screen, Line and Drop Shelf
From the first level layout is obtained the second level layout that depicts the whole NE 1651 SM (see Figure 136. for Line Shelf Logical view and Figure 137. for the relevant Line Shelf Physical Structure. The analogous screens for the Drop Shelf are depicted in the Figure 138. on page 197 and in the Figure 139. on page 197. The equipment release is also indicated. The slot No. indicated on the screen corresponds to the unit position inside the subrack, and is in sequential order inside it from left to right and from top to bottom. The Figures show the configuration of the cards contained in the equipment. The cards that are not configured are not displayed. Each card type can be inserted only in specific slots of the NE. Table 10. on page 198 and Table 11. on page 199 list the slots contained in the Line and Drop Shelf and the associated card type.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 195 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 137. AS & C Line Shelf, physical view
01
957.140.152 R Figure 136. Alarm Status and Control (AS & C) Line Shelf, Logical View
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
196 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R Figure 138. AS & C Main screen Drop Shelf , Logical View
Figure 139. AS & C Main screen, Drop Shelf, physical view
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
197 / 448
Table 10. Card/slot relationship LINE SHELF
1 2 3 4 6 7 8 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 NB.1 :
Switch Unit/Alarm Interface Access Module (34 45 or 140 Mb/s settings) NB1 21x2 Mbit/s Trib., 21x2 Mbit/s Retiming Trib.,140/STM1 Switch Trib., S 1.1 LVC Trib., L1.1 LVC Trib. or 3x34 Mbit/s Trib., L1.1 HVC STM1 Trib., S1.1 HVC STM1 Trib., 34/25x2M Trib, 3 x 45M Trib, DVB. Tributary Spare 1 140/STM1 Switch Trib, 21x2 Mb/s Trib,21x2 Mbit/s RetimingTrib., 3x34 Mb/s Trib., L1.1/S1.1 HVC STM1 Trib., 34/25x2M Trib. , 3 x 45M Trib, DVB. 16x16 Matrix 16x16 Matrix Spare 140/STM1 Switch Tributary, S1.1 LVC Trib. , L1.1 LVC Trib. , 3x34 Mbit/s Trib., L1.1/S1.1 HVC STM1 Trib. , 3 x 45M Trib, DVB.
Tributary Spare 2 140/STM1 switch Trib or 3x34 Mb/s Trib., L1.1/S1.1 HVC STM1 Trib. , 3 x 45M Trib, DVB. Switch Unit /Alarm Interface Access Module (34 Mb/s or 45 Mb/s) NB1 Switch Unit/Alarm Interface Access Module (34 45 or 140 Mb/s settings) NB1 AUX / EOW STM4 Aggregate West 1 (L4.1 or S4.1 or L4.2) STM4 Aggregate East 2 spare (L4.1 or S4.1 or L4.2) or STM16 Aggregate East (S16.1, L16.1 or L16.2) NB2. CRU Spare CRU Main STM4 Aggregate East 1 (L4.1 or S4.1 or L4.2) STM4 Aggregate West 2 spare (L4.1 or S4.1 or L4.2) or STM16 Aggregate West (S16.1, L16.1 or L16.2) NB1. With Rel. New Practice equipment physical structure,the SWITCH UNITS are not present. The switching function is realized directly by means the interconnections within the units. This slot is nevertheless SW settable in order to activate N+1 EPS in both Old and New Practice Equipment. In this last Structure is also necessary to make the HW presetting on the Alarm Interface Access Module as indicated in the Technical Handbook Hardware Setting Section. Two slots & (18+19 and 22+23) are assigned to each STM16 Aggregate
NB.2 :
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 198 / 448
Slot #
Card
Table 11. Card/slot relationship DROP SHELF
Slot # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 not used slot
Card
21x2 Mbit/s Trib., 21x2 Mbit/s RetimingTrib.
ADM600 Interface Unit Main and Spare not used slot 21x2 Mbit/s Trib, 21x2 Mbit/s RetimingTrib. Spare 21x2 Mbit/s Trib, 21x2 Mbit/s RetimingTrib.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 199 / 448
two rectangles two small labels (one for the AUX/EOW, three for the Switch Units). a label with the slot number
The first rectangle shows the card status. The card can assume the IN SERVICE or OUTOFSERVICE status. The second rectangle can show the ACTIVE or STANDBY status. If the card is outofservice, then: the first rectangle is colored bright red showing a highlighted OUT string the second rectangle is colored bright red.
If the card is in service, then: the first rectangle is colored green showing a highlighted IN screen. the second rectangle is colored green showing a highlighted ISACT, if the card is in the ACTIVE state is coloured bright red if the card is in the ISSTANDBY state.
The label on the right displays the OR indication, it stands for abnormal conditions detected on the card, and is not present for the AUX/EOW unit . The label is displayed even if the associated cards are not configured. The label has a colored background. 1) 2) it is colored green if there are no abnormal conditions it is colored bright red if there is an abnormal condition. If a monochromatic display is used the term colors black.
The label on the left displays the ORing of the logic alarms defined on the card. The label background is colored: 3) 4) 5) 6)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
green if there are no logic alarms red if an URGENT alarm is active yellow if a NOT URGENT alarm is active and there are no URGENT alarms present bright red if an INDICATIVE alarm is active and there are no URGENT nor NOT URGENT alarms present
When the alarm is present a letter A appears. For the Switch Unit labels are present only in the Physical view
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 200 / 448
Clicking inside the logic box the LOGIC VIEW appears (see Figure 136. on page 196 for the Line Shelf or Figure 138. on page 197 for the Drop Shelf). Each label depicted in it represents a card. The blocks representing the alarm condition of the units, are present only if the unit has been configured according to the configuration tables downloaded on the NE, anyway a label indicating the slot number is always present. Each label ( card ) is represented by:
Clicking inside the physical box the PHYSICAL VIEW appears (see Figure 137. on page 196 or Figure 139. on page 197 ). Each card is represented by a numbered rectangle. The number inside it identifies the slot into which the card is inserted. The cards that are not configured are not displayed. Each rectangle, associated to a logic structure, contains two small labels . The top label, INTERNAL FAILURE, represents the ORing of the following physical alarms: Card mismatch Software mismatch Card not responding Card missing other indications of the single card
The lower label represents the CARD FAIL and it is the ORing of the following physical alarms: Card Fail EEPROM fail Gate Array fail Card power fail other alarms of the single card
For the Switch Unit three labels are present indicating: Card fail Card missing Card mismatch
More detailed screens are not provided for these units. In the STM1 E Modules label that are represented in the upper part of the Drop Shelf physical structure there is only one label indicating: Card Fail or Card Missing
More detailed subscreens can be accessed for each card and function both with regard to the physical and logic view and for each function. These subscreens detail the information displayed on the first and second screen. To access these subscreens position the mouse on the card involved, and when the cursor is depicted as a magnifying glass (see Figure 13. on page 62 ) click the left mousebutton. The displayed information differs for each card/functions, and are presented in the next paragraphs. For more details on the meaning of the units alarms and the maintenance actions refer to Maintenance section . A subscreen can be also accessed from the HI label that is found in the equipment alarm synthesis at the top of the AS&C screen, by clicking on the cursor when it becomes a magnifier. It the housekeeping indications (1 to 8 inputs and 1 to 7 outputs) received/transmitted by the equipment displays on the relevant tagblock (see Figure 140. on page 203) Clicking on the boxes the Housekeeping denomination are obtained. The first three Housekeeping can be modified by means of the Equipment Configuration application
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 201 / 448
For the Line Shelf / Drop Shelf Power Supplies are shown in Figure 141. on page 203 and in Figure 142. on page 203 respectively, the labels indicating the Secondary Power Supply Fail.
The indication common to the detailed levels is green in normal condition, while those of the active condition are listed in the following Table 12.
Table 12. Common CARD STATUS indications ( active ).
ALARM/STATUS ISACT PBA inservice and active. N.B ISSTBY PBA inservice and standby. N.B Card missing Card mismatch Software mismatch Card not responding Card fail MS or RS LAPD fail Commanded switch
Mnemonic and color
Meaning
ACTIVE magenta Unit inserted and operating STAND BY magenta CRD MIS red MSMTCH red MSMTCH red NO RESP yellow C. FAIL red MS/RS LAPD yellow COMM SW, magenta SWITCH, magenta LINE L magenta INT. L magenta Unit inserted and spare Slot configured but unit not inserted Unit inserted into a slot configured for another type of unit Unit with not updated software version No dialogue between Card and Equipment Controller Unit internal failure (hardware) Dialogue of Equipment Controller by means of DCCM/R interrupted Switching Remote command from the AS&C East West Protection switching activated (PPS) Loopback Remote command from the AS&C Loopback Remote command from the AS&C
Protection Switch event Line loopback Internal loopback
N.B.
PBA=Printed Board Assembly=unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 202 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 140. AS & C Housekeeping Figure 141. Line Shelf Power Supplies Label
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 142. Drop Shelf Power Supplies Labels
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
203 / 448
4.6.1.1 LINE SHELF AS&C description 4.6.1.2 AUXEOW screen Figure 143. shows the detailed screen of the AUXEOW. The AUX/EOW consists of the following functional blocks and associated alarms: OH ACCESS (Overhead Access) Loss of Signal on G.703 Interface #1 Loss of Signal on G.703 Interface #2 Loss of Signal on G.703 Interface #3
OH CONNECTIONS (Overhead Connections) CARD STATUS ISACT PBA inservice and active (PBA=Printed Board Assembly is synonymous with unit) Card missing Card mismatch Software mismatch Card not responding Card fail
The change of colour, symbol or text in each label indicates the presence of a specific card alarm.
Figure 143. AS & C AUX/EOW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 204 / 448
4.6.1.3 21x2 Mbit/s and 21x2Mbit/s Retiming tributary Screen Two screens are utilized for the 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary unit.
The first screen (second level) shows a detailed view of the Tributary card (see Figure 144. on page 207). The second screen shows a detailed view (Third Level Layout) of each of the 21 ports making up the 2Mbit/s Tributary card (see Figure 145. on page 207) The following functional blocks and relevant alarms are displayed on the first screen: 21 Tributary Ports each provided with four labels: the label at the bottomright displays the Protection Switch event (SNCP) the label at the bottomcenter displays the OR of the abnormal conditions the label at the bottomleft displays the OR of the alarms defined in the port the label at the top indicates if the port has been selected as a clock source.
CARD STATUS ISACT PBA inservice and active ISACT PBA inservice and standby. Manual Command Lockout Command Card not responding Card missing Card mismatch Software mismatch Card fail
Reference Clock: Loss of 2Mbit/s frame
Additional labels are present only on the 21x2 Mbit/s Trib. unit used as spare indicating the protected unit: Protected card 1 Protected card 2 Protected card 3
The 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary name and number are displayed at the topleft of the first screen. From the first detailed screen the user can access a further detailed screen: by either selecting the option View (see Figure 146. on page 208), or by clicking on one of the labels representing the tributary port when a small magnifying glass glyph is displayed as a cursor.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 205 / 448
The selected screen (see Figure 145. on page 207) shows the following components with the relative alarms: LPT Lower order Path termination LPA PI Mismatch of VC12 signal label Mismatch of VC12 path trace VC12 Far End Receive Failure Unavailable TU Path (TU AIS in receive side, the 2Mbit/s path is not closed) 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far) Day Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
Lower order Path Adaptation Physical Interface Loss of incoming Tributary signal Line AIS (AIS received)
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following alarms: Port selected for the reference clock Protection Switch Event (SNCP) Unequipped signal label (payload is empty) Internal Loopback Line loopback Enabled Retiming
The name of the tributary port is displayed on the left side of the second screen. To access the higher level screen, the VIEW option must be selected (see Figure 147. on page 208), hence Previous Esc; if First is selected, the Main Screen of Figure 135. on page 195 is displayed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 206 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 144. AS & C 21 x 2Mbit/s Tributary
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 145. AS & C Port 1, Tributary
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
207 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 146. AS & C View option 1
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 147. AS & C View option 2
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
208 / 448
4.6.1.4 3x34 Mbit/s Tributary Screen The 3x34 Mbit/s Tributary screen (see Figure 148. on page 210 ) displays:
CARD STATUS ISACT PBA in service and active ISACT PBA in service and standby. Commanded switch (activated in the Remote Control operation). Card missing Card mismatch Software mismatch Card not responding Card fail Manual Command Lockout Command
The alarms of each of the 3 ports of the 3x34 Mbit/s Tributary.
The following are the functional blocks and associated alarms for each port of the 3x34 Mbit/s Tributary: LPT (Lower order Path termination) Unavailable TU Path Mismatch of VC3 signal label Mismatch of VC3 path trace VC3 FERF 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far) Day Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) PI (Physical Interface) Loss of incoming Tributary signal Line AIS (AIS received)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 209 / 448
Additional labels are provided for each port on the screen to indicate the following alarms: Protection Switch event (SNCP) Internal Loopback Line Loopback Unequipped signal label
The 3x34 Mbit/s Tributary name and numbers are displayed on the screen. Additional labels are present only for the spare unit indicating the protected unit: Protected card #1 to card #4
Figure 148. AS & C 3 x 34 Mbit/s Tributary
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 210 / 448
4.6.1.5 3x45 Mbit/s Tributary Screen The 3x45 Mbit/s Tributary screen (see Figure 149. on page 212 ) displays:
CARD STATUS ISACT PBA in service and active ISACT PBA in service and standby. Commanded switch (activated in the Remote Control operation). Card missing Card mismatch Software mismatch Card not responding Card fail Manual Command Lockout Command
The alarms of each of the 3 ports of the 3x45 Mbit/s Tributary.
The following are the functional blocks and associated alarms for each port of the 3x45 Mbit/s Tributary: LPT (Lower order Path termination) Unavailable TU Path Mismatch of VC3 signal label Mismatch of VC3 path trace VC3 FERF 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far) Day Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) PI (Physical Interface) Loss of incoming Tributary signal Line AIS (AIS received)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 211 / 448
Additional labels are provided for each port on the screen to indicate the following alarms: Protection Switch event (SNCP) Internal Loopback Line Loopback Unequipped signal label
The 3x45 Mbit/s Tributary name and numbers are displayed on the screen. Additional labels are present only for the spare unit indicating the protected unit: Protected card # 1 to # 4.
Figure 149. AS & C 3 x 45 Mbit/s Tributary
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 212 / 448
4.6.1.6 DVB Tributary screen The DVB Tributary screen (see Figure 150. on page 214) displays:
CARD STATUS ISACT PBA inservice and active ISSTBY PBA inservice and standby Manual command Card missing Card mismatch Card not responding Card fail Software mismatch
The alarms of each of the 3 ports of the DVB Tributary.
The following are the functional blocks and associated alarms for each port of the DVB Tributary: LPT Lower order Path Termination LPA PI Mismatch of VC3 signal label VC13 FERF Unavailable TU path Near 15 M TCA Threshold cross alarm Far 15 M TCA Threshold cross alarm Near DAY TCA Threshold cross alarm Far DAY TCA Threshold cross alarm Mismatch of VC3 path trace J1 ( not operative in this release)
Lower order Path Adaptation Physical Interface Tributary signal loss AIS ( AIS received )
Additional labels are provided for each port on the screen to indicate the following alarms:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Enabled/Disabled Internal Loopback ( activated in remote control ; abnormal condition ) Enabled/Disabled Line Loopback ( activated in remote control ; abnormal condition ) Switched port (with reference to SNCP) VC3 unequipped signal label
The DVB tributary names are displayed on the topleft corner. No spare card are prewied
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 213 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 150. AS & C DVB tributary
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
214 / 448
4.6.1.7 34/2 5x2 Mbit/s Transmultiplexer Tributary screen Two screens are utilized to display the Transmultiplexer s Tributary unit.
The first screen (second level) is an overall view of the Tributary unit showing five 2 Mbit/s ports and the 34 Mbit/s port (see Figure 151. on page 217) and associated four 8 Mbit/s streams. The second screen (third level) is a detailed view of the functions carried out together with the relevant alarms occurring on each basic stream. Refer to Figure 152. on page 218 (for the 2 Mbit/s stream), and to Figure 153. on page 218 (for the 34 Mbit/s stream). The first screen showns the following functional blocks and relevant alarms: Five 2 Mbit/s ports each having four labels, i.e.: the label at the topright indicates if the port has been selected as a clock source the label at the bottomright shows the Protection Switch Event (SNCP) the label in the middle at the bottom shows the ORing of the Abnormal Conditions the label at the bottomleft shows the ORing of the alarms defined in each port
The 34 Mbit/s port with the four 8 Mbit/s streams each provided with three labels, i.e.: ORing of the alarms defined for each function Abnormal conditions Protection Switch Event
While for the whole unit it displays: CARD STATUS ISACT PBA inservice and active ISACT PBA inservice and standby Card missing Card mismatch Card not responding Card fail Software mismatch Manual Command Lockout Command CLOCK REFERENCE Loss of 2 Mbit/s frame
An additional label is provided for the 34 Mbit/s port indicating alarms: Loss of Tributary signal FERF: Farend Receive Failure AIS received Loss of 34 Mbit/s frame Line Loopback on 34M port
For the Spare Unit only there is a label indicating which Trib the Spare Unit is protecting.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The name of the 34/25x2M Transmux is indicated on the part at the topleft side of the first screen.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 215 / 448
Through the first screen the user can access a more detailed one: either by selecting the view option (see Figure 147. on page 208 ), or by clicking on one of the 2/8 Mbit/s Tributary port labels when the magnifying glass replaces the cursor.
The selected screens display the following functional blocks and relevant alarms (Second Screen Third level): 2 Mbit/s ports (see Figure 152. on page 218): LPC (Low order Path Connection) LPT (Low order Path Termination) Mismatch of VC12 Signal Label Mismatch of VC12 path trace FERF Unavailable TU Path. (TU AIS in receive side, the 2Mbit/s path is not closed) 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far) Day Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
LPA (Low order Path Adaptation) PI (Physical Interface) TU alarm indication signal Loss of incoming tributary signal
Additional labels are provided to indicate the following alarms: Port selected for the Reference Clock Internal loopback Protection Switch Event (SNCP) Unequipped signal label
The name of the Tributary port is shown at the topleft corner of the screen
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 216 / 448
The 34 Mbit/s port can be further exploded into 8 and 2 Mbit/s (see Figure 153. on page 218); moreover, two additional labels for each of the four 2 Mbit/s streams is shown from right to left indicating: Internal loopback Protection Switch Event Unequipped signal label
For each 2 Mbit/s stream conveying into the 8 Mbit/s stream: LPC (Low order Path Connection) LPT (Low order Path Termination) Mismatch of VC12 Signal Label Mismatch of VC12 path trace FERF Unavailable TU Path. 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far) Day Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
LPA (Low order Path Adaptation) The following labels are provided for the 8 Mbit/s stream: Loss of 8 Mbit/s frame Alarm Indication Signal received FERF
To access the higher level screens, select the VIEW option (see Figure 147. on page 208, then the PREVIOUS ESC option. By selecting option First, the initial screen of Figure 136. on page 196 is accessed again.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 151. AS & C 34/2 and 5 x 2M Tributary
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 217 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R Figure 152. AS & C 34/2 and 5 x 2M Trans. Tributary 5 x 2Mbit/s ports
Figure 153. AS & C 34/2 and 5 x 2M Trans. Tributary 34 Mbit/s ports
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
218 / 448
4.6.1.8 140 Switchable Tributary Screen The following presents the 140/STM1 Switch Tributary unit configured as 140 Mbit/s. The screen is shown in Figure 154. on page 220. The Tributary name is displayed on the left of the picture. The 140 Switchable Tributary consists of the following functional blocks and of the associated alarms and statuses: PPI (Plesiochronous Physical Interface) Receive Loss of Signal Line Alarm Indication Signal
LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) HPT (Higher order Path Termination) Unavailable AU Path Mismatch of VC4 signal label Mismatch of VC4 path trace HO path FERF 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far) Day Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
HPC/PPS (Higher order Path Connection and Path Protection Switching) Excessive BER B3 West Excessive BER B3 East
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following information: CARD STATUS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ISACT PBA in service and active ISACT PBA in service and standby. Commanded switch (activated in the Remote Control operation). Card missing Card mismatch Software mismatch Card not responding Card fail
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 219 / 448
Protection switch event (SNCP) Unequipped signal label Internal loopback Line loopback Manual command Lockout Command
For the spare unit only The low priority traffic (for 1:1 protection, not operative in this release) The protected card number (for N+1 protection)
Option 140 M/EC STM1 trib. is used to Subrack Configure the Spare unit protecting a mixed composition of trib. 140 M and Elect HVCSTM1. The option corresponds to a screen summarizing the information contained in Figure 154. on page 220 Figure 155. on page 222.
Figure 154. AS & C 140 Mbit/s Switchable Tributary
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 220 / 448
4.6.1.9 Electrical STM1 Switchable Tributary Screen The following represents the 140/STM1 Switch Tributary unit configured as STM1 (electrical).
The screen is shown in Figure 155. on page 222. The Tributary name is displayed on the left of the picture. (ELECTR HVC STM1) The STM1 Switchable Tributary consists of the following functional blocks and of the associated alarms and statuses: SPI (SDH Physical Interface) Receive Loss of Signal
RST (Regenerator Section Termination) Loss of Frame
MST (Multiplexer Section Termination) Multiplexer Section AIS Excessive BER B2 Signal Degrade FERF: Far End Receive Failure
SA (Section Adaptation) Unavailable AU Path Loss of AU4 pointer Alarm Indication Signal Received
HPT/HPOM 15 Minute TCA source Threshold cross Alarm 15 Minute TCA Synk Day TCA Source Day TCA Synk
HPC/PPS (Higher order Path Connection and Path Protection Switching) B3 Excessive BER, West B3 Excessive BER, East Detected in the signal received from Matrix. Used for PPS when Connection Card is present.
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following information: CARD STATUS ISACT PBA in service and active ISACT PBA in service and standby. Commanded switch (activated in the remote control operation). Card missing Card mismatch Software mismatch
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 221 / 448
Remote Control Forced, Manual, Lockout (Remote/Local)
Protection switch event (SNCP) Line loopback Internal loopback K1 K2 Mismatch K2 Mismatch
For the spare unit only Low priority traffic (for 1:1 protection not operative in this release) The protected card number (for N+1 protection)
Option 140 M/EC STM1 trib. is used to Subrack Configure the Spare unit protecting a mixed composition of trib. 140 M and Elect HVCSTM1. The option corresponds to a screen summarizing the information contained in Figure 154. on page 220 Figure 155.
Figure 155. AS & C STM1 Electrical Switchable Tributary
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 222 / 448
Card not responding Card fail (MSRS) LAPD fail (dialogue interrupted with Equipment Controller referred to DCC management)
4.6.1.10 Optical LVC STM1 Tributary Screen Figure 156. on page 224 shows the detailed screen of the STM1 tributary Optical unit (Long or short haul). The name of the unit involved is shown at the topleft of the screen (OPTICAL LVC STM1) Moreover the screen shows all the components with the relevant alarms: SPI (SDH Physical Interface) Laser Fail Laser Degraded Receive Loss of Signal Bad Media Depending Mismatch
RST (Regenerator Section Termination) Loss of Frame alignment
MST (Multiplexer Section Termination) Multiplexer section AIS Excessive BER (high BERB2) Signal Degrade (low BERB2) Far End Receive Failure
SA (Section Adaptation) Unavailable AU Path Loss of AU pointer RX AU path AIS
HPT/HPOM 15 Minute TCA source Threshold cross Alarm 15 Minute TCA Synk Day TCA Source Day TCA Synk
Additional labels are provides on the screen to indicate the following information: LASER STATUS Laser Shutdown (ALSactive protection for fault conditions) Forced laser on (set in Equipment Configuration) Forced laser off (set in Equipment Configuration) Laser abnormal condition (present with FORCED ON/OFF and restore attempts after ALS) NO ALS (ALS not implemented. Set in Equipment Configuration)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 223 / 448
CARD STATUS ISACT PBA in service and active ISACT PBA in service and standby Commanded switch (activated in the remote control operation) Not operative for this unit in this release. Card missing Card mismatch Software mismatch Card not responding Card fail (MSRS) LAPD fail (dialogue interrupted with Equipment Controller referred to DCC Management)
Remote Control Forced, Manual, Lockout (Remote/Local)
Protection Switch Event Line loopback Internal loopback K1 K2 Mismatch K2 Mismatch Low priority traffic (for 1:1 protection). Not operative in this release. 1:1 protections are not operative in this release.
Figure 156. AS & C Optical LVC STM1 Tributary

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 224 / 448
4.6.1.11 Optical HVC STM1 Tributary Screen (Opt. 600 Trib.) Figure 156. on page 224 shows the detailed screen of the STM1 tributary Optical unit (Long or short haul). The name of the unit involved is shown at the topleft of the screen (OPTICAL HVC STM1) Moreover the screen shows all the components with the relevant alarms: SPI (SDH Physical Interface) Laser Fail Laser Degraded Receive Loss of Signal Bad Media Depending Mismatch
MST (Multiplexer Section Termination) Multiplexer section AIS Excessive BER (high BERB2) Signal Degrade (low BERB2) Far End Receive Failure
SA (Section Adaptation) Unavailable AU Path Loss of AU pointer RX AU path AIS
HPC/PPS (High order Path Connection and Path Protection Switching) Excessive BER (high BERB3), EAST and WEST. Detected in the signal received from Matrix and used for PPS when Connection Card is present.
Additional labels are provides on the screen to indicate the following information: LASER STATUS Laser Shutdown (ALSactive protection for fault conditions) Forced laser on (set in Equipment Configuration) Forced laser off (set in Equipment Configuration) Laser abnormal condition (present with FORCED ON/OFF and restore attempts after ALS) NO ALS (ALS not implemented. Set in Equipment Configuration)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 225 / 448
CARD STATUS ISACT PBA in service and active ISACT PBA in service and standby Commanded switch (activated in the remote control operation) Not operative for this unit in this release. Card missing Card mismatch Software mismatch Card not responding Card fail (MSRS) LAPD fail (dialogue interrupted with Equipment Controller referred to DCC Management)
Remote Control Forced, Manual, Lockout (Remote/Local) Protection Switch Event Line loopback Internal loopback Low priority traffic (for 1:1 protection). Not operative in this release. 1:1 protections are not operative in this release.
Figure 157. AS & C Optical HVC STM1 Tributary
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 226 / 448
4.6.1.12 Full Matrix screen The Matrix screen ( see Figure 158. on page 229 ) consists of the following functional blocks and associated alarms and statuses: SA (Section Adaptation) HPT (Higher order Path Termination) This functional block contains the following synthesis label: Loss of Multiframe alarm; The screen displays the 40 instances of the alarm (see Figure 159. on page 229). FERF alarm. the synthesis of the 40 instances of the FERF alarm (third level screen). Unavailable AU4 path. This screen displays 16 alarm instances. It is operative only for 1661SMC and for AU4 in enhanced connectivity. Signal Label Mismatch alarm. the synthesis of the 40 instances of Signal Label Mismatch alarm (third level screen). Path Trace Mismatch alarm. Excessive BER B3 alarm. This screen displays the 40 instances of the alarm.
To display the more detailed level screen the user clicks on one of this label. The screen displays the 40 instances of the relevant alarm (see for example Figure 159. on page 229, referred to the Loss of Multiframe alarm). HPA (Higher order Path Adaptation) This functional block contains the following synthesis label: The synthesis of the Loss of TU pointer : to display the more detailed level screen the user clicks on this label. The new screen (see Figure 160. on page 229) displays 40 labels, each of these represents the synthesis of the 63 instances of the Loss of TU12 Pointer or the synthesis of the 3 istances of the Loss of TU3 Pointer (the 11 of each TUG3). To display the 63 instances screen the user clicks on one of the cited labels (see Figure 161. on page 230 ) The synthesis of the TU AIS : to display the more detailed level screen the user clicks on this label. The new screen displays 40 labels, each of these represents the synthesis of the 63 instances of the TU12 path AIS or the synthesis of the 3 istances of the TU3 path AIS (the 11 of each TUG3). To display the 63 instances screen the user clicks on one of the cited labels. The synthesis of the Unavailable TU Path of the eight Tributaries: To display the more detailed level the user clicks on this label. It will appear a screen that shows the eight tributary labels, each containing a small box that allows to reach another level screen.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 227 / 448
Each screens displays: The synthesis of the 63 instances of the unavailable TU Path alarms if the TUG 3 consists of TU12 channels. If the TUG3 consists of TUG3 channel the screen shows a synthesis of the 3 instances of the unavailable TU Path alarms (the 11 of each TUG3)
LPC (Lower order Path Connection) This functional block contains the synthesis label of the TU Protection Switching Event To display the more detailed level screen the user clicks on this label. This screen contains 8 labels, referred to the signal of the 8 tributaries (see Figure 162. on page 230). Each label represents: the synthesis of the 63 instances of the TU12 Protection Switching Event if the TUG3s consist of TU12 channels the synthesis of the 3 istances of the TU3 Protection Switch Event if the TUG3s consist of TU3 channel (the 11 of each TUG3)
To display these detailed level screens the user clicks on the cited label (see Figure 163. on page 231) Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following information: CARD STATUS ISACT PBA in service and active ISACT PBA in service and standby Commanded switch (activated in the Remote Control operation) Card missing Card mismatch Software mismatch Card not responding Card fail
One functional block ( UNEQ SL ) that represents the synthesis of the 40 instances of the Unequipped Signal Label (byte C2) indication. To display the third level screen the user clicks on the cited label. The screen displays the 40 indications instances (see Figure 164. on page 231) A functional block ( AU4 PSE ) represents the Synthesis of the 16 AU4 Protection switch event relevant to the AU4 in Enhanced connectivity and PPS protected. The Low Priority Traffic information is for the spare unit only (1:1 protection, not operative in this release)
The screen also indicates the assignment of the Matrix blocks to the units:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
E1 to E16 for the East Aggregate W1 to W16 for the West Aggregate T1 to T8 for the TRIBUTARIES
WARNING When STM4 Aggregate is used, only E1 to E4 and W1 to W4 BLOCKS ARE USED.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 228 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 158. AS & C Matrix Figure 159. AS & C Matrix, LOM of HPT
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 160. AS & C Matrix, LOP of HPA
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
229 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 161. AS & C Matrix, LOP of HPA, TUG3
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 162. AS & C Matrix, PSE of LPC
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
230 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 163. AS & C Matrix, PSE of LPC, Trib 1
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 164. AS & C Matrix, Unequipped Signal Label C2
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
231 / 448
4.6.1.13 STM4 Aggregate Screen Figure 165. on page 233 shows the detailed screen of the STM4 Aggregate East and West. The name of the card involved is shown on the left of the screen. Moreover the screen consists of the following functional blocks and associated alarms and statuses: SPI (SDH Physical Interface) Laser fail High Laser Temperature Laser degrade Receive Loss of Signal Bad Media Depending Mismatch
MST (Multiplexer Section Termination) Multiplexer section AIS Excessive BER B2 Signal Degrade B2 FERF: Far End Receive Failure
SA (Section Adaptation) Loss of AU pointer (14) Rx AU path AIS (14)
HPC (Higher order Path Connection)
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following information: LASER STATUS Laser Shutdown (ALS active protection for fault condition) Forced laser ON (set in equipment configuration) Forced laser OFF (set in equipment configuration) Laser abnormal condition (present with ON and OFF FORCED and restore attempts after ALS). NO ALS (ALS not implemented. Set in Equipment Configuration)
CARD STATUS ISACT PBA in service and active ISACT PBA in service and standby Commanded switch (activated in Remote Control operation) Card missing Card mismatch Software mismatch Card not responding Card fail (MSRS) LAPD fail dialog interrupted with Equipment Controller referred to DCC management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 232 / 448

Internal loopback Line loopback The Low Priority Traffic information is useful only for the spare unit (1:1 protection, not operative in this release). Remote Control Manual Local/Remote Forced Local/Remote Lockout Local/Remote
Figure 165. AS & C STM4 Aggregate
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 233 / 448
4.6.1.14 STM16 Aggregate Screen Figure 166. on page 236 shows the detailed screen of the STM16 Aggregate East and West. The name of the card involved is shown on the left of the screen. Moreover the screen consists of the following functional blocks and associated alarms and statuses: SPI (SDH Physical Interface) Laser fail High Laser Temperature Laser degrade Receive Loss of Signal Bad Media Depending Mismatch
MST (Multiplexer Section Termination) K1 K2 Error Multiplexer section AIS Excessive BER B2 Signal Degrade B2 FERF: Far End Receive Failure
SA (Section Adaptation) Loss of AU pointer (116) Rx AU path AIS (116)
HPC (Higher order Path Connection) Au4 Protection Switch Event, as a synthesis of 16 AU4 PSE reachable by clicking inside the label (see Figure 167. on page 236). They are used only for MS SPRING DC / IC protection where the AU4 are supplied from TRIB and in case of protection they are supplied by the Line. When this appends the relevant colour label changes from Green to Magenta.
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following information: LASER STATUS Laser Shutdown (ALS active protection for fault condition) Forced laser ON (set in equipment configuration) Forced laser OFF (set in equipment configuration) Laser abnormal condition (present with ON and OFF FORCED and restore attempts after ALS). NO ALS (ALS not implemented. Set in Equipment Configuration)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 234 / 448
SWITCH STATUS The switching status condition relevant to MS SPRING protection :
Bridge E/W Bridge. It is only active during the temporary phase of the carrying out of the protection protocol. It will light off in steady state. Bridge and Switch , active during the switch between the High Priority AU4 and Low Priority AU4 on the Node involved in the Protection, that means the Node adjacent to the Line failure.
CARD STATUS ISACT PBA in service and active Card missing Card mismatch Software mismatch Card not responding Card fail (MSRS) LAPD fail dialog interrupted with Equipment Controller referred to DCC management
Line loopback Pass Through Fail. It is active when the external coaxial connections on the AGG STM16 UNIT are not done or when the TX to RX ( and vice versa) connections are not correctly executed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 235 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 166. AS & C STM16 Aggregate
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 167. AS & C STM16 Aggregate, AU4 PSE of HPC
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
236 / 448
4.6.1.15 CRU Screen The CRU card is shown on two detail screens:
the first screen shows the CRU card in detail (see Figure 168. on page 240) the second screen shows each of the 6 External/Internal references of the detailed CRU (see Figure 169. on page 240 as External references example).
The screen shown in Figure 168. on page 240 displays the CRU A and CRU B cards. The CRU name is displayed on the left of the screen. The CRU consists of the following functional blocks and associated alarms and statuses: SELECT B (INTERNAL REFERENCE).To select the internal T0 reference. Contains six blocks each representing the 6 Internal References. The 6 Internal References are selected by the operator in the Equipment Configuration Application, following a priority list, to synchronize the equipment (T0). Each block contains the following boxes and labels: D D D D D D INT #n (where n=1..6) the top label indicates the reference number. CRU REFERENCE (top right box) highlights when the timing reference is assigned. CRU ALARMS (left box) is the ORing of the LOS and DRIFT alarm detected on the corresponding timing reference. SSM VALUE (middle box) highlights when the SSM value differs from G.811. The SSM values are reported on the second screen. CRU COMMAND (right box) highlights when the timing reference is in lockout, or force/manual selection (through the Remote Control of the AS&C Application). LOCKED MODE the label at the bottom highlights when the timing reference is locked. (This reference is used to synchronize the equipment T0).
OSCILLATOR It indicates the operative mode which differs from Locked, when no valid Internal Reference clock is available . D Holdover (oscillator locked to the last valid stored reference clock). D Freerunning (free oscillator)
SELECT A (EXTERNAL REFERENCE). To select the external T4 reference. It contains six blocks each representing six External References. The six External References are selected by the operator in the Equipment Configuration application, following a Priority List, to supply a clock towards the external equipment (T4). Each box is as that of the INTERNAL REFERENCE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 237 / 448
SQUELCH The box highlights when the outgoing External/Internal Reference is inhibited. D SQUELCH on EXT (T1 T4)
It is used to either enable/disable the transmission of the selected T1 clock towards the T4 external clock. D SQUELCH T0 T4 Might not be used. If used, it enables/disabled the transmission of the selected T0 clock towards the T4 external clock.
The activation of the squelch is based on the Synchronism Quality Thresholds determined by the operator during Equipment Configuration. SELECT C D D T0/T4 T1/T4
To select on T4 (clock supplied to the EXTERNAL source) the following must be present: D D the operative EXTERNAL CLOCK (T1) from the six available ones, or the clock that is operative on T0 (the same clock supplied internally to the equipment).
Selection is made by the operator in the Equipment Configuration application. CARD STATUS PBA inservice and active PBA inservice and Standby Forced CRU (the user has selected the forced EPS command) Card missing Card mismatch Card not responding Card fail Software mismatch
The second screen is available for each of the internal and external references to obtain the detailed information from the screen of Figure 169. on page 240. SYNCH SOURCE (one label is active when a reference is assigned) from:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2 MHz A 2 MHz B Aggregate STM 4 W1 Aggregate STM 4 W2 / STM 16 W Aggregate STM 4 E 1 Aggregate STM 4 E 2 / STM 16 E Tributary 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 238 / 448
ALARMS LOS DRIFT
SSM Value (When a reference is assigned ) : quality information received in S1 of STM1) G.811 G.812T G.812L G.81S Q Unknown Dont use Unattended (SSMB received with a code not corresponding to those listed in the Rec.)
EXTERNAL COMMANDS (forced by the operator to Remote Control of AS & C Application) Lockout (Inhibits switching) Force (switches reference clock ) Manual (switches only if permitted by the alarm condition of the reference)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 239 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 168. AS & C Clock Reference Unit
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 169. AS & C Clock Reference Unit (Synch. Reference)
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
240 / 448
4.6.1.16 PPS Forced Switch Beside the first level screen indications, other three screens are used for this function.
The second level screen ( see Figure 170. ) shows: the Forced PPS (W/E) of each Tributary Aggregates (W/E) Forced PPS with TTA connection Forced switch of AU4 in Enhanced Connectivity PPS protected. The third level screen (see Figure 171. on page 242. ) indicates the forced PPS (W/E) for the TUG3 and VC4 of the selected unit. The label VC4 puts in evidence the forced switch about Tribs carrying bulk VCs The fourth level screen (see Figure 172. on page 242 ) indicates the forced PPS for ports or TU. After a forced PPS switch the relevant green label color becomes bright red and the Abnormal alarm is lighted up.
Figure 170. AS & C PPS, units
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 241 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 171. AS & C PPS, TUG3 and VC4
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 172. AS & C PPS, ports/TU
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
242 / 448
4.6.1.17 Software Version Screen The second level screen ( see Figure 173. ) shows all the unit of the equipment in which is possible to check the actual SOFTWARE VERSION. The third level screen ( see Figure 174. ) shows the software version for the selected unit . Absent units have all 0 indication.
Figure 173. AS & C Software version, units
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 174. AS & C Software version, detail.(Data are an example)
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 243 / 448
4.6.1.18 MS SPRING status The second level screen (see Figure 175. ) shows the present NE as a Node involved in the 2 Fiber MS SPRING protection function. The MS SPRING protection is detailed in the Technical Handbook of the NE. The protection algorithm foreseen the possibility to force the protection by means the CT commands, with different priority levels, sent using the Remote Control function of the AS&C application. The indications given about the LOCAL CONDITION are: Wait time to restore phase , before deactivation of the automatic protection due to the failure.
The following are Remote Commands activated by the operator: Lockout Working Channel, West and East side. The Lockout Working Command doesnt allow the MS SPRING protection, both for alarm detected from the side involved in the command and for external command involving the same side. It permits the MS SPRING protection for switching causes detected / involving the other side of the same node or detected / involving the other nodes of the ring. Lockout Protection Channel, West and East side. The Lockout Protection Command doesnt allow the use of the protection channels whichever switching cause has required it, alarm or external command, on the span not involved in the command. It permits the MS SPRING protection only for switching cause occurring in the span involved in the command. Force Switch, West and East side Force Command always activates the protection and it has greater priority than the Manual Command when this latter has been activated by other sources. Manual Switch, West and East side. Manual Switch Command activates the protection, with lower priority than the Force Command.
The indications given about the SWITCH STATUS are: Bridge/Switch, West and East. The protection is activated and the Node is directly involved in it (failure/command in the adjacent span).
PROTOCOL EXCEPTION DETECTED ON : These labels light on (magenta) on the left for the West side, on the right for the East side, when: Improper APS Code W or E K1, K2 detected are not consistent with the APS protocol. Node ID Mismatch W or E K1, K2 sourced by not adjacent node. Default K byte W or E APS default code is detected (MS SPRING) is enabled but not activated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 244 / 448
APS INTERNAL STATUS:

APS Internal IDLE There is no need to activate the protection. APS Internal Pass Through The protection is activated in the Network but the node is not directly involved because it is not adjacent to the failed span. Low priority AU4s are put in PassThrough. The K1, K2 bytes are also put in PassThrough to allow the dialogue between the two Nodes that are adjacent to the failed span. APS Internal Request The protection is activated and the Node is directly involved in it.
RECEIVED APS REQUEST from W or E: It represent the monitoring of protection request (bridge request), contained in the K1 byte received. N.B. APS Lockout Protection Channel W/E APS Forced Switch W/E Signal Fail W/E Manual Switch W/E Reverse Request W/E APS Signal Degrade W/E APS Wait Time to Restore W/E APS no Request W/E When the MS SPRING algorithm is ENABLED and ACTIVE in a ring, NO SNCP can be configured because this would remove of MS SPRING protection. When the SNCP is configured, NO MS SPRING can be activated, because this would cause the removal of SNCP protection.
N.B.
All the labels are green in normal conditions, magenta when the indicated status is active.
Figure 175. AS & C MS SPRING status

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 245 / 448
4.6.1.19 Operating System screen The second level screen of Figure 176. shows the status for the two Operating Systems , indicating whether is active the Main or the Spare one. A label indicates if the NTP (Network Time Synchronization Protocol) server is enabled.
Figure 176. AS & C OS status
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 246 / 448
4.6.2 DROP SHELF AS&C description In the Drop Shelf main screen (see Figure 138. on page 197 ) the card and function logic representation pertaining to the Drop Shelf are presented. The shown unit are the ADM 600 I/F, the 21X2Mbit/s (this latter is the same unit used in the Line Shelf) and the STM1 E BISEPA Module. The functions represented are related to the PPS management and the SW version label that have the same meaning as in the Line Shelf. On the right side of the figure each card is represented by a numbered rectangle corresponding to the slot into which the unit and modules are inserted. The alarm representation in each label follows the same criterion seen in the Line Shelf Main screen in para 4.6 on page 192.
4.6.2.1 ADM 600 Interface screen, Drop Shelf The Figure 177. on page 248 shows the detailed screen of the ADM 600 I/F Unit. The name of the Unit involved is shown at the topleft of the screen ( ADM 600 A or B ). The screen shows all the logical components with the relevant alarms: SPI (SDH Physical Interface) Transmitter fail Receive Loss Signal
MST (Multiplexer Section Termination) Multiplexer section AIS ( MS AIS ) Excessive BER B2 FERF: Far End Receive Failure
SA (Section Adaptation) Alarm indication Signal Received ( AU4 Path AIS )
HPT (Higher order Path Termination ) Loss of multiframe
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 247 / 448
CARD STATUS ISACT PBA in service and active ISACT PBA in service and standby Software mismatch Card fail Card mismatch Card missing Card not responding Commanded Switch (Manual, Lockout)
In both main and spare Unit is put in evidence which is the STM 1 E Module that is selected to supply the Clock Reference .
Figure 177. AS & C ADM 600 Interface, Drop Shelf
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 248 / 448
4.6.2.2 STM 1 E Module The STM 1 E Module # 1 to # 3 are represented in the Drop Shelf AS&C Main screen in Figure 138. on page 197 by the relevant three labels, each of them carrying the following alarm: Card Fail or Card Missing
4.6.2.3 21 x 2Mbit/s trib. screen, Drop Shelf Two screens are utilized for the 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary unit. The first screen (second level) shows a detailed view of the Tributary card (see Figure 178. on page251). The second screen shows a detailed view (Third Level Layout) of each of the 21 ports making up the 2Mbit/s Tributary card (see Figure 179. on page251 ) The following functional blocks and relevant alarms are displayed on the first screen: 21 Tributary Ports each provided with four labels: the label at the bottomright displays the Protection Switch event (SNCP) the label at the bottomcenter displays the OR of the abnormal conditions the label at the bottomleft displays the OR of the alarms defined in the port the label at the top indicates if the port has been selected as a clock source.
CARD STATUS ISACT PBA inservice and active ISACT PBA inservice and standby. Commanded switch (activated in the Remote Control operation). Card missing Card mismatch Software mismatch Card not responding Card fail
Reference Clock: Loss of 2Mbit/s frame
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 249 / 448
Additional labels are present only on the 21x2 Mbit/s Trib. unit used as spare indicating the protected unit: Protected card 1 Protected card 2 Protected card 3
The 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary name and number are displayed at the topleft of the first screen. From the first detailed screen the user can access a further detailed screen: by either selecting the option View or by clicking on one of the labels representing the tributary port when a small magnifying glass glyph is displayed as a cursor.
The selected screen (see Figure 179. on page251 ) shows the following components with the relative alarms: LPT Lower order Path termination LPA PI Mismatch of VC12 signal label Mismatch of VC12 path trace VC12 Far End Receive Failure Unavailable TU Path (TU AIS in receive side, the 2Mbit/s path is not closed) 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far) Day Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
Lower order Path Adaptation Physical Interface Loss of incoming Tributary signal Line AIS (AIS received)
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following alarms: Retiming Unabled Protection Switch Event (SNCP) Port selected for the reference clock Internal Loopback Line loopback Unequipped signal label
The name of the tributary port is displayed on the left side of the second screen.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To access the higher level screen, the VIEW option must be selected, hence Previous Esc; if First is selected, the Main Screen is displayed.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 250 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 178. AS & C 21x2M trib, Drop Shelf
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 179. AS & C 21x2M port, Drop Shelf
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
251 / 448
4.6.2.4 DROP SHELF PPS Forced Switch Beside the first level screen indications, other three screens are used for this function. The second level screen (see Figure 180. ) shows the Forced PPS (W/E and Trib) of each units, decided with Remote Control commands. The third level screen (see Figure 181. ) indicates the forced PPS for ports or TU. After a forced PPS switch the relevant green label colour becomes bright red and the Abnormal alarm is lighted up.
Figure 180. AS&C PPS, units, Drop Shelf
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 181. AS&C PPS, ports, Drop Shelf
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 252 / 448
4.6.2.5 DROP SHELF Software version screen The second level screen ( see Figure 182. ) shows all the unit of the equipment in which is possible check the actual SOFTWARE VERSION. The third level screen ( see Figure 183. ) shows, for the selected unit, the software version. Absent unit have all 0 indication.
Figure 182. Drop Shelf Units Software version
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 183. Drop Shelf Software version, detail.(Data are an example)
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 253 / 448
4.6.3 Options of the AS&C application In the Alarm Status & Controls window the following options are present: VIEW; HISTORY; REMOTE CONTROL; UP LOAD. A small triangle is present on the same line where the cited options can be selected. General information on the application is displayed by clicking on this triangle.
4.6.3.1 VIEW this option (see Figure 184. ) permits to move among the different screen levels. This option permits to select the subscreen of a particular card. This option permits to select the Physical or Logical rapresentation or one of the functions. From the Physical or the Logical rapresentation it permits to select the subscreen of a particular card. When the option is selected in a lower level screen, the screen of higher level, or that of first level, can be accessed again. Each selection is made by clicking left mousebutton once on the desired option.
Figure 184. AS & C View option 4.6.3.2 UP LOAD This function is utilized to update the SW Version of the equipped Units, for example, after having substituted some Units with the relevant Spares.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 254 / 448
4.6.3.3 HISTORY the History option permits to display or print information from a file (see Figure 185. ). This file will always contain the last 3000 alarms/events occurred on the NE. The operator will select the data to display or print through the options of Figure 186. on page 256 : Display Time permits to select a particular set of alarms/events referred to one of the present units or a particular equipment function. If select ALL, all the alarm/events are selected. permits to select a specific alarm/event of the previously selected TITLE. permits to select the alarms/events compliant with the classification decided . if enabled (X) permits to decide a Begin / End Date and Time of the previously selected alarm / event.
Mnemonic Classification Data Filter
After having selected the desired option, a video window of 10 rows appears containing the last 10 alarms/events (corresponding to the selection characteristics introduced), see Figure 187. on page 256. This window can be scrolled to display all the selection characteristic alarms. If the printing option has been selected, all the messages relative to the introduced characteristics are directly sent to the printer. Clicking on the cross at the upper right corner of the screen we can clear it. During the display phase, the alarm window can be moved to more functional sections of the video (usually at the bottom of the video). The information of each alarm/status row is: Event date Event hour Name of the alarmed entity Alarm acronym Alarm classification Alarm start/clearing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 185. AS & C History
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 255 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 186. AS & C History choice
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 187. AS & C History display
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
256 / 448
4.6.3.4 REMOTE CONTROLS This option allows the user to transmit the required remote control.
When this option is selected, the user can choose (see Figure 188. on page 260): whether to list all the remote controls, or whether to list the remote controls of the displayed unit
The Remote controls list is accessed and the user can choose and execute the command. For example, the selections required to transmit the Restart Equipment remote control are shown in Figure 189. on page 260. Figure 192. on page 261 displays the meaning of the loopback command. Figure 190. on page 261 appears requesting confirmation. When the remote control reaches the NE, the operator receives an acknowledging message (see Figure 191. on page 261). N.B. Before changing the Main side of a protected connection we must CLEAR the FORCE SWITCH eventually activated, otherwise the CT report will remain as FORCED SWITCH even if that is no more true. The following are the lists of the remote controls enabled on each card: Equipment Controller Restart Equipment (general equipment reset) Alarm receiving attention (AC indication ON, stores the URGNURG alarm, now free or other alarm indications) Reset UAT alarms (Unavailable Time, Performance Monitoring indication in AS&C and Maintenance Memory) Reset TCA Force West / East or Clear Tributary Path Protection Switching (PPS) on single VCs Force / Manual switch West or East MS SPRING. Lockout Working/Protection channel W/E MS SPRING. Clear WTR MS SPRING. Rel Force/Manual W/E MS SPRING. Rel Lockout Working/Prot channel W/E MS SPRING.
STM4 and STM16 Aggregate units Clear switch command Commanded switch (only simplified APS) forcing into service the Spare with respect to the Main Aggregate Enable/Disable Internal (only for STM4 Aggregate Unit)/Line loopback
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 257 / 448
CRU units Commanded switch; forcing into service. Main to Spare Clear switch command Force INT/EXT Synch. #1 to #6 (Switch Main to Spare) Lockout INT/EXT Synch. #1 to #6 (Disable switch possibility) Manual INT/EXT Synch. #1 to #6 (Switch commanded only if possible) Clear INT/EXT Synch. #1 to #6
21X2 Mb/s tributaries Clear switch Command Manual switch for the spare unit: Lockout Spare Clear 2M Trib for each port: Enable/Disable Internal/Line Loopback
Matrix unit Clear Full Matrix Lockout Spare Full Matrix Manual Switch Full Matrix
STM1 tributaries Lockout Spare STM1 Tributary Manual switch STM1 Tributary Clear STM1 Tributary Enable/Disable Internal/Line loopback
140 Mb/s and Electrical STM1 Tributaries Lockout Spare 140 Tributary Manual switch 140 Tributary Clear 140 Tributary Enable/Disable Internal/Line loopback
3X34 Mb/s tributaries Lockout Spare 3x34 M Tributary Manual switch 3x34M Tributary Clear command Enable/Disable Internal/Line loopback #1 to #3
34/2 Tran Mux Lockout Spare 34/2 Tran Mux Clear 34/2 Tran Mux Manual switch Enable/Disable Line loopback 34/2 Tran Mux
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
5X2M Tributary Enable/Disable Internal loop 2M #1 4 34/2 2M Tributary
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 258 / 448
34/2 2MBit/s Tran Mux Enable/Disable Internal loop 5x2 M Trib. 3 x 45 Mbit/s Tributaries Lockout Spare 3x45 M Tributary Manual switch 3x45M Tributary Clear command Enable/Disable Internal/Line loopback #1 to #3
ADM 600 IF unit Lockout Spare ADM 600 IF Unit Manual Switch ADM 600 IF Unit Clear command ADM 600 IF Unit
VC4 and TU PPS Commands Force Switch W/E PPS VC4 Trib. Force Switch Trib PPS VC4 Trib. Clear Force PPS VC4 Trib. Force Switch W/E PPS TU Trib. Force Switch Trib PPS TU Trib. (TTA connection) Clear Force PPS TU Trib.
AU4 PPS Commands Force Switch E/W PPS AU4 Enhanced Clear Force PPS AU4 Enhanced Force Switch Trib PPS AU4 AGG W/E Clear Force PPS AU4 AGG W/E
N.B.
When forcing internal / line loopback the signal is also transmitted in the normal direction.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 259 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 188. AS & C Remote Control
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 189. AS & C Remote Control Selection
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
260 / 448
Figure 190. AS & C Remote Control, Confirmation
Figure 191. AS & C Remote Control results
TRIBUTARY Rx
AGGREGATE Tx
Line
Internal
Line
Tx
Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 192. Meaning of the loopback command
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 261 / 448
4.7 Maintenance Memory Application

4.7.1 Description The Maintenance Memory function allows to access information on the occurrence or clearing of EVENTS on the NE. The events that have occurred are stored in the Maintenance Memory by the NE. The maintenance memory is structured into blocks. Each block is associated to an entity defined inside the NE, and each entity is associated to a set of events that will be stored in the entity block. The entity can be grouped in the Group entity. The following Group Entity and associated entity are defined in the NE. Specifically: Line External alarms 1 and 2 log The maintenance memory associated to these entities contains the occurrences or clearing of the external alarms of the units equipped in the Line Shelf. The external alarms are grouped according to card slot number inside the Line equipment: 1=slots 2 to 13; 2=slots 17 to 23. Drop External alarms 1 and 2 log The maintenance memory associated to these entities contains the occurrences or clearing of the external alarms of the units equipped in the Drop Shelf. The external alarms are grouped according to card slot number inside the Shelf equipment: 1=slots 1 to 9; 2=slots 11 to 14. Line Internal alarms log The maintenance memory associated to this entity contains the occurrences or clearing of the internal alarms of the units equipped in the Line Shelf. The internal alarms are grouped according to card type. Moreover the internal alarms log comprises: Line Equipment alarms
Drop Internal alarms log The maintenance memory associated to this entity contains the occurrences or clearing of the internal alarms of the units equipped in the Drop Shelf. The internal alarms are grouped according to card type. Moreover the internal alarms log comprises: Drop Equipment alarms
Internal alarms log The maintenance memory associated to this entity contains the occurrences or clearing of the following alarms:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
housekeeping indications Equipment synthesis alarms
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 262 / 448
Line Performance Monitoring log In this block the Line Shelf stores the following type of events:
Threshold Cross and Unavailable Time (TCA Threshold to set in Equipment Configuration).
Drop Performance Monitoring log In this block the Drop Shelf stores the following type of events: Threshold Cross and Unavailable Time (TCA Threshold to set in Equipment Configuration and Terminal Points to activate in Performance Monitoring application).
Software Faults In the block associated to this entity the NE stores the following type of event: defective functions supplied by the software platform. The faults are detected by the Equipment Controller s firmware.
User Command In the block associated to this entity the NE stores the following type of event: manual commands requests issued by the user Software downloading commands and information Security operations (login, logout, change password).
Upload Log In the block associated to this entity, the NE stores the Following type of events: events during the upload of Local or Routing Table configuration. This can happen only during Equipment Controller substitution with a spare, when OS (TMN) is connected. The relevant unit setting must be executed (see Maintenance Section).
OFA log The maintenance memory associated to this entity contains the occurrences or clearing of the alarms pertaining to the external OFA connected to the NE (OFA Booster internal / external alarm ; OFA Preamplifier internal / external alarm)
APS log In the block associated to this entity, the NE stores the automatic switching.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
As for the Entity and the Group Entity also the Events are associated in Group Event. Since the association between Group Event and Group Entity is not automatic, the operator must associate them in appropriate way, otherwise the obtained information could be incoherent. Information on the proper selections are presented in next paragraphs.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 263 / 448
The Maintenance Memory application can be activated by executing the following selections: the option Application Choice from the main menu. This selection displays the list of applications available. the option Maintenance Memory from the list of applications available.
Upon selecting the Maintenance Memory option the following menu is displayed (see Figure 193. ): File Receive Clear Help
A small triangle is displayed on the same line of the above described maintenance menu. General information on the Maintenance Memory product is displayed by clicking on this triangle. The Receive, File and Clear options are detailed in the paragraphs that follow. The Help option displays the description of each Maintenance command.
Figure 193. Maintenance Memory
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 264 / 448
4.7.2 Receive Option The receive option reads the Maintenance Memory data stored inside the N.E. When the Receive command is selected the following choice is displayed ( see Figure 194. ): display It permits to select and display data save as It permits to create the files containing the displayed data
Figure 194. Maintenance Memory Receive Option
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 265 / 448
4.7.2.1 Display Upon selecting this option a new Dialogue Box is displayed (see Figure 195. on page 267). By means of the Dialog Box a selection criteria is entered on the Maintenance data to be displayed. The user can choose the Maintenance data by entering the following selections: the Group Entity; by clicking on the associated box the user selects the Group Entity from a list containing the following items: All in this case all the Group Entities are selected; Drop External Alarms 1; Drop External Alarms 2; Drop Internal Alarms; Drop PM Log Internal Alarms; Line External Alarms 1; Line External Alarms 2; Line Internal Alarms; OFA log Line PM Log Software Faults; Upload Log; User Command;
the entity; by clicking on the associated box, the user selects the Entity from a list containing the following item: All; in this case all the entities of the chosen Group Entity are selected; the entities of the chosen Group Entity. The Group Entity consisting of several entities are: D D D D Line external alarm 1, which allow to select the external alarms of slot 2 to 13 Line external alarm 2, which allow to select the external alarms of slot 17 to 23. Drop external alarm 1, which allow to select the external alarms of slot 1 to 9 Drop external alarm 2, which allow to select the external alarms of slot 11 to 14.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 266 / 448
the Group event; by clicking on the associated box the user selects the Group events from a list containing the item of Table 13. on page 272. The cited table lists the Group Entities to which they are related. Since the association between Group Event and Group Entity is not automatic, the operator must associate them in appropriate way. the Event; by clicking on the associated box, the user selects the Event from a list containing the following item: All; in this case all the events of the chosen Group Event are selected; the events of the chosen Group Event The most significant Group Events are indicated in Table 14. on page 275. the choice to display the data stored from the first to the last or grouped in entity
the Beginning date and time and the End date and time; all the events chosen between these two dates are displayed.
Figure 195. Maintenance Memory Display selection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 267 / 448
Example
After having chosen the 140M Switch Trib Int Alarms Group Event (see Figure 198. on page 269), one of the displayed events (see Figure 199. on page 270) can be selected. Figure 200. on page 270 displays the selected events received from the NE after that the user has executed the Display of Receive Command. To do this, he must click on the OK rectangle. For each selected event the application displays: Group Event name Group Entity name Entity name occurrence (Begin) > symbol on the left of the event row / clearing (End) < of the event event date event name
Figure 196. Maintenance Memory Group entity selection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 268 / 448
After having chosen the Line Ext Alarms 1 Group Entity (see Figure 196. ) one of the displayed entities (see Figure 197. on page 269) can be selected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 197. Maintenance Memory Entity selection
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 198. Maintenance Memory Group event selection
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
269 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 199. Maintenance Memory Event selection
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 200. Maintenance Memory Display
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
270 / 448
4.7.2.2 Save as Through this choice is created a file containing the Maintenance Memory data displayed. The files are created with the EVT extension ( see Figure 201. ). In order to clear the screen click the box in the upper right corner ef the window.
Figure 201. Maintenance Memory Save File
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 271 / 448
Table 13. Group Event List and relevant Group Entity
140M Switch. Trib Ext al. 140M Switch. Trib Int al. 2Mb Trib Ext alarms 2Mb Trib Int alarms 34/2 and 5 x 2M T. Ext al 34/2 and 5 x 2M T. Int al 34Mb / 45Mb Trib Ext alarms 34Mb / 45Mb Trib Int alarms ADM 600 IF Ext alarms ADM 600 IF Int alarms ALL AUX/EOW Ext alarms AUX/EOW Int alarms CRU Ext alarms CRU Int alarms Drop UAT Drop 15M TCA Drop DAY TCA Drop Equipment alarms EI. (electrical) HVC Trib. Ext al EI. (electrical) HVC Trib. Int al Fault Log MATRIX Ext alarms MATRIX Int alarms MATRIX AU4 PSE Housekeeping Ind
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Line External Line Internal External Internal Line External Line Internal Line External Line Internal Drop External Drop Internal All Line External Line Internal Line External Line Internal Drop PM Log Drop PM Log Drop PM Log Drop Internal Line External Line Internal Software fault Line External Line Internal Line External Internal (NB.1) Line PM Log Line PM Log
Line 15M TCA Line DAY TCA
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 272 / 448
GROUP EVENT
RELEVANT GROUP ENTITY
GROUP EVENT Line UAT

RELEVANT GROUP ENTITY Line PM Log Line Internal Line External Line External Line External Line External Line External Line External Drop External (not operative) Drop Internal (not operative) Line External Line Internal Line External Line Internal User command (NB.2) Line Internal Line External Line Internal Line External Drop Internal Line External Line Internal User Command (NB.3) Line Internal Internal (NB.4) Upload (NB.5) User Command (NB.6)
Line Equipment alarms MATRIX : LOP TU12 / TU3 MATRIX : Prot Switch Event MATRIX : RX TU12 / TU3 AIS MATRIX : Unavailable Path TU12/TU3 OFA Booster Ext/Int alarms OFA Preamble Ext/Int alarms OH Interface Unit Ext. alarms OH Interface Unit Int. alarms Op (optical) LVC STM1 Trib. Ext al Op (optical) LVC STM1 Trib. Int al Opt HVC Trib. Ext al Opt HVC Trib. Int al Security Serializer OFA Int alarms STM16 Agg. Ext alarms STM16 Agg. Int alarms STM16 Agg. AU4 PSE STM1E Module STM4 Agg. Ext al. STM4 Agg. Int al. SW DL Switch Unit Int alarms Synthesis alarms Upload User Log
NB.1 Housekeeping indications memory due to typical station alarms (Environment 1 to 8)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NB.2 Login, logout, change password on Administrative Application.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 273 / 448
GROUP EVENT
RELEVANT GROUP ENTITY
NB.4 Equipment synthesis indications memory, always present at the top of the screens. NB.5 Start/End/Aborted upload events, during Equipment Controller substitution with a spare, if OS(TMN) is connected. Referred only to Local and Routing Table configuration. NB.6 Commands in Remote Control operation (Restart, EPS/APS command, etc.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 274 / 448
NB.3 Messages indicating failure, ended operations ect. in software downloading operations (for Factory use.)
Table 14. Events details
Group Event Event
2Mb Trib. Int. alarms ALL Card fail Card mismatch Card missing Card not responding Software mismatch Typical unit alarm indications ( e.g. 21 x 2Mb/s Trib. unit).
Group Event Event
MATRIX: Prot Switch Event ALL Single TU/VC4 on which the path protection switching g are monitored PSE TU12 1.1.1(TU3 or TU12) ) PSE TU12 2.1.1(TU3 or U12) PSETU12 3.1.1(TU3 orTU12) PSE TU12 1.2.1 1 2 1 (TU12) PSE TU12 2.2.1 2 2 1 (TU12) . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSE TU12 3.6.3 3 6 3 (TU12) 1 7 3 (TU12) PSE TU12 1.7.3 PSE TU12 2.7.3 2 7 3 (TU12) PSE TU12 3.7.3 (TU12) Group Event Event Drop Equipment alarms ALL Conv 1 fail Conv 2 fail Fuse broken alarm Battery Control fail / missing Equipment Alarms relevant to the MAIN-SCREEN of the DROP SHELF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 275 / 448
Group Event Event
Line Equipment alarms ALL Conv 1 fail Conv 2 fail Conv 3 fail ESCT fail Battery fuse-broken Threshold Cross Unavailable time Prot Switch Event R-ECT Mode Storing of the local selection "Network/Subne work" executed in the option VIEW of the Alarm Synthesis Storing, on the NE, of the access from a remote Master NE (when, on the remote, in the option VIEW of the Alarm Synthesis is selected "Net work") OS commands Equipment Alarms relevant to the MAIN-SCREEN of the LINE SHELF
MNE Connection
OS Main Isolation OS Spare Isolation Switch Over Executed Switch Back Executed Switch Over Executed Switch Back Executed
Group Event Event
Security ALL Login OK Login Fail Logout OK Change Password OK Change Password Fail Operator access Operator access Administrative application operations Administrative application operations Administrative application operations
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 276 / 448
Group Event Event

Synthesis alarms ALL Housekeeping Ind Urgent Alarms Not Urgent Alarms Alarm Receiving Att Abnormal Conditions Access Enable Indicative Alarms Indications relevant to the SYNTHESIS which is always at the top of the screen.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 277 / 448
4.7.3 File option Upon selecting the File option ( see Figure 202. ) the following choices are displayed: Open Delete Print
Figure 202. Maintenance Memory File option Open This choice permits to access the Maintenance Memory files list and select the file required from it ( see Figure 203. ). By pressing OK the stored data of that file is displayed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 203. Maintenance Memory Open File
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 278 / 448
Delete This choice permits to delete the current files specified in the list shown in Figure 204. By pressing OK a request is made to acknowledge the operation ( see Figure 205. ).
Figure 204. Maintenance Memory Delete File
Figure 205. Maintenance Memory Acknowledge Delete Print

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This selection permits to Print the Maintenance Memory data. NOT operative.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 279 / 448
4.7.4 Clear option The Clear command cancels all the Maintenance Memory. When selecting this option the screen of Figure 206. is displayed. The global option permits to clear the whole memory. The selective options allows to clear one of the selected entities. When selecting the global option the screen of Figure 207. on page 281 is displayed. By clicking key YES clearing is executed and the screen of Figure 208. on page 281 will appear. If the selective command is selected, the screen of Figure 209. on page 281 is displayed allowing to delete a specific entity from an entity group . After having selected the memory area to delete click and select one of the entity groups and entity fields. Click on the OK key to execute the clearing.
Figure 206. Maintenance Memory Clear Option
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 280 / 448
Figure 207. Maintenance Memory Clear acknowledge
Figure 208. Maintenance Memory Clear OK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 209. Maintenance Memory Selective clear selection
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 281 / 448
4.8 G784 Performance Monitoring Application

4.8.1 Description The Performance Monitoring application (P.M.) is used to check the quality of the links on sections and Path (tributary and aggregate ). This is mainly useful to help for in service operation and routing maintenance. According to the G.826 rec., a Block is defined as a set of consecutive bits associated with a path. The number of bits within each block depends on the bit rate of the path. An Errored Block (EB) is defined as a block in which one or more bits are in error. A Severely Errored Second (SES) is defined as a one second period which contains w 30% errored blocks or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP). An SDP is a short time period lasting at least 1 ms or four contiguous blocks , whatever is large, during which the path is not usable. For example , a path would be considered unusable if a loss of signal occurs or if all the contiguous blocks are affected by high bit error ratio (BER) e.g > 102 . It is not required to verify this BER by an actual inservice or outservice measurement. Table 15. and Table 16. show the thresholds values for SES for the VC paths and for the Section types. Those values are fixed. If the number of errored blocks exceeds the thresholds given, i.e. the given BER is reached and overcomed ( w ) then the BE counter stops and the SES counter starts. Table 15. Thresholds for SES for path types
SDH Path type
Monitored byte
Thresholds for SES ( w 30 %) 2400 2400 600
BER 1.59x105 4.9x105 2.67x104
VC4 VC3 VC12
B3 B3 BIP2
Table 16. Thresholds for SES for sections types
SDH Section type
Monitored byte
Thresholds for SES ( w 30 %) 2400 38400 2400 9600 2400 2400
BER 0.96x106 1.54x105 3.85x106 1.54x105 1.54x105 1.54x105
STM16 RS STM16 MS STM4 RS STM4 MS

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2
STM1 RS STM1 MS
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 282 / 448
The Performance Monitoring (P.M.) function allows to:

enable/disable performance monitoring counters for one network element (NE) supporting the G.784 and the following: G.821 (not operative) G.826
Each NE supports Nth terminal points (TP) classified as: For the G.821 Synchronous multiplex section (SMS),
For the G.826 TTP (Trial Termination Points) Synchronous path sink (SPS), Synchronous path bidirectional (SPB) Synchronous multiplex section (SMS), Synchronous element regeneration section (SERS)
CTP (Connection Termination Points) Synchronous multiplex section adaptation (MSA) Synchronous path sink (SPS), drop side,
Each TP has also a hierarchical level: STM16 STM4 STM1 VC4 VC3 VC12
display PM information. Two cumulative test periods are suggested for each TP: 15min and 1 day. In the first case, synchronization is carried out at a 00, 15, 30 and 45 min. interval; in the second case at 12 pm. store PM information into a file print PM information
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 283 / 448
The PM function can be activated by selecting the following options: Application Choice from the main menu. This selection displays the list of applications that are available. G.784 Performance Monitoring from the list of applications that are available
After these selections a menu is displayed ( Figure 210. ) indicating the following options: File View Mode Configure Help
These selections are described in the next paragraph. A small triangle appears on the same line of the above menu, click on it to display overall user product data. ATTENTION When no Terminal Point (TP) has been enabled to the P.M. functions, the screens of the cells are black. To obtain the normal screen you should have done the Equipment and the Connection configurations as described in para. 4.5 on page 71 and enabled the terminal points T.P. as described in following . N.B. In case of upgrading from 1651SM to 1661SMC the TP Sink related to the Passthroughs will be removed from the TP selection list. It is necessary a restart of the Equipment Controller.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 210. G.784 Performance Monitoring
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 284 / 448
In order to enable the T.P. operations must be executed according to the options detailed below and in the following order:
Through option MODE choose the TPs to be enabled or not by means of the START/STOP selections. Through option MODE choose whether to display in periods of days or quarters of an hour Through the CONFIGURATION option select the thresholds of the single TPs counters. Displayed data (color or symbols) depends on these counters and thresholds. Through option VIEW choose to display only the faulty TPs or all the TPs among those that have been enabled. Through option MODE proceed to automatically or manually verify: in automatic mode the results are displayed on the screen; in manual mode the results are obtained by entering command READ. They can be deleted through command CLEAR.
If necessary, store in a file or print through option FILE. if the G.784 P.M. application is already active, when enable a new TP, created by a change in Equipment and Connection Configuration, it is previously necessary to activate it, entering the READ command
ATTENTION :
The structure of the main P.M. screen is explained in the following (see Figure 211. on page 286): The top row shows the date (on the left) and the cumulative periods expressed either in days (D0 to D31) or in quarters of an hour (99 max.). D0 stands for the current day. On the first column, at the left, are indicated the names of the 5 TPs to display. Only 5 TPs can be displayed at the same time, and to see the one above or below move the cursor up and down accordingly. The TP counters are synthesized within a fixed period in cells 27 to 66. For example, cell 66 synthesizes TP VC4 TTP sink Trib2 counter values on D7. It is called synthesis of counter values because each TP is provided with different counters which have their own value. The latter is associated to a monitor. By clicking on one of the TPs (cells on the left) the screen of Figure 212. on page 287 can be displayed (second level). The latter details the relevant counters. Click on time to display the value of the counters (Figure 213. on page 287, third level). After having displayed Figure 212. on page 287 and Figure 213. on page 287 click on and on close to return to the previous figure.
Note that each cell shows the worst synthesis of the counters involved.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 285 / 448
Cells 1 to 5 show the worstcase synthesis time (latest) of the first cell displayed on the left. Each cell refers to the relevant TP (same row).
Cells 6 to 10 show the worstcase synthesis of the least current times of the last cell displayed on the right. Each cell refers to the relevant TP (same row). Cells 11 to 18 show the worstcase synthesis of all the TPs above the 5 displayed in the same time interval (same column). Cells 19 to 26 show the worstcase synthesis of all the TPs under the 5 displayed in the same time interval (same column).
Alarm Syntesis View Bell Application_Choice..... History Help 1651 SM File

14/03/95 Above : 9 msTTPsink TRSTm12 vc4TTPsink 4 AGGE vc4TTPsink 2 AGGW
EF DF AT UG NG HI IN AC TC AE DC LC
G.784 Performance Monitoring 1651SM Manual View Mode Configure Help

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
11 1 2 3 4 5 27 35 43 51 59 19
12 28 20
13 21
14 22
15 23
16 40 24
17 25
18 34 42 50 58 66 26 6 7 8 9 10
vc4TTPsink 4 AGGW vc4TTPsink TRIB2 Under : 2
Figure 211. G784 Performance Monitoring. Screen interpretation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 286 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R Figure 212. G784 Performance Monitoring TPs synthesis
Figure 213. G784 Performance Monitoring TPs value
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
287 / 448
After having activated the Performance Monitoring screens, each screen assumes a color (or background motif if the screen is monochromatic) in relation to the measurement result.
Table 17. lists the possible results; an example of the result is shown in Figure 214. No colour or symbol can be displayed unless an operative command has been entered (Read in Manual mode or Automatic mode). Table 17. Relationship between colours (motifs) and measurement result.
Measurement results Color No measurement No error Loss of data Under the low level Between low and high level Above the high level
Square Motif
Light blue Green White Magenta Yellow Red
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 214. G784 Performance Monitoring Example of result (Quarter)
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 288 / 448
4.8.2 File option This option ( see Figure 215. ) allows the user to:
save error counters in a file print error counter values
Figure 215. G784 Performance Monitoring. File option Save This choice ( see Figure 216. ) allows to save counter values, of currently started TPs, in a file. A dialog box asks to enter a filename to save data. The files are created with the .CNT extension.
Figure 216. G784 Performance Monitoring. Save File Print

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This choice allows to print error counter values. A dialog box allows to stop printing when in progress.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 289 / 448
4.8.3 View option This option ( see Figure 217. ) allows the user to: display all selected TPs (ALL option) display only error affected selected TPs (error option).
Figure 217. G784 Performance Monitoring. View option
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 290 / 448
4.8.4 Mode option This option allows to display the following list of commands ( Figure 218. on page 292):
Auto Manual Day Quarter Start Clear Stop Read
AUTO Through this command the counter AUTOMATIC read mode is selected. Data is immediately displayed and updated on the screen every 15 minutes. The commands CLEAR and READ are not enabled.
MANUAL Through the manual mode all the commands must be activated by an operator. The READ command is manually entered to display and readout the relative counters data. The command READ will be described in the following. The values will be updated only after that the READ command has been entered again. Previously stored data is also displayed.
DAY This command allows to select the data displayed and gathered in a one day period. The date appears at the top left of the screen (as in Figure 210. on page 284 ). Data detected over a 31 (30 days plus the current one) days period max. ( in automatic mode) is displayed, when the Craft Terminal is connected; on the contrary without the CT, only two days before the current one are recorded on the Equipment Controller and displayed when the CT will be reconnected again to the NE. AUTOMATIC Column D0 displays data inherent to the current day with automatic updating every 15 days (the data is updated at 12 p.m.). Columns D1 to D31 display data accumulated, inherent to the previous 30 days plus the current one. At midnight, D0 will contain data of the new day up to the last quarter of an hour, while what present before midnight is stored in D1. This is also applicable for data in D1 to D30. MANUAL Column D0 displays data prior to 12 p.m. up to the execution of the MANUAL option through command READ. Data stored two days before is also received from the NE and displayed in columns D1 and D2.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 291 / 448
QUARTER This command allows to select data displayed and gathered over a one quarter of an hour period (as in Figure 214. on page 288). These 15mins. periods are displayed at the top of the screen. A max. of 97 quarters of an hour (24 hours = 96 quarters of an hour plus the current one) , in automatic mode, can be displayed when a CT is connected to the NE. Otherwise with the CT not connected, we will have only 16 periods of 15 mins recorded (four hours) plus the current one. AUTOMATIC The data of the last full 15 mins. is displayed (in the cell on the left associated with the first quarter of an hour). Data is updated every 15 minutes and the value of the previously stored quarter of an hour moves to the right. If it takes longer to verify, several 15mins. periods values will be present. MANUAL The first quarter of an hour on the left refers to the value present while executing the MANUAL option through command READ. The cells on the right contain the data of the previously stored 16 quarters (15mins. periods) also received from the NE With regard DAY and QUARTER, click on By clicking on to move to the first and last time periods .
you move one day or one quarter of an hour ahead. In this manner data
detected at different periods of the day (s) or quarter (s) is displayed. In the AUTOMATIC mode data is updated even if accessing the MANUAL mode. It can be interrupted by signing off the application only.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 218. G784 Performance Monitoring. Mode option
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 292 / 448
Start This command displays a dialog box with a list of currently stopped (disabled) TPs, to allow the user to select the termination points to starton (enabled). See Figure 219. Following Start execution the currently started TPs are displayed on the list (left side of the main screen). P.M. data on the TPs is obtained only if activated by the N.E. (e.g., must be equipped, connected, etc.). Stop This command displays a dialog box with a list of currently started (enabled) TPs, to allow the user to select the termination points to be stopped (disabled). The screen is similar as that of Figure 219. Following Stop execution the currently started TPs are displayed on the list (left side of the main screen). Read This command is available in manual mode only. It allows to read counters on selected TPs. The new values of the counters are displayed after executing the Read command. Clear This command allows to clear selected TP counters inside the NE (MANUAL MODE ONLY) After Clear selection the currently started TPs are displayed. The counters of the selected TPs are cleared.
Figure 219. G784 Performance Monitoring. TP selection (start, stop)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 293 / 448
4.8.5 Configure option It allows the configuration of performance data display, collected by the different kinds of foreseen TPs on the basis of programmable thresholds. The following can be selected ( Figure 220. on page 297 ): Plesio Path (not operative) Plesio Line (not operative) Wdm fec sink (not operative) G.821 (not operative : the shown windows contain not faithfully data). G.826
Selecting G.826 another window will be opened showing the possible types of monitoring (see Figure 221. on page298 ) Each NE supports Nth terminal points (TP) classified as: TTP (Trial Terminal Points)
Synchronous path sink (SPS) Synchronous path bidirectional (SPB) Synchronous multiplex section (SMS) Synchronous element regeneration section (SERS) CTP (connection termination points)
Synchronous multiplexer section adaptation (MSA)
The dialog box for each option allows the user to configure TPs by entering new criteria threshold values associated to each counter. Two threshold values are provided: LOW HIGH
Colours stated in Table 17. on page 288 concern this selection. Synch path sink This command allows to change the two counters thresholds for synchronous path sink (see Figure 223. on page 298 ). Calculation is made on BIP8 of VC4 (B3) or VC3 (B3) or BIP2 of VC12 (V5)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 294 / 448
The counters provided are:

BBE Background block error Calculation is made on BIP8 of VC4 (B3) ES Errored second SES Severely errored seconds Calculation is made on AU AIS, AU LOP, BER over the SES threshold and Signal Label mismatch only when the path is terminated C SES Not Operative UAS Unavailability seconds
Synch path bid This command allows to change the two counter s thresholds for synchronous path bidirectional. Calculation is made on the same BIP of the SPS, this time on both side of the path. The counters provided are: BBE Background Block Error Calculation is made on BIP8 of VC4 (B3) Errored Second
ES SES
Severely Errored Second Calculation is made on AU AIS, AU LOP, BER over the SES threshold and Signal Label mismatch only when the path is terminated Background Block Error on FAR END equipment Calculation is made on AU REI Errored Second on FAR END equipment
BBE FE
ES FE SES FE
Severely Errored Second on FAR END equipment Calculation is made on AU RDI and BER over the SES threshold Sum of Unavailability Second on both the direction of the path (NEAR and FAR END equipment)
UAS BIDI
Synch mux sect (for g.826) To set the thresholds of the Synch. Mux. Sect according to the G.826 recommendation, the menu G.821 > Synch. Mux. Sect must be opened. The meanings of the counters are intended according to G.826. This command allows to change the two counters thresholds for synchronous multiplex section. Calculation is made on BIP24 (STM1), 4x24 (STM4) and 16 x 24 (STM16) of byte B2 on both side of the section.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 295 / 448
The counters are provided are: ER is intended as Background Block Error Calculation is made on BIP24 (STM1) and 16 x 24 (STM16) of byte B2 of the section. ES Errored second SES Severely errored seconds Calculation is made on MS AIS and BER over the SES threshold CSESNot operative UAS Unavailability seconds BBE FE Background Block Error on FAR END equipment Calculation is made on MS REI ES FE Errored Second an FAR END equipment SES FE Severely Errored Second on FAR END equipment Calculation is made on MS RDI and BER over the SES threshold CSES PE Not Operative UAS FE Unavailability Second on FAR END equipment
Synch Elem Reg Sect This command allows to change the two counter s thresholds for Synchronous Element Regeneration Section. Calculation (first five counters) is made only on BIP8 of the STM4 and STM16 (byte B1 of the aggregates). OOFS is counted on all STM1 / STM4 / STM16. The counters provided are: BBE Background block error ES Errored second SES Severely errored seconds Calculation is made on LOS, LOF and BER over the SES threshold C SES Not Operative UAS Unavailability seconds OOFS Out Of Frame Seconds Counted on A1A2 bytes
Synch Mult Sect Adapt This command allows to change all the two counter s thresholds for Synchronous Multiplex Section Adaptation. Calculation is made on AUOH justification.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The counter provided is: PJ Pointer justification (positive and negative)
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 296 / 448
VALUES TO ASSIGNE ON THE LOW AND HIGH THRESHOLDS:

An example of correct values to assigne,for STM1 level and QUARTER period is: LOW BBE ES SES UAS PJ 58 (]109 ) 50 15 15 1000 HIGH 5790 (]107 ) 150 60 60 20000
For STM4, BBE values must be multiplexed by 4. For STM16, BBE values must be multiplexed by 16. For DAY period multiplex by 4 and by 24.
Figure 220. G.784 Performance Monitoring. Configure option
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 297 / 448
Figure 221. G784 Performance Monitoring. G826 options
Figure 222. G784 Performance Monitoring. G826 optionsSynch. Mux. Sect
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 223. G.784 Performance Monitoring. Changing error criteria, SPS.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 298 / 448
4.8.6 Termination point description The TPs for each type of unit, as regards to type and hierarchical level are described in the following tables. The type and hierarchical level indications are displayed at the top of the day and quarters of an hour indications ( see Figure 212. on page 287 ). The SPS fe and SPB TPs are enabled only in case of bidirectional path. In case of bidirectional paths : for SPB TPs only the DAY counters are enabled . A bidirectional path is declared in UAT if either one or both directions are in UAT , i.e there is only one counter for both directions. for SPS fe TPs, 15 M and DAY counters are enabled. The state of UAT is evaluated separately for ne TP and fe TP, i.e. two counters are present.
Table 18. STM16 Aggregate
TPs NAME ms TTP bid AGG E/W rs TTP sink AGG E/W vc4 TTP sink n AGG E/W NB1, NB2. au4 CTP n AGG E/W NB1, NB3 NB1: NB2:
TPs TYPE Synch mux sect (SMS) Synch elem reg sect (SERS) Synch path sect (SPS) Synch mux sect adapt (MSA)
Hierarchical level STM16 ( MSOH ) STM16 ( RSOH ) VC4 ( POH ) STM16 ( AUOH )
active only for NOT STRUCTURED signals. For passthrough connections, VC4 n is the number selected in Equip. Configuration; for other connections (drop/insert,crossconnection,drop) there are n VC4 for n signals (max 8). n is the number of the AU4 selected in the Equipment configuration application.
NB3:
Table 19. STM4 Aggregate
TPs NAME ms TTP bid AGGE/W A/B rs TTP sink AGGE/W A/B vc4 TTP sink n AGGE/W A/B NB1, NB2 au4 CTP n AGGE/W A/B NB1, NB3 NB1: NB2: NB3:
TPs TYPE Synch mux sect (SMS) Synch elem reg sect (SERS) Synch path sect (SPS) Synch mux sect adapt (MSA)
Hierarchical level STM4 ( MSOH ) STM4 ( RSOH ) VC4 ( POH ) STM4 ( AUOH )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
active only for NOT STRUCTURED signals. Not active for Spare Aggregate. there are n VC4 for n connections (max 4). n is the number of the au4 selected in the Equipment configuration application.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 299 / 448
Table 20. Optical HVC STM1 Tributary and Electrical STM1 Switch Tributary
ms TTP bid TRIB n rs TTP sink TRIB n
Synch mux sect (SMS) Synch elem reg sect (SERS)
STM1 ( MSOH ) STM1 ( RSOH ). Only OOFS is operative VC4 ( POH )
vc4 TTP sink TRIB n
NB1
Synch path sink (SPS) Insert side Synch path sink (SPS) Drop side Synch mux sect adapt (MSA)
vc4 CTP sour TRIB n
NB1
VC4 ( POH )
au4 CTP TRIB n NB1
STM1 ( AUOH )
NB1:
active only for NOT STRUCTURED signals and with configuration different from Cross Connection
Note : n is the tributary number 1 to 8.
Table 21. Optical LVC STM1 Tributary
TPs name ms TTP sink TRIB n rs TTP sink TRIB n
TPs type Synch mux sect (SMS) Synch elem reg sect (SERS)
Hierarchical level STM1 ( MSOH ) STM1 ( RSOH ). Only OOFS is operative VC4 ( POH )
vc4 TTP sink TRIB n NB1
Synch path sink (SPS) Insert side Synch mux sect adapt (MSA)
au4 CTP TRIB n NB1
STM1 ( AUOH )
NB1:
active only for NOT STRUCTURED signals and with configuration different from Cross Connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 300 / 448
TPs name
TPs type
Hierarchical level
Table 22. APS 1+1 Spare. All STM1 Tributaries (NB1)
TPs name ms TTP sink TRIB n rs TTP sink TRIB n
TPs type Synch mux sect (SMS) Synch elem reg sect (SERS)
Hierarchical level STM1 ( MSOH ) STM1 ( RSOH ). Only OOFS is operative
NB1;
for EPS spare TPs are not enabled.
Table 23. Tributary 140Mb/s
TPs name vc4 TTP bid TRIB n NB1 vc4 TTP sink fe TRIB n NB1 vc4 TTP sink ne TRIB n NB1
TPs type Synch path synch (SPB) Synch path synch (SPB) Synch path sink (SPS)
Hierarchical level VC4 ( POH ) VC4 ( POH ) VC4 ( POH )
NB1:
active when configurated as Drop or Unidirectional Cross Connection.
Table 24. Tributary 3x34 Mb/s and 3x45 Mb/s DVB
TPs name vc3 TTP bid m TRIB n NB1
TPs type Synch path bidir (SPB)
Hierarchical level VC3 ( POH ) VC3 ( POH ) VC3 (POH)
vc3 TTP sinc ne m TRIB n NB2 Synch path sink (SPS) vc3 TTP sinc fe m TRIB n Synch path sink (SPS)
Note : m is the port number ; n is the tributary number. NB1: NB2: active when configurated as Drop/Insert or Bidirectional Cross Connection active when configurated as Drop or Unidirectional Cross Connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 301 / 448
Table 25. Tributary 21x 2 Mb/s, 34/2 & 5Mb/s
vc12 TTP bid m TRIB n NB1
Synch path bidir (SPB)
VC12 ( POH ) VC12 ( POH ) VC12 (POH)
vc12 TTP sink ne m TRIB n NB2 Synch path sink (SPS) vc12 TTP sink fe m TRIB n NB2 Synch path sink (SPS)
Note : m is the port number; n is the tributary number. NB1: NB2: active when configurated as Drop/Insert or Bidirectional Cross Connection active when configurated as Drop or Unidirectional Cross Connection
Table 26. Matrix (NB1)
TPs name vc4 TTP bid n AGG E/W NB2
TPs type Synch path bidir (SPB)
Hierarchical level VC4 ( POH ) VC4 ( POH ) VC4 ( POH ) VC4 ( POH )
vc4 TTP sink ne n AGG E/W NB3 Synch path bidir (SPS) vc4 TTP sink fe n AGG E/W NB3 Synch path bidir (SPS) vc4 TTP source n AGG E/W Synch path sect (SPS) NB3 vc4 TTP bid TRIB n NB2 Synch path bidir (SPB) Synch path sink (SPS) Synch path sink (SPS) Synch mux sect adapt (MSA) Synch mux sect adapt (MSA)
VC4 ( POH ) VC4 ( POH ) VC4 ( POH ) STM4/16 ( AUOH ) STM1 ( AUOH )
vc4 TTP sink ne TRIB n NB4 vc4 TTP sink fe TRIB n NB4 au4 CTP n AGGE/W au4 CTP TRIB n
NB1: NB2: NB3: NB4:
TPs active only for STRUCTURED signals active when configurated as Drop/Insert or Bidirectional Cross Connection active when configurated as Drop active when configurated as Insert
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 302 / 448
TPs name
TPs type
Hierarchical level
4.9 Software Download Application

This application permits to update the equipment SW (ESCT and Card Controllers) from the Craft Terminal. Download is executed during regular equipment operation (inservice) and consists of the following phases: SW download SW download activation
The Software Download procedure is activated by clicking on the Software Download label in the Application choice ( see Figure 224. ). Figure 225. on page 304 shows the first screen of the software download menu; by clicking on it Figure 226. on page 304 will appear. The latter represents a window with the following alternatives: SW downloading: Configuration and execution of the Software Downloading Software: Information on the SW loaded in the NE. Activate the downloaded SW on the NE should if not already selected. Server Identification: This allows to select the equipment Craft Terminal as Server.
The chosen window and the screen selected from it are shown in the flowchart of Figure 227. on page 305. The figure shows how to reach some informative screens from different start options. This information can also be useful in the description that follows.
Figure 224. Software Download selection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 303 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 225. Software Download main screen
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 226. Software Download Menu
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
304 / 448
SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD MENU
SW DOWNLOADING
SOFTWARE
SERVER IDENTIFICATION
DOWNLOAD PROGRESS
DOWNLOAD
SW INFORMATION
SW MANAGEMENT
SW FUNCTIONALITIES
SW DOWNLOADING
SW MANAGEMENT
SW FUNCTIONALITIES
SERVER IDENTIFICATION
SW ACTIVATION
D.L. EXECUTE
ACTIVATE COMMITTED UNCOMMITTED
DOWNLOAD PROGRESS
SW INFORMATION
PROGRAM EXECUTION DESCRIPTOR FILE CHOICE OPTIONS SCREENS
Figure 227. Download flow chart

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 305 / 448
4.9.1 SW downloading Figure 228. on page 307 is obtained by clicking on the SW Download label on Figure 226. on page 304, and shows two alternatives: Download: to execute and check the DL activity Download progress: to follow the continuation of DL already running
Figure 229. on page 307 will appear by clicking on the Download label indicated in Figure 228. on page 307, and show the following fields: NE identification Download attributes SW package selection NE type
The identification field name and type are automatically received by the NE from the equipment. By clicking next to the relative label on the Download Attribute field, the following commands must be inserted: Code present: it must be always set. Implicit activation: if set, the NE will automatically activate the new SW after successful download. If not set, the NE will store the new SW (uncommitted) without activating it (the equipment works with the previous SW). The activation of the new SW can be made in a second time, (Software and SW Management option) as described further on. Forced Download: it causes current equipment SW download on all the units including the units that have been previously updated. If not activated, only the units of a previous release will be downloaded.
The NE type field displays (default) the name of the equipment with its Release number (e.g.: 1651SM 25) . This one must be replaced with the 1651SM indication. The following field will appear: SW package selection indicating all equipment SW packages available, i.e., those that have been installed on the Craft Terminal. N.B. To prevent possible errors all DOWNLOAD and ACTIVATION operations of new SW version, must be performed when the MAIN card of all EPS and all the MAIN side of SNCP configurations are ACTIVES. The Backward Download or Backward Activation of SW versions, must be done only with UNIT congruent with those SW Versions, otherwise the Equipment and Connection Configurations will be erased and therefor they have to be sent again.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 306 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 228. SW Downloading choice
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 229. SW Downloading
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
307 / 448
The number and percentage of files loaded are indicated along with the download operation in progress. A message will indicate that download is terminated. To interrupt the dowloading procedure select Abort. Confirmation screens will be presented to the operator. By selecting the Close key, Figure 225. on page 304 will be displayed again. The Download Progress screen can also be accessed by clicking on the Download Progress option (Figure 228. on page 307) if download is running. The operator can access to the SW Package Information (see para. Software information on page 309) and the Server Identification functions (see para. Server Identification on page 315 ) as specified in Figure 229. on page 307 The SW Package Information can also be accessed from Download progress (Figure 230. on page 308).
Figure 230. Download in Progress
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 308 / 448
By clicking on the requested software package, the Download command will be available at the bottom left of the screen. Press the Download button to delete the confirmation window, and display the Download Progress window ( see Figure 230. ).
4.9.1.1 Software information Figure 231. can be accessed through different screens. The following fields are displayed:
NE identification Committed/Uncommitted SW Package Detailed SW information
The NE identification field states the NEs name and type received from the equipment. The Committed SW Package and Uncommitted SW Package fields are the two memory banks. One bank contains the active equipment software while the other may contain eventual previous SW version. (e.g. enabled but not active). The SW status is specified by the following parameters: Enabled: a cross (X) indicates that the SW package has been loaded and can be activated Active: a cross (X) indicates that the SW package is active and that the equipment is operating with the software indicated Under download indicates that the relevant SW package is being downloaded (transitory status).
The Detailed SW information field gives the following information: Committed package, if selected, permits to display the Descriptor File of the active equipment memory bank. Uncommitted package if selected,permits to display the Descriptor File of the memory bank available for another SW version.
The lower side of the Detailed SW Information field can be displayed by entering the Descriptor File key ( see para. Descriptor file on page 310 ). By selecting the Cancel key the initial screens are represented ( Figure 231. )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 231. SW Information
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 309 / 448
4.9.1.2 Descriptor file This function is used to obtain information on the SW package that has been loaded on the Network Element and the SW units contained in Figure 232. shows both the Committed and Uncommitted software packages. Table 27. explains the meaning of symbols and acronyms.
Figure 232. Description File Table 27. Descriptor file
DESCRIPTOR FILE SW PACKAGE : 1651 SM REL.2.4.8 Software package name Software package release version: V.2.4.8 Alcatel Identifier: ALCATEL ID Network equipment type: 1651 SM Software unit decimal number: 1 > 208 The following definition list is given for each SW unit: BSUD # : ASCII string where # may mean 1 > 208 Software unit name: AUX C01 EXE (ex.) Software unit release version: V.2.8.1 (ex.) Alcatel Identifier: ALCA AUX (ex.) Software unit type: S (specific format value) Binary format name: IEFE 695 (Std) File length: 66656 (ex.) List of type of compatible cards: * character Processor unit identifier: PU AUX (ex.) ESUD# string: ASCII string where # may mean 1 > 208
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 310 / 448
4.9.2 Software Figure 233. indicates the chosen window related to this function:
SW Information (Figure 231. on page 309 is displayed) SW Management (see para. SW Management on page 312 ) SW functionalities (see para SW functionalities on page 314 )
Figure 233. Software men
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 311 / 448
4.9.2.1 SW Management This function is accessed by the SW management option of the Software download menu (Figure 233. on page 311). It is used to activate the software packages (loaded on the NE) through the window of Figure 234. on page 313 showing the following fields: NE identification (NE name and type received from the equipment), . Committed SW package along with its status (Enabled, Active, Under down load). Indicates the SW contained in the main memory bank. Uncommitted SW package along with their status (Enabled, Active, Under download). Indicates the SW contained in the main memory bank. In this case it cannot be active. The SW contained can be: A new downloaded SW, but without implicit activation. The previous SW after a new Software Download.
In the ACTIONS field only the ACTIVATE command can be accessed. This command permits to display the screen of Figure 235. on page 313.
The Commit and Revert Back commands are not enabled; command CANCELL permits to return to the selection labels on the main menu (Figure 225. on page 304). By clicking on the SW package information label at the bottom of this screen SW information (para. Software information on page 309) is also displayed on it. The SW package indicated in the SW Package selection field (which may be Committed or Uncommitted package) is activated through the window shown in Figure 235. on page 313. On the Uncommitted Package bank is stored a spare SW. With this screen is possible to activate it. In this case the previously Committed (enabled) becomes Uncommitted. passing on the spare bank. It will be possible activate it again (always by means the SW activation screen) without repeat the complete SW Download Procedure. The Activation Attribute field is not enabled. Click on the Cancell key to display Figure 234. on page 313 again. Click on Activate an intermediate screen appears informing that the connection between NE and OS is likely to be interrupted. By clicking on the OK key a further message is displayed indicating Activation in progress i.e., the message indicates that activation has been successfully completed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 312 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 234. SW Management
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 235. SW Activation
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
313 / 448
4.9.2.2 SW functionalities The SW functions that can be used in the current SW DL version are those distinguished by a cross (X) in the list of Figure 236. , i.e.: Forced download: selection of complete download or just units to update SW package descriptor: list of the SW package contents supplied to the operator Code present: always to be selected Implicit activation: automatic activation at the end of download or new SW storing only, to activate in future operations (SW Management). 2 memory banks: management of both memory banks
Figure 236. SW functionalities
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 314 / 448
4.9.2.3 Server Identification This function is used to select the type of NE Server (see Figure 237. )
The operator must always select: ECT. The Network address field can be selected if Server on OS for QB3* NEs or Server on OS for TCP/IP NEs is implemented in the local management.
Figure 237. Server identification
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 315 / 448
4.10 Remote Inventory Application

This paragraph is mainly subdivided in two parts: the first part sequencely lists the operating procedure to access to the Remote Inventory application data (see para. 4.10.1 on page 316 ) the second part presents the detailed description of the Craft Terminal windows available in this application (see para. 4.10.2 on page 317 )
4.10.1 Remote Inventory operating sequences This procedure describes how to access to the Remote Inventory application data. This application is entered after the following operations: Startup the craft terminal management software activating the NECTAS icon of the ALCATEL group in Program Manager of WINDOW (for detail see para. 4 on page 361) Access the craft terminal with the displayed login window (for detail see chapter 4.2 on page 50) From the OPTIONS bar, in the Alarm Synthesis window which appears, after selection of the required equipment, click on Application_Choice and then on Remote Inventory application.
To access the inventory data proceed as follows: 1) 2) 3) In the Remote Inventory window select the RECEIVE option and click the left mousebutton. The Receive menu will appear. Select the DISPLAY option and click the left mousebutton. The DISPLAY SELECTION window will appear. At this point the operator can select the access to the required data as indicated at para. 4.10.2.1 on page 319.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 316 / 448
4.10.2 Remote Inventory detailed description Through this application it is displayed the data inserted in the units Remote Inventory. In the Remote Inventory are stored information of identification, construction data ect. Data is displayed in specific fields: Company It indicates the Companys (Alcatels branch) which design the unit. Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviations meaning (four characters). Unit Type It indicates the units acronym Unit Part Number It indicates Alcatel or Factory products Part No.. The number indicated is that printed on the labels or on the units front coverplates. Serial Number It indicates the products serial number as specified by the NR 130 Norm. Software Part Number It indicates the id. of the units resident software CLEI Code It indicates the CLEI (Common Language Equipment Identification) code according to Bellecore specs. TRISD325 Manufacturing plant It indicates the Companys manufacturing plant id. within the company, producing the unit. Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviations meaning (four characters). Date identifier It indicates the meaning of the date that follow. It is a twodigit code supplying the following information: 00 01 02 03 04 date of construction at the time of final testing production order data construction date of the unit lot date product has been forwarded to customer customer order date
Date (YYMMDD) The identification of the date depends on the indications stated in the previous field. When only the year is displayed, the format must be YY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 317 / 448
The Remote Inventory Application can be activated by selecting: the option Application choice from the main menu. This selection displays the list of the application available. the option Remote Inventory from the list of the application available
When selecting the Remote Inventory option the following menu is displayed (see Figure 238. ): file receive help
A small triangle ( ) is displayed on the same line of the Remote Inventory menu and , if clicked, general information is displayed on the Remote Inventory product. The Receive and File options are detailed in the paragraphs that follow. The Help option details each Remote Inventory command.
Figure 238. Remote inventory

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 318 / 448
4.10.2.1 Receive Option The Receive option reads the Remote Inventory data stored in the unit. When the Receive command is selected the following choice is displayed (see Figure 239. ) display to select and display data save as to create the files containing the displayed data
Figure 239. Remote inventory Receive option
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 319 / 448
4.10.2.1.1 Display When selecting this option, a new Dialogue box is displayed (see Figure 240. ). Use is made of the dialogue box to enter a selection criteria on the remote inventory data to be displayed. The user can choose the Remote Inventory data by entering the following selection: First block Last block To display a range of units remote inventory, first select them through the above fields in which the single unit #, is named block #. Each unit has its own id. number representing the slot assigned to it inside the mechanical structure of the LINE SHELF (from 0 up to 25) for the DROP SHELF (from 26 up to 47). Note that the slot number starts with 0 while in the AS&C application the slot number starts with 1. If the same number is entered in both blocks, only one unit will be selected. By entering different numbers an operative field will be selected comprising several units. The default values: 0 and 47 select all the unit. Selection by Number or by Name The operator can select the unit inventory or by block # or by unit name (i.e. TRIB. 1 relative to the block # 1, DS ADM600 A relative to the block # 33 ). Further Selection Within the first blocklast block it is possible, through the remaining fields (see definition stated in previous chpt.), to display only the unit (s) whose data are specified in the fields by the operator (data must be already known). This operation is useful if an operating field comprising several units has already been selected.
Figure 240. Remote inventory Display selection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 320 / 448
Once the selection has been completed, if press key Cancel return to the previous screen (see Figure 239. on page 319 ) thereby cancelling all the selection made. Press key OK to display the screen of Figure 241. This screen reports the data stored on the Remote Inventory of the selected units. The first part of this screen (Display Filtering) concerns the selections made, the rest, besides the block number id. of each unit, reports the following data: ELEMENT IDENTIFICATION Company Unit type Unit Part Number Software Part Number CLEI code
MANUFACTURING INFORMATION Manufacturing plant Serial number Date
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 241. Remote inventory Display
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 321 / 448
4.10.2.1.2 Save as Files are created through the application with the .rur extension (see Figure 242. ) They contain the Remote Inventory data displayed.
Figure 242. Remote inventory Save file 4.10.2.2 File Option When selecting the file option (see Figure 243. ) the following choices are displayed: open delete print
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 243. Remote inventory File option
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 322 / 448
Open This choice provides access to the Remote Inventory list and allows to select the file required from it (see Figure 244. ) Press OK to display the stored data of the selected file.
Figure 244. Remote InventoryOpen File Delete This choice allows to delete the current file specified on the list shown in Figure 245. Press OK to request operation acknowledgement (see Figure 246. )
Figure 245. Remote InventoryDelete File
Figure 246. Remote InventoryDelete Acknowledge

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Print This Option is not available
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 323 / 448
4.11 Mediation Function applications

The Mediation Function is present when it is necessary to manage nonSDH equipment by means of Q2 interface. In this paragraph are described both the operating procedure and the detailed description. To activate the mediation function it is necessary to compile the MF configuration table of the Local configuration application as described in para. 4.11.2 on page 327. The network with Q2 Mediation Function must be created following the description at para 4.12 on page 332. Startup the craft terminal management software activating the NECTAS icon of the ALCATEL group in Program Manager of WINDOW (for detail see para. 4 on page 361) Double click on the second line appearing on the screen an representing the mediation function : it is possible to access the applications with the login of Figure 247. on page 324, indicating the need for the operator identifier and password. Then the Application Choice list of Figure 249. on page 325 appears. The available applications for the Q2 interface of the SDH equipment, described in the next paragraphs are those reported in Figure 249. on page 325. For each nonSDH equipment it is available a proper string in the Alarm Synthesis window. Clicking on the equipment name on the string it is possible to access to the relevant Applications. For the Applications description refer to the relevant handbook.
Figure 247. Operator identifier and password
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 324 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 248. Mediation Function selection
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 249. Alarm synthesis Application choice for Mediation Function
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
325 / 448
4.11.1 Mediation Function: alarms, status and control application The Figure 250. represent the alarms, status and control application screen The screen shows the status of the two Operative Systems (if any) , indicating which one ( the OS Main or the OS Spare ) is managing the Mediation Function of the NE. At the top of the AS&C screen a label string indicates general alarms information referred to the Mediation Function of the NE. Only the AE and the OS isolation alarms are active .The OS severity is fixed to NG, therefore the AT, UG and IND alarms are meaningless. The alarm meaning is indicated in Table 9. on page 193.
Figure 250. Mediation Function: alarms, status and control application
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 326 / 448
4.11.2 Mediation Function: local configuration application This application is used to configure the data necessary to manage the NE with Q2 interface.
The Figure 251. shows the list of the local configuration table. OS configuration table Local Q2 interface definition Slave NE address configuration table
Each of the above table will be detailed in the paragraphs that follows.
Figure 251. Mediation Function: local configuration application list
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 327 / 448
4.11.2.1 OS configuration table The screen of Figure 252. is dedicated to the MAIN and SPARE OS Local Address. The OS configuration of the mediation function is independent from the one of the transport equipment, so the addresses of the two OS of the Mediation Function can be different from those of the transport part. Up to 4 OS in total can be present. The OS NSAP address is composed by: Area address System ID
At the bottom of the screen the table defines the switch condition between Main and Spare OS: enable / disable the Automatic Switch Over enable / disable Automatic Switch Back
The switch over option set at Yes enables the spare OS connection when the main OS is no more active. If the main OS returns to the active status and the switch back parameter is set to Yes , the dialogue switch to the main OS. The switch over parameter to no, prevents the spare OS connection in case of OS main connection failure. The switch back option set to no prevents the switch between spare and main OS from being revertive. It is suggested to insert a different Area Address for the OS if the GOSIP V2 format is used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 252. Mediation Function: OS configuration table
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 328 / 448
4.11.2.2 Local Q2 interface definition The screen of Figure 253. permits to set the following data for the Mediation Function interface:
Line Speed: select the value from the list on the right. For Q2 synchronous intermediate system the the line speed is fixed at 19200 bit/s . For RQ2 asynchronous intermediate system the line speed is selectable Intermediate System: select between Q2 (synchronous ) or RQ2 ( asynchronous ) protocols depending on the type of connected Q2 NE.
Figure 253. Mediation Function: Local Q2 interface definition
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 329 / 448
4.11.2.3 Slave NE address configuration table The nonSDH equipment with Q2 interface of the network are selected with the screen of Figure 254.
Figure 254. Mediation Function: NE selection The total capacity of a single NE ( i.e. maximum number of Q2 elements that a Q2 interface can manage) is : physical load : max 32 physical addresses logical load : max 128 logical addresses ( 7.1 )
So , to a physical address , can correspond more than one logical address. depending on the type of Q2 NE. Restriction : the memory required to store the alarm retrieved from each Q2 NE is 25 kbyte in total. Therefore , due to the different weight of the various type of Q2 NE, the max number of Q2 NE managed can be less than 128. For each nonSDH equipment it is available a proper string in the Alarm Synthesis window. Clicking on the equipment name on the string it is possible to access to the relevant Applications. N.B. To be able to open a remote session on a Q2 NE , the Craft Terminal SWP of the Q2 NE must be installed on the same directory in which NECTAS has been installed.
The table of Figure 255. allows the user to configure the slave NE. The table contains 32 entries, each of them describing one slave NE. For each entry the user can configure the following information: 7.1 Address. The same value of the Secondary Address of the Network configuration (para. 4.12 on page 332) must be inserted. NE enable. Address Q2( physical address ). It is the physical address of the Q2 link (values from 1 to 254) A max of 32 different Q2 addresses can be had Mode. Select between Standard or Enhanced protocol.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The sum of the non SDH equipment handled by an ADM (Q2/RQ2 NE connected to the ADM plus Q2/RQ2) can not exceed 128. ( see Restriction above )
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 330 / 448
Figure 255. Mediation Function: Slave NE address configuration table
4.11.3 Mediation Function: administrative application The Administrative application is used for the station operators management. It is the same application described at para. 4.4 on page 63 for the NE. The contents of the Administrative application is shared between the Mediation Function and the NE so that changes operated in this point modify also the content of the application at para 4.4.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 331 / 448
4.12 Network Configuration For Remote Craft Terminal and Q2 Mediation Function
This procedure is suitable to create a new network representation if dealing with a Remote Craft Terminal. The existing networks, if any , created by the operator using previous 1641SM and NECTAS software release , are compatible with the current equipment and NECTAS releases. To graphically activate an existing Network : NECTAS must be correctly loaded ( see para. 3.2 on page 355. ) specify the name of the existing local network as NECTAS parameter ( see 4.12.4 on page 343)
4.12.1 Configuration Procedure for Adm Networks Handled By Remote Craft Terminal By means of the RECT/REACT software packages it is possible to handle an ADM network of 32 NEs including the one considered as master, i.e. the one on which the RECT sw is mounted. The other NEs must support the RECT sw but it is not necessary to install this package on them if the NE is not configured as master: it is enough the ECT or EACT sw package . The following procedure permits to : create a graphical representation of the network involved configure each NE through the Local Configuration application
Before creating the network representation: close NECTAS and NETWORK CONFIGURATION tools if opened. in the WIN. ini file section PEX , verify the presence of the string NETCFG_RECT=YES
This string should be present if NECTAS 3.77 has been properly installed , i.e if the RECT function has been enabled when installing the management software. It is mandatory to install NECTAS rel. 3.77 with the 1651SM rel. 2.5 If the string present is NETCFG_RECT=NO , modify it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 332 / 448
4.12.2 How to create the network One of the following procedures must be performed in order to enable RECT function activation:
creation of a graphical network ( background map with equipment located and labels Figure 256. ) Creation of a network with NEs names defined but without graphical support (Figure 257. on page 334 ) Remote craft terminal activation without a graphical support and without equipments label (Figure 258. on page 334 )
The following figures are examples of the three ways of working .
Figure 256. Graphical network ( background map with equipment located and labels )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 333 / 448
Figure 257. Network with NEs names defined (first column)
Figure 258. Remote craft terminal activation without a graphical support and equipments label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In the first column of Figure 258. the NEs are recalled with their ME address and Secondary address.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 334 / 448
4.12.3 Basic concepts about mediation function Before starting the network creation , it is necessary to point out some subjects.
Each NE implementing the mediation function is considered by NECTAS and by the OS as splitted in two parts : a so called Transport that represents the physical equipment .This is the only part of the NE present when there is no mediation function. a so called Mediation that represents the equipment part performing the mediation function
The two equipment have the same physical address (i.e. NSAP address) but a different logical address (ie. 7.1 address). For practical reasons, it should be better to assign to the Mediation equipment the 7.1 address immediately following the one assigned to the Transport equipment in increasing numeric order. That is because opening the NECTAS tool and choosing the alphanumerical view, adjacent addresses are represented in adjacent lines and so it is easier to distinguish an equipment with both its transport and mediation parts. The non SDH Alcatel equipment (Q2 devices) eventually interfacing the NE must be declared while creating the network.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 335 / 448
4.12.3.1 Creation of a graphical representation Before creating the graphical representations , close NECTAS and NETWORK CONFIGURATION tools if opened. Two graphical representations are to be created : LOCAL GLOBAL
4.12.3.1.1 Local Network creation for Mediation NE The local network is the one that comprises the NE the operator is physically connected to , divided into transport and mediation and all the non SDH equipment interfacing the mediation part. In order to configure the local network perform the following steps : 1) with a drawing tool ( for ex. Paintbrush) create a representation of a map or open an existing one ( for ex. a geographical map ) select (use scissor for selecting in Paintbrush tool) and copy (Edit > Copy menu) it Be careful that , if using Paintbrush , the Option > Omit picture format must be disabled because if selected it prevents the map from being exported on the Network Configuration tool. save the map if changed and minimize the drawing tool open the Network Configurator tool . A popup (see Figure 259. ) appears asking if the user intend to use a network with several Mediation Device (ME) . It refers to the possibility of defining a ME number and a Secondary address for the equipment to be located. Answer Yes to the question. Select the Network > Create option (see Figure 260. on page 337). The same popup appears : answer again Yes and give a name to the network ( see Figure 261. on page 337)
2)
3) 4)
Figure 259. Popup

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 336 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R Figure 260. Network Configuration Network creation
Figure 261. Network Configuration Network name
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
337 / 448
5)
select the Map > Paste option to place the previous copied map (see Figure 262. )
Figure 262. Network Configuration map open
6)
save the map and leave the GENERAL name as specified by default (mandatory for the first map, see Figure 263. )
Figure 263. Network Configuration Save map GENERAL

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 338 / 448
7)
The three steps 8 ), 9 ) and 10 ) must be performed in case of NE with active mediation function (i.e. with Q2 NEs connected). If no mediation function is active , perform step 8 ) and then skip to step 12 ). open the Equipment > Create menu and fill it ( see Figure 264. ) for the transport equipment. Note that the secondary address and the ME address must be 0 (mandatory) while the ME address must be the 7.1 address of the equipment. The title will appear near the alarm synthesis row of the NECTAS application. In Reference insert a generic label ( e.x. ADMTX for transport part or ADMMF for mediation part.) . Click on the create push button to complete the operation. If the local NE does not perform mediation function, i.e if no Q2 equipment are connected to it, it is enough to declare the equipment as a whole with Secondary address 0 and ME number equal to the 7.1 equipment address.
8)
Figure 264. Network Configuration Network equipment creation Transport
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 339 / 448
9)
Open the Equipment > Create menu and fill it for the Mediation equipment ( see Figure 265. ) . The Secondary addres must be 0 (mandatory) , while the ME address must be the 7.1 mediation equipment logical address .Click on the create push button to complete the operation.
Figure 265. Network Configuration Network equipment creation Mediation 10 ) Define the non SDH equipment interfacing the mediation part. For each Equipment to be declared: Open the Equipment > Create menu again and fill it. (see Figure 266. ) .The ME number must be the one given to the Mediation part while the secondary address is the 7.1 address (logical address) of the non SDH equipment ( from 1 to 254)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 266. Network Configuration Network equipment creation Q2 devices
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 340 / 448
11 ) Repeat steps 8 ) , 9 ), 10 ) for each NE to be configured . This is intended for NEs with mediation function and Q2 NE managed. If a NE does not have the Mediation function, only step 8 ) has to be performed.
12 ) For each equipment to be located : move the cursor in the point where to locate the equipment , click on the left mouse key and select the Locate Equipment option ( see Figure 267. ). Select the localize option (Figure 268. ) A label with the NE name and NE status appears (Figure 269. on page 342) . To delete the label , in case of need, click on the left mouse key and perform the DELETE option.
Figure 267. Network Configuration Locate Equipment
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 268. Network Configuration Equipment Location
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 341 / 448
Figure 269. Network Configuration Label 13 ) Close the Network Configuration tool : the network is automatically saved (see Figure 270. )
Figure 270. Network configuration save and close

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
If the local NE does not perform mediation function, i.e if no Q2 equipment are connected to it, it is enough to declare the equipment as a whole with Secondary address 0 and ME number 0.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 342 / 448
4.12.3.1.2 Global network creation 1)

In order to create a global Network (the one that can be seen when the RECT is active) follows the steps from 1 ) to 13 ) described in para. 4.12.3.1.1 on page 336. Note that a new network with a new name has to be created. The following equipment must be located by the operator as previously described : the local equipment (transport , mediation) and its non SDH equipment defined in the LOCAL network except that the transport equipment must have Secondary address 0 and ME number equal to the 7.1 NE address instead of 0 as in the LOCAL network. all the equipment building the network and the related non SDH equipment connected. For each equipment with non SDH equipment connected , the transport , the mediation and all the Q2 devices are to be declared.
2)
Add the following string in the PEX Section of the Win.ini file: NETWORK_RF = <name_of_global__network>
4.12.4 NECTAS activation Only in case of graphical representation of the network : Select the NECTAS icon of the ALCATEL group and choose the File > Property option from the Program Manager and add to the command line the name of the local network (see Figure 271. on page 343).
Figure 271. Nectas activation on local network
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 343 / 448
4.12.4.1 Definition of the NEs names without graphical representation of the network The operator may not be interested on a graphical representation of the network with a background map and located equipment but may be interested on giving to the NEs a title to be shown in the synthesis line. In order to do that open the NETWORK CONFIGURATION tool, define a network and create the Equipment as described in points 1 ), 4 ) , 8 ), 9 ),10 ) at para. 4.12.3.1.1 on page 4.12.3.1.1336.for the the local network. Perform the same steps for the global network creation . The equipment to be declared are those specified at para.4.12.3.1.2 point 1 ) . Add the following string in the PEX Section of the Win.ini file: NETWORK_RF = <name_of_global__network>
4.12.4.2 Remote craft terminal option without a graphical support and without equipments label The operator may be interested on having neither a graphical representation of the network nor name labels for the Equipment. In this case it is enough to : open the Network configurator tool assign a name to a fictitious network close the Network configurator Add the following string in the PEX Section of the Win.ini file: NETWORK_RF = <name_of_global__network> This is the shortest procedure to enable RECT function . N.B. To make effective the operations made on para. 4.12.3.1 and on para. 4.12.4.2 it is necessary to close the Nectas session eventually open and start again.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 344 / 448
4.12.5 Configuration of the Network Elements When a network is configured for the first time, it is necessary to connect the CT to each NE of the network, open the NECTAS tool and perform : a LOCAL configuration (LOCAL choice of the Local configuration application) a LAPD or ETHERNET configuration as specified at para. 4.5.5 on page 178. a MF configuration ( if the Equipment performs mediation functions) a RECT configuration ( If the Equipment acts as MASTER) .
The MF and RECT configurations can be performed locally or by the OS. The LAPD and the LOCAL configuration must be performed locally for the first time . By means of the Local Configuration application each NE of the network is configured. The 7.1 address must be the same that has been used in the graphical representation ( if present) . By means of LAPD (or ETHERNET ) configuration configure the connection among the NEs that will be used for data exchange. For each equipment acting as Mediation device, the mediation configuration (MF configuration) has to be performed in order to activate the Mediation function. The 7.1 address must be compliant with the one defined while building up the graphical network. Suggestion given at para. 4.12.3 on page 335 is strongly recommanded. When the MF has been enabled, a second line appears on the NECTAS main screen if working in alphanumeric way ( or a second label if working in graphical way) representing the Mediation part. By clicking twice on the new line, perform a zoom session on the Mediation part and digit the login and password. Perform a local configuration on the MEDIATION FUNCTION menu by selecting : a local Q2 interface definition a slave NE address
The local Q2 interface configuration table is used to define the Q2 type and speed. The slave NE table is used to define the linked Q2 elements. The slave NE number must be compliant to the Secondary address defined while building the network and is the logical address ( 7.1) of the non SDH device. The Q2 address is the non SDH device physical address. Both addresses can range from 1 to 254. Refer to para 4.5 on page 71 and para. 4.11 on page 324 for details on local configurations and on MF application. In the RECT configuration the operator has to declare all the accessible remote NE in order to collect the synthesis information and to perform a zoom from RECT. For each remote NE insert the NSAP and the 7.1 address . Move with the next button to complete addressing.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 345 / 448
After having completed the configurations , to activate the remote function select the View > Network menu of the Nectas application. To deactivate use the View > Subnetwork Equipment option. The graphical representation appears ( if present ) by default when NECTAS is activated. Use the view menu to switch to the alpha mode. This last is the default one if the operator has not a graphical description. Double click on the name of a remote NE (both in alpha and graphical mode) to directly open a zoom session on the chosen equipment (either ADM or non SDH). The alpha mode may also be used if a graphical representation of the network is present. In this case the NEs labels appears near the alarm synthesis row . Switching between the two modes is enabled by means of the View option. The local ECT operator is not aware of the fact that some RECT operator is connected to the NE and cannot inhibit the access from remote. The RECT function does not support the software download of the remote elements.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 346 / 448
If the remote equipment performs mediation functions, two RECT configuration entries has to be compiled : one for the Transport part and one for the Mediation part. In this case the 7.1 address of the two parts must be different and given accordingly to the values stated both in the local configuration of the remote NE and while building up the graphical network. The other fields are identical for both parts.
4.12.6 Time Management The time setting for the CTs is carried out by the Control Panel application International (Figure 272. on page 348) and Data Time of Windows ( Figure 273. on page 348). Be careful that the setting format for DATE is: MM/DD/YY
and for TIME is HH:MM:SS
The Time manager distributes the time to all the NEs and to the CT eventually connected. In OS presence , the OS acts as time manager . In absence of OS ,the RECT function acts as a time manager through the MASTER element. In case of more than one RECT active , the time manager will be the one connected to the Master with lowest 7.1 address. To have a correct time management , connect the PC to each NE and do the following : 1) In the AUTOEXEC.BAT specify the time zone in which the P.C is by inserting the line : SET TZ= METx where x is 0 for Greenwich from 1 to 12 for east from +1 to +12 for west The and + signs are mandatory. The line must be inserted before the win command ( i.e. before opening windows) 2) In the WIN.INI file insert the following line in the [PEX] section : CT_TIME=CLIENT If the line CT_TIME=MANAGER is already present, substitute it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 347 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 272. Windows International
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 273. Windows Date and Time
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
348 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
COMMISSIONING
448
349 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
350 / 448
1 INTRODUCTION
The commissioning procedures consist of the following steps:
Startup of the PC and check on the Window system. Installation of the SWP Craft Terminal applicative software Startup of the SWP Craft Terminal applicative software
The SWP Craft Terminal denomination is referred to all type of management software (ECT / EACT / RECT /REACT). The installation and startup referred to download applicatives are described in the GENERAL PROCEDURES section.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 351 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
352 / 448
2 STARTUP OF THE PC 2.1 Scope of the procedure

The scope of this procedure is to illustrate the startup phases of the Personal Computer and the checks made on the Windows System.
2.2 Startup
The PC is started up through the relative switch. At this point the operator views the DOS systems prompt. If dealing with WINDOWS 3.1 or 3.11 the operator views the DOS systems prompt or the applicative WINDOWS if the WIN command is included in the Windows startupfiles. If dealing with WINDOWS 95 or 98 at the PC startup the operator views directly the applicative software.
2.3 Check on the windows system

2.3.1 Check on the Windows system by using WINDOWS 3.1 or 3.11 The operator must carry out the following operations in the given sequence in order to check that the WINDOWS system has been installed properly. 1) 2) Type WIN command and press ENTER key The WINDOWS mask with relevant release version will appear. If it is 3.1 or greater the system is ready to be installed. Close the WINDOWS system by clicking the left mousebutton on the FILE option and by selecting the EXIT WINDOWS option from the displayed menu. If the WINDOWS system is lower than 3.1 the operator must install WINDOWS MICROSOFT of a version equal to or greater than 3.1. following the constructors instructions.
3)
4)
2.3.2 Check on the Windows system by using WINDOWS 95 or 98 The WINDOWS 95 or 98 application starts automatically when switching on the PC if the software has been correctly loaded. N.B. It is suggested not to have installed the two applicative software WINDOWS 3.1 ( or 3.11) and WINDOWS 95 (or 98) on the same PC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 353 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
354 / 448
3 INSTALLATION OF THE SWP CRAFT TERMINAL APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE 3.1 Purpose of the procedure
The procedure describes how to install the applicative software during initial turnon. The diskette also contains all the general applications utilized to execute all the checking operations (Byte transmission, alarm synthesis) on the equipment.
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 Installation with WINDOWS 3.1 or 3.11 This installation set is composed of the following diskettes: the first group of 3 diskettes contains the NECTAS (Rel. 3.77) applicative (CIT ALCATEL copyright) second group of 2 diskettes (number 4 and 5) contains the ECT or RECT management applicative of the equipment. For the EACT or REACT management applicative the relevant SW Package is distributed on 5 diskettes (numbered 4 to 8).
If NECTAS Rel. 3.77 (or higher) has already been installed in the same directory where the operator intends to install the SWP KIT, skip to step 10 ) on page 356 To install the software in a correct mode, execute the following operations: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Insert diskette 1 into the disk unit (example A). Open the File Manager. Click on A (example) on File Manager to access the disk unit containing the diskette. Click twice on setup.exe file. At this point a window is displayed indicating the directory onto which the Equipment management software will be loaded. The default directory is C : \ ALCATEL. The following two select keys are available: CONTINUE: permits to continue the installation procedure. CANCEL: permits to cancel the selection made.
Click the left mousebutton on the CONTINUE key. 6) A windows is displayed where is possible select the language of the installation and the port (COM1 or COM2). Cross the RECT selection to enable the RECT function if needed. Confirm the selection. The label Multiple Performance Monitoring is referred to a function not operative and the relevant small box must not be crossed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 355 / 448
7)
8) 9)
At the end of the operation an acknowledge message is given If the installation is not correct, the system will launch a message and the installation procedure will have to be repeated over again. The NECTAS icon is automatically presented in the Alcatel group by deleting all icons that might have been previously created in the same group. If the deleted icon applicative are needed again, launch the application either from the DOS ambient or create new icons through Windows. NOTE : NECTAS overwrites the previously installed NECTAS version if any.
10 ) Insert diskette 4 into the disk unit to install the ECT SWP (or EACT SWP) 11 ) Click twice on setup.exe file 12 ) At this point a window is displayed indicating two different selections: 1651SM To install the NE applications 1651MF20 To install the Q2 Mediation Function applications, when nonSDH equipment have to be managed
Click on 1651SM for example. 13 ) A window is displayed indicating the directory onto which the Equipment management software will be loaded. The default directory is C : ALCATEL. The following two select keys are available: CONTINUE: permits to continue the installation procedure. CANCEL: permits to cancel the selection made.
Click the left mousebutton on the CONTINUE key. ATTENTION The directory must be the same of the previously installed NECTAS (diskettes 1 to 3).
14 ) When all the files of diskette 4 have been copied the user is requested to insert in sequence diskette 5. Click OK with the left mousebutton to confirm. With EACTR EACT the diskettes are 4 to 6 numbered. 15 ) In this way the system copies the files of all diskettes. At the end of the operation a message (INSTALLATION COMPLETED), together with the OK key, will appear on the window. Position the cursor on the key and click the left mousebutton. (If the installation is not correct, the system will launch a message and the installation procedure will have to be repeated over again). To complete the Remote Craft Terminal configuration will be necessary create the network as for para. 4.12 on page 332. 16 ) It is suggested to install, the management applicatives of several equipments (or more software releases of the same equipment) on the same ALCATEL directory. When connecting the equipment proper the relevant software will be automatically selected (after startup execution).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 356 / 448
When the files of diskette 1 have been all copied the user is requested to insert diskette 2. Remove diskette 1 from the driver and proceed to insert diskette 2. Click OK with the left mousebutton to confirm. Repeat for diskette 3.
17 ) When the Mediation Function is needed on the NE to manage nonSDH equipment (Q2 interface) it is necessary to repeat the installation from diskette number 4.
In this case click on 1651MF20. Select the same directory of the previous installation and terminate the installation of the other diskettes. To complete the Mediation Function configuration will be necessary create the network as for para. 4.12 on page 332 18 ) Some parameters must be set for the selected port. After having selected in sequential order: Main Program Manager Control Panel Ports, select the required port. The following are the parameters to set: Bit rate Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow Control 9600 8 odd 1 None
19 ) The operator can contemporaneously work with three applications . To have more applications proceed as follows: select File Manager of Main for Your safety , create a backup copy of the WIN.INI system file of WINDOWS select WIN. INI of WINDOWS Search the PEX keyword Under PEX type: APPLICATIONS=number of applications wanted. 20 ) At this point the applicative software is ready to be activated (see Chapter 4. STARTUP OF THE APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE SWP ECT 1651 SM on page 361).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 357 / 448
3.2.2 Installation with WINDOWS 95 or 98 If dealing with WINDOWS 95 just notice that the File Manager is called Windows Explorer and to activate it the command to execute is : Start > Programs > Windows Explorer The installation set consists of five diskettes: The first group of 3 diskettes contains the NECTAS applicative (CIT Alcatel Copyright) the second group of two diskettes (numbered 4 and 5) for the SW KIT without EACT or five diskettes (numbered 4 to 8) for the SW KIT with EACT contains the management applicative of the equipment.
If NECTAS Rel. 3.77 (or higher) has already been installed in the same directory where the operator intends to install the SWP KIT, skip to step 11 ) on page 358 To install the software in a correct mode, execute the following operations: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Insert diskette 1 into disk unit A (ex.). Open the Windows Explorer tool Select the driver A from the Windows Explorer to access the disk unit containing the diskette. Click twice on setup.exe file. At this point a window is displayed indicating the directory onto which the Equipment management software will be loaded. The default directory is C : ALCATEL. A window is displayed where it is possible to select the installations language and the port COM1, COM2 . Cross the RECT selection to enable the RECT function if needed. Confirm the default selection. In this way the WINDOWS system copies the files on the hard disk indicating the percentage of files copied. Insert the diskettes 2, 3 in the required order. At the end of the operation an acknowledge message is given.
6)
7)
8) 9)
10 ) If the installation is not correct, the system will launch a message and the installation procedure will have to be repeated over again. The NECTAS icon is generated. 11 ) Insert diskette 4 into the disk unit in order to install the ECT ( or EACT) SWP. 12 ) Click twice on setup.exe file 13 ) At this point a window is displayed indicating the directory onto which the Equipment management software will be loaded. The default directory is C : ALCATEL. ATTENTION The directory must be as that of the previously installed NECTAS (diskette 1, 2, 3). 14 ) Insert the following diskettes in the required order ( 4, 5 for ECT/RECT, 4 to 8 with EACT/REACT).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 358 / 448
15 ) In this way the system copies the files of all the diskettes. At the end of the operation an acknowledge message is given. If the installation is not correct, the system will launch a message and the installation procedure will have to be repeated over again. 16 ) It is suggested to install the management applicative of several equipment (or more SW versions of the same equipment) on the same Alcatel directory. When connecting the equipment the relevant SW will be automatically selected (after startup execution). 17 ) Some parameters must be set for the selected port. To access the table to be compiled activate the menu in the given order : My computer > Control Panel > System > Device Manager > Ports and then select the choosen port. It must be the same declared while installing NECTAS. The following are the parameters to set: Bit rate Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control 9600 8 odd 1 None
18 ) The operator can work with three applications at the same time. To have more applications proceed as follows: select File Manager of Main select WIN. INI of WINDOWS Scroll till [PEX] Under PEX type: APPLICATIONS=number of applications wanted. 19 ) At this point the applicative software is ready to be activated (see Chapter 4. STARTUP OF THE APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE SWP ECT 1651 SM on page 361).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 359 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
360 / 448
4 STARTUP OF THE SWP CRAFT TERMINAL APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE 4.1 Purpose of the procedure
This procedure describes the startup phases of the applicative software.
4.2 Startup
4.2.1 Startup with Windows 3.1 or 3.11 installed After having started the PC the operator must proceed as follows to activate the software system: To connect WINDOWS, type WIN Click twice on Program Manager. The screen of Figure 274. will present the icons of the ALCATEL group. The NECTAS icon must be used to start the application, clicking twice on it . The screen with identifier and password request will appear.
The Network Configuration icon is used in case of RECT or REACT management software It permits to setup the network, addressing the NEs reachable in Remote way. The software system can be also connected from DOS prompt, through commands: CD ALCATEL WIN NECTAS These commands prevent connecting the WINDOWS system, and directly activates the application.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 274. Icons to startup from windows
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 361 / 448
4.2.2 Startup with Windows 95 or 98 In order to activate the ALCATEL product , perform the following sequence : Start > Programs > Alcatel and activate the NECTAS icon. It is possible to have the NECTAS icon in the start menu in order to activate it easily. To do that perform the following sequence : Start > Setting > Taskbar > Start Menu Programs Click on the Add push button and select with the browser the nectas.exe file. Choose then where to put the icon with the popup menu. Refer to WINDOWS manual for details.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 362 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
OPERATION
363 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
364 / 448
1 INTRODUCTION
The operating procedures consist of the following steps:
Network configuration for Remote Craft Terminal and Q2 Mediation Function management NE 1651 SM/1661 SMC software configuration Display state of the NE Modify the configuration files Routine procedures The routine procedures concern: backingup the configuration files, in case of files modification. backingup the stored alarms or history files when the disks are nearly full. backingup the stored G.784 performance monitoring files. backingup the stored inventory data files.
Software shutdown and restart
The above operations concern the management applicative with all type of Craft terminal applicative. (ECT / EACT / RECT / REACT). The operating mode of the download applicatives is described in the GENERAL PROCEDURES section.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 365 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
366 / 448
2 NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR REMOTE CRAFT TERMINAL AND Q2 MEDIATION FUNCTION

2.1 Purpose of the procedure

The procedure in details described in chapter 4.12 on page 332 shows how the RECT operator can set a textual or graphical representation of the network in order to reach each NE simply clicking on a relevant label and digit a login, in a remote way. The same chapter also present the same procedure for the Q2 Mediation Function, referred to non SDH equipment. In this procedure the main settings and also simplified options are reported. These last are useful when the operator want to manage the network not by means the graphical mode but only by a textual one. The procedure consists of 3 alternative steps: Graphical representation of the network Local network creation Global network creation
Definition of the NEs names without graphical representation of the network Remote CT or Mediation Function option without a graphical support and without equipments label
and of a common part: Configuration of the network elements
2.2 Graphical representation of the Network

To create a graphical representation of the network apply the following steps: 1) draw the map using a drawing tool
The following operations are carried out by means the Network Configuration Tool of Nectas 2) 3) 4) paste the previous copied map assign a label and a name to the NE as a local element and locate it on the map assign a label and a name to all the NEs of the network and locate them on the map
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 367 / 448
2.3 Definition of NEs name without Graph. Repres. of the Network

When no graphical representation is needed but however the operator want to give a name to each NE that will appear in the synthesis strip of the Alarm Synthesis screen, in the RECT management function or Q2 Mediation Function this procedure is applied:. 1) 2) 3) 4) activate the Network Configurator Tool and define a local network give a name to the network. assign a name to the Global network close the Nectas section and open it again to make effective the operations made on this paragraph.
2.4 Remote craft terminal option without Graphical support and without equipments label
When is neednt neither a graphical representation of the network nor the name labels for the Equipment. In this case it is enough to : 1) 2) 3) open the Network configurator tool assign a name to a fictitious network Then close the Nectas section and open it again to make effective the operations made on this paragraph.
2.5 Configuration of the Network elements

1) Configure each NE of the network by means of the Local Configuration application . configure the connection by means of the local configuration table. In the RECT configuration declare all the remote NE You can access in order to collect the synthesis information and to perform a zoom from RECT. apply the RECT configuration if You like to configure the NE You are connected with, as MASTER.
2)
activate the remote function selecting the View > Network menu of the Nectas application. To disactivate use the View > Subnetwork Equipment option.
NOTE
TIME MANAGEMENT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Time setting for the CTs is carried out by the Control Panel applications International and Data Time of Windows . The Time manager (that can be the OS or in absence of it the Master NE), distributes the time to all the NEs and to the CT eventually connected. (See para 4.12.6. on page 347 )
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 368 / 448
3 NE 1651 SM/1661 SMC SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION 3.1 Purpose of the procedure

This procedure describes how to software configure the equipment. The configuration procedure consists of 4 main branches: Equipment configuration: to configure the units inside the NE Connection configuration: utilized to configure STM signal mapping Local configuration: to configure the addresses utilized to manage the NEs through the TMN supervisory network Routing Table: to manage the Routing Tables of the NEs (TMN).
3.2 Configuration
To configure proceed as follows: 1) 2) Select the APPLICATIONCHOICE option and click the left mousebutton. The application select window will appear. Select the desired Configuration and click the left mousebutton. Click OK to confirm. After the upload of the configuration of the NE, the window of the selected application will be opened (see CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS on page 71). To utilize this application, the operator must be authorized through the operator s profile assigned with the administrative application. Furthermore, the access with Craft Terminal must be enabled by the Operation System (AE label green indication in the Alarm Synthesis). If the operator is authorized, he must select the FILE Option and then click the left mousebutton. An options menu will appear (see subpara. Options File under para. CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS on page 71). Select the OPEN option and click the left mousebutton. The list of all the configuration files will appear. Select the file required and click the left mousebutton. Click OK to confirm. At this point the operator obtains the desired configuration, and has the possibility of modifying and utilizing it as a new configuration. Click the option TABLES (with the left mousebutton). A list of all the tables configured for the selected file will appear in a scrolling window. No configuration file will be present after the applications have been executed the first time. Therefore, if the operator selects the Open... option from the File menu no file will appear.
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To create a configuration file the operator must directly select the Tables option, hence he will be able to access all the configuration tables.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 369 / 448
8)
Select the desired table and click the left mousebutton. Click OK to confirm. A window relative to the selected table will be opened.
The operator can proceed in different ways: configure in the order specified in the listed tables starting from Equipment Configuration. The given order follows a correct operative function. Configure as required.
A detailed description of the tables and various commands are stated in: Equipment Configuration Application on page 82. Connection Configuration with Matrix Application on page 119. Drop Shelf Connection Configuration Applicationon page 170 Local Configuration Application on page 178. Routing Table Configuration Application on page 189. 9) Execute the desired configurations and click OK to confirm.
10 ) To execute other configurations repeat the procedure from point 7, if otherwise select the option FILE and click the left mousebutton. 11 ) Select the option SAVE AS. At this point the configurations can be saved in a new file (by inserting a new name in the window which appears), by keeping the old configuration. Configurations can also be saved in a new file named as the source file (with option SAVE). Click the OK key to confirm. 12 ) The operator must select the disk utilized to store the file. It is also possible to title the created file with a short description. To this purpose set the pointer in the title row and click the left mousebutton. Type the title. It is also possible insert the operator name. 13 ) Click OK to confirm. At this point the configuration has been stored. To send it to the Network Element, select the option FILE. 14 ) Select the option SEND in the menu which appears. This option opens a subwindow which contains the list of all the configurations. 15 ) Select the new configuration file and confirm with key OK. At this point the configuration is sent to the NE which assumes it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 370 / 448
4 DISPLAY OF THE NETWORK ELEMENT STATUS 4.1 Purpose of the procedure

This procedure describes how to display the status of the NE 1651 SM/1661 SMC. The applications utilized are: Alarm Status & Control: permits to show the alarms conditions and the actual status of the NE. G.784 Performance Monitoring: permits to check the quality of tributary and aggregate links.
4.2 Display alarm status & control

The Alarm Synthesis window appears after having initialized the NECTAS system (see the Commissioning Procedures), To display the status of the NE, inherent to the A.S. & C. application, the operator must proceed as follows: 1) 2) Select the option CHOICEAPPLICATION with the pointer and then click the left mousebutton. The window for the application selection will appear; select the indication Alarm Status & Remote Controls and then click the left mousebutton. Then click the OK key with the left mousebutton. The window for the application selection will be closed and the window for the AS&C application appears. This window shows: the physical structure of the NE with the equipped units; the logical display of the equipped units.
3)
The screen rapresent the alarm condition according the Configuration tables downloaded on the NE. 4) A first synthesis of the alarms can be obtained through the slots equipped on each unit of the NE (see para 4.6 ALARM, STATUS & CONTROL APPLICATION on page 192 ). If a unit is alarmed, the operator can enter other subwindows to have further information on the type of alarm. To this purpose, select the unit to display through the mouse pointer; when the pointer becomes a magnifier glyph, click the left mousebutton. The required information is displayed. 6) With regard to some unit and functions, another screen permits to display more detailed information. To this purpose the operator must select the box involved with the pointer and click the left mousebutton when the magnifier glyph appears. The selection of the NE units to display can be also operated through option VIEW in the AS&C window. This option is described in detail at para. Options of the AS&C application on page 254.
5)
7)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 371 / 448
4.3 Display G.784 performance monitoring

The alarm synthesis window appears after having initialized the software system (see the Commissioning Procedures). To display the status of the NE inherent to the G.784 P.M. application, the operator must proceed as follows: 1) 2) Select the option CHOICEAPPLICATION with the pointer and then click the left mousebutton. The window for the application selection will appear; select the indication Performance Monitoring and then click the left mousebutton. Afterwards, click the OK key with the left mousebutton. The window for the application selection will be closed and the window for the G.784 P.M. application appears. Select the points to be monitored and how to proceed. ATTENTION : the point to be monitored for AU4 B3/PJC in the Aggregate, must be selected in the relevant table in Equipment Configuration.
3)
The results of the P.M. tests made at the test points configured during the Configuration Phases will be displayed through this window. 4) A detailed description of the G.784 P.M. application is given in para. 4.8 G.784 Performance Monitoring Application on page 282.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 372 / 448
5 LOG ACCESS 5.1 Purpose of the procedure

This procedure describes how to access logs. The Alarm Synthesis window appears after having initialized the software system (see the commissioning procedures). Logs can be accessed either: through the History option, directly with the Alarm Synthesis window, or in the AS & C application or with the Maintenance Memory Application
5.2 History
This paragraph is referred to the alarms stored in the Craft Terminal (about 3000 events) To access the stored alarms either directly from the Alarm Synthesis Window or after having entered the AS&C application window, the operator must proceed as follows: 1) Select the HISTORY option and click the left mousebutton. This option has two other options which permit to either display or print the alarm messages. After having selected one of the two options (by clicking the left mousebutton), a subwindow with a menu appears and the operator can select the messages to display (see para. ALARM SYNTHESIS WINDOW on page 52 and ALARM, STATUS & CONTROL APPLICATION on page 192). In the latter case, further detailed information is obtained. After having selected the option with the left mousebutton, click the OK key with the same button. If the selected option is DISPLAY, the messages will appear in a scrolling subwindow containing the last messages of that type. If the selected option is PRINT, all the messages of that type will be printed.
2)
3)
4)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 373 / 448
5.3 Maintenance memory

The Maintenance Memory function allows to obtain information on the appearance/clearing of events occurring in the NE. The NE stores the events in a Maintenance Memory. The number of stored event depends on the type of event. The Maintenance Memory is structured as a set of blocks. Each block is associated to an entity defined in the NE. Each entity is in turn associated to a set of events that will be stored in the entity block. The entity can be grouped in the GROUP ENTITY. The Group Entity and associated entity are defined in the N.E.. The events can be read from the N.E. only following operator request. To access the Maintenance Memory proceed as follows: 1) 2) Select the option APPLICATIONCHOICE with the pointer and then click the left mousebutton. The window for the application selection will appear; select the indication Maintenance Memory and then click the left mousebutton. Then click the OK key with the left mousebutton. The window for the application selection will be closed and the window for the maintenance memory application appears. A detailed description of this window and relevant options is given in para. MAINTENANCE MEMORY APPLICATION on page 262.
3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 374 / 448
6 CONFIGURATION FILES MODIFICATION 6.1 Purpose of the procedure

This procedure describes how to modify the configuration files.
6.2 How to modify files

The alarm synthesis window appears after having initialized the software system (see the commissioning procedures), To modify the configuration files proceed as follows: 1) 2) Select the APPLICATION CHOICE option and click the left mousebutton. The window to select the application will appear. Select the Configuration to modify, i.e.: Connection Configuration with Matrix or Drop Shelf connection Configuration or Equipment Configuration, or Local Configuration, or Routing Table
now click the left mousebutton. Click OK to confirm. The window of the selected Configuration application will be opened (see relevant para. i.e.: Equipment Configuration Application on page 82. Connection Configuration with Matrix Application on page 119. Drop Shelf Connection Configuration on page 170 Local Configuration Application on page 178. Routing Table Configuration Application on page 189. 3) To utilize the application, the operator must be authorized through the Operator s profile assigned with the ADMINISTRATIVE application. Furthermore, the access with Craft Terminal must be enabled by the Operation System (AE label green indication in the Alarm Synthesis). 4) If the operator is authorized, he must select the FILE Option and then click the left mousebutton. An options menu will appear (see subpara. OPTIONS FILE under para. CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS on page 71) Select the OPEN option and click the left mousebutton. The list of all the configuration files will appear. Select the file to modify and click the left mousebutton. Click OK to confirm At this point the operator obtains the desired configuration.
5)
6)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 375 / 448
7)
Click the option TABLES (through the left mousebutton). A list of all the tables configured for the selected file will appear in a scrolling window.
8)
Select the desired table and click the left mousebutton. Click OK to confirm. A window relative to the selected table will be opened. Execute the desired modifications and click OK to confirm (for the table description see relevant paragraphs.)
9)
10 ) To execute other modifications repeat the procedure from point 7, if otherwise select the option FILE and click the left mousebutton. 11 ) Select the option SAVE AS.. At this point the modifications can be saved in a new file (by inserting a new name in the window which appears), by keeping the old configuration. Modifications can also be saved in a new file named as the source file (with option Save). Click the OK key to confirm. 12 ) The operator must select the disk utilized to store the file. It is also possible to title the created file with a short description. To this purpose set the pointer in the title row and click the left mousebutton. Write the title. It is also possible to insert the operator name. 13 ) Click OK to confirm. At this point the new configuration has been stored. To send it to the Network Element, select the option FILE. 14 ) Select the option SEND in the menu which appears. This option opens a subwindow which contains the list of all the configurations. 15 ) Select the new configuration file and confirm with key OK. At this point the configuration is sent to the NE which assumes it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 376 / 448
7 OPERATING ROUTINE PROCEDURES 7.1 Introduction

The operating routine procedures consist of: the configuration files backup the stored alarms/events Maintenance Memory files backup. the G.784 Performance Monitoring file backup the Remote Inventory file backup
7.1.1 How to backup files In order to backup files , the operator have to distinguish between different situations : a) The Remote Craft Terminal is deactivated ( active selection View > Subnetwork on the Nectas Main screen menu ) but a local network is present (i.e. Nectas has been activated with the name of the local network as parameter). The configuration files are located in the directory : c:\network\<local_network_name>\<equipment_name> The directories are automatically generated when creating the local network. b) The Operator is dealing with a global network i.e. the Remote Craft terminal is activated (selection View > Network on the Nectas Main screen menu active) The configuration files are located in the directory : c:\network\<global_network_name>\<equipment_name> The directories are automatically generated when creating the global network. c) No Remote Craft Terminal is active The default directory for the configuration files is : c:\alcatel\<equipment_name> The root directory must be the one declared installing the SWP ( ALCATEL is the default that can be changed) . The child directory must be the Equipments name and release and is automatically generated. To backup the configuration files the operator must proceed as follows: 1) 2) 3) Select the configuration directory containing the files to backup. Insert the disk into the floppy unit. Create on the a disk the same path You have in c . Example: a:\network\<global_network_name>\<equipment_name>
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4)
Copy the files from the c configuration directory to the directory created in a by entering the command: COPY filename.(file extension) a: \<path>\filename.(file.extension)
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 377 / 448
This command must be repeated for all the files to backup. If the operator is dealing with WINDOWS 95 there is an automatic backup procedure that can be activated by the following commands : Start > Programs > System Tools > Backup Refer to WINDOWS 95 manual for details.
7.2 Configuration files backup

Following are listed the extension of the configuration files concerning the Equipment Configuration, Connection Configuration with Matrix, Local Configuration and Routing Table Configuration Applications. B60 Equipment Configuration B56 Connection Configuration with Matrix B58 Drop Shelf Connection Configuration B55 Local Configuration B57 Routing Table Configuration
Refer to para 7.1.1 on page 377 for operative details.
7.3 Stored alarms and events file backup

The backup files for alarms and events stored in the Maintenance Memory have extension .EVT. Refer to para 7.1.1 on page 377 for operative details.
7.4 G.784 Performance monitoring file backup

The backup files for alarms and events stored in the Performance Monitoring Application have extension .CNT Refer to para 7.1.1 on page 377 for operative details.
7.5 Remote Inventory file backup

The backup files for alarms and events stored in the Remote Inventory Application have extension .RUR Refer to para 7.1.1 on page 377 for operative details.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 378 / 448
8 Craft Terminal Logout and Login 8.1 Purpose of the procedure

This procedure describes the Shutdown and restart operations of the software system.
8.2 Craft Terminal logout

To logout the craft terminal connection the operator must execute the following operations in the given order: 1) Close all the previously opened application windows using the CLOSE option. The close option can be selected from the Windows menu present in each window . Select Application choice and, in sequence: Administrative Operator Logout
2)
as for para. 4.4 on page 63 Confirm with the OK key. 3) Craft Terminal and NE are now disconnected and the procedure returns to the initial phase illustrated in 4.2 on page 50. In this way another operator must insert his own password to enter the software applications.
8.3 Craft Terminal login

For the restart operation refer to chapter Chapter 4. STARTUP OF THE SWP CRAFT TERMINAL APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE on page 361. Access the craft terminal with the displayed login window (for detail see para. 4.2 on page 50)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 379 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
380 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
MAINTENANCE
381 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
382 / 448
1 INTRODUCTION
The maintenance procedures consist of the following steps:
Maintenance of the PC (see Chpt. 2 on page 383) Shutdown and restart of the PC (see Chpt.3 on page 385) Corrective Maintenance (Trouble Shooting) see Chpt. 4 on page 387 Unit Replacement with spare see Chpt. 5 on page 415.
The SWP CRAFT TERMINAL denomination is referred to all types of software management (ECT/ EACT/RECT/REACT).
2 PC MAINTENANCE
With regard to PC maintenance, refer to the constructor s documentation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 383 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
384 / 448
3 PROBLEMS WITH CRAFT TERMINAL 3.1 Purpose of the procedure

This procedure describes the Shutdown and restart the PC should the operator not be able to utilize the SWP CRAFT TERMINAL applicative system; ; i.e. if the craft terminal does not work properly or if it is not responding to the commands of the operator. The procedure is separately presented for Windows 3.1 or 3.11 and for Windows 95.
3.1.1 Shut Down with WINDOWS 3.1 (or 3.11) If the operator can neither utilize the SWP CRAFT TERMINAL applicative system nor identify the cause of the trouble, he must attempt to shut-down and then restart the PC. 1) First of all, he must attempt to shutdown the software system (see SOFTWARE SHUT DOWN AND RESTART on page 385). Regardless of whether the system is shutdown or not, he must try to shutdown the WINDOW system by selecting the Windows Menu from the Windows Program Manager window. This menu will display a list of the options. Select the option CLOSE . Click on the OK key displayed in the subwindow. This operation disconnects the operator from the Windows ambient. At this point switch the P.C. off. If the operation is unsuccessful, i.e., neither the applicative system nor the WINDOWS system have been shutdown, switch the P.C. off anyway. Switch on the PC again and try to restart the craft terminal system again (see the following paragraph).
2)
3)
4)
3.1.2 Craft terminal shutdown with Windows 95 or 98 In order to shut down the PC execute the command : Start > Shut down A windows s displayed. It permits to shut down the computer or restart it or restart in MSDOS mode.
3.1.3 Craft terminal restart For the restart operation refer to chapter STARTUP OF THE PC on page 353.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 385 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
386 / 448
4 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (TROUBLESHOOTING)

4.1 Purpose of the procedure Troubleshooting involves the detection location and correction of failures in the equipment and replacing the parts that are defective. 4.1.1 Troubleshooting organization The troubleshooting procedure is carried out through flowcharts. The latter do not deal with the following aspects: faulty electronic alarm indication processing and detection circuits faulty wiring
The Maintenance organization can have different structures. The following typologies are considered: with a station supervisory center on site with a Remote Craft Terminal management center with a TMN network management center
In the station supervisory center the maintenance technician refers to the remote alarms received from the equipment in a centralized office of the station i.e. : INT , URG , NURG , IND : remote alarms relative to the type of (internal , urgent , not urgent, indicative) TORC, TANC : remote alarms relative to the malfunction of on or two / all power supply units. TOR , TAND : remote alarms relative to the decrease or loss of one or both station power supply DC voltages. TUP : remote alarm relative to the malfunction of the Equipment Controller unit. Outgoing parallel contact CP0 : remote alarms configured by the customer.
Bisedes detecting the equipment in alarm, it is also possible to detect the type of failure and the relative source. With a Remote Craft Terminal management center the operator in one station, connected to a local NE with the craft terminal (Master), can remotely manage a max of other 31 NEs, located in different sites. The local NE can be troubleshot with the two previous cited typologies or directly with the craft terminal. The remote NE are troubleshot with the Craft Terminal. With a TMN network management center the maintenance technician must refer to the alarms sent towards the TMNs Operations System (see the relevant TMN handbooks). After having detected the equipment in alarm, the condition is attended through pushbutton on the Equipment Controller unit or through SW command sent by the Craft Terminal or by the Operation System.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 387 / 448
This condition causes: On the racks The yellow LED to light up RED LED to light off
On the Equipment Controller front cover: Yellow LED (ATTD) to light up RED LED NURG or URG to light off ( available for other alarms). If both LEDs are on, a first Attended command attends the NURG and an eventual second Attended command attends the URG.
LOCAL Maintenance (station supervisory center and on site typologies) It is essential to observe the condition of the other LEDs on the unit front coverplates, and use the Craft Terminal (PC). The Equipment Controller unit is provided with LEDs which indicate : Red LED Red LED Yellow LED URG NURG ABN detection of an urgent alarm detection of a not urgent alarm detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: active loopbacks, forging the units into service, force ON or OFF , try to restore after ALS. Yellow LED Yellow LED Green LED IND ATTD only for SMEC detection of an indication alarm. indicates storing through pushbotton URG , NURG. indicates INSERVICE Unit for 1+1 Protection ( not used in this release ).
The analysis of these LEDs permits to detect the type of alarm (URG NURG IND) and relevant condition (ABN = abnormal condition , ATTD = storing). Both the Equipment Controller unit and the other units (except Power Supply unit) are provided with a red LED indicating unit local failure. The aggregate units and the 140/STM1 Switch Tributary units are provided with green LED which glows when the unit is working. This LED is OFF for Spare only (Not for 1+N spare tributary). The troubleshooting operation proceeds according to the information indicated in the flowcharts and according to the Maintenance table to the Par. 4.2 on page 392.:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 275. on page 390 General flowchart Figure 276. on page 391 Power supply alarm
And according to the Maintenance table to the Par. 4.2 on page 392. As indicated in the flowchart the troubleshooting operation is facilitated by the Craft Terminal (PC) , and by the optical indicators (LEDs) present on the Equipment Controller. The PC is cordconnected to the relative connector on the Equipment Controller s front coverplate.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 388 / 448
The PC using the Alarm Status and Control applications of the craft terminal, provides in a very short time, detailed information on the state of the alarms thus facilitating fault location and subsequent removal as indicated in Maintenance tables of Par. 4.2 on page 392. (Meaning of the Alarms)
The Maintenance Memory application allows to browse through the various classified alarms and commands previously stored the equipment. N.B. To correctly execute the troubleshooting operations the technician must know the exact configuration of the equipment (Configuration applications trough P.C.) The presence of one spare unit enables the equipment to operate correctly even following urgent alarms (now defined not urgent). In this case the troubleshooting can be esecuted with low traffic condition.
The aim of the flowcharts which follow and maintenance tables is either to locate the faulty unit and to replace it with a spare as well as to locate an eventual failure along the link. The flowchart/tables are based mainly on the probability of a failure, i.e. the aim of the flowchart is to identify the unit or the link most likely to have failed. The flowcharts/tables should be followed even in the case that the cited LEDs flash, because this flashing condition might be due to external alarm causes usually related to line problems. Remote Craft Terminal management The Master NE, locally connected to the craft terminal, can be troubleshot following the same procedures of the LOCAL typology, previously described, or can be maintained directly with the Craft Terminal (see para. 4.2 on page 392). The Remote NEs will be remotely troubleshot with the Craft Terminal of the Master station following the indications of para. 4.2 on page 392. For both the Master and Remote NEs will be anyway useful to look at the notes and general information inserted in the previous procedures for the LOCAL typologies. Center Operation System in Telecommunication Management Network: All the equipment connected to the TMN are controlled by the Operation System. Detailed alarm data obtained (as locally through the PC) tracing the cause of alarm and deciding on the type of maintenance operations the carry out. Refer to the Operation System handbooks for more detailed information.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 389 / 448
START
AN ALARM IS PRESENT
STORE THE ALARM THROUGH PUSHBUTTON ON THE EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER ESCT
YES
IS THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT GREEN LED ON?
NO
PROCEED ACCORDING TO POWER SUPPLY ALARM FLOW CHART IN THIS PARAGRAPH
IS THE EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER RED LED ON?
NO
IS THE RED LED URG ON ? YES
NO
YES THROUGH PUSHBUTTON RESET THE UNIT R NO
IS ONE OF THE RED LEDS INDICATING UNIT ALARM ON?
DOES THE ALARM CONDITION PERSIST ? YES
YES NO TRANSITORY FAILURE REPLACE THE UNIT IN ALARM. BY CONNECTING THE PC AND INDICATING THE TYPE OF ALARM, THE FAULTY UNIT CAN BE REPLACED (OR NOT) IN CASE OF LOW TRAFFIC.
THE UNIT IS FAULTY. REPLACE IT ACCORDING TO THE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED IN PARA 5 UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPSARE CONNECT THE PC TO THE EQUIPMENT AND, ACCORDING TO THE TYPE OF DETECTED ALARM, PROCEED AS STATED IN THE PARA 4.1 MEANING OF THE ALARMS
END
END
NO
IS THE NURG RED LED ON?
ALARM REMOTE YELLOW LED (IND) THE MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS MUST BE PERFORMED ON THE EQUIPMENT CONNECTED TO THE LOCAL ONE. CONNECT THE PC AND ACCORDING TO THE TYPE OF ALARM PROCEED AS INDICATED IN THE PARA 4.1 MEANING OF THE ALARMS
YES CONNECT THE PC TO THE EQUIPMENT, AFTER HAVING DETECTED THE TYPE OF FAILURE, ESTABLISH IF INTERVENTION MUST BE IMMEDIATE OR NOT AS STATED IN THE RELATIVE PARA 4.1 MEANING OF THE ALARMS
END
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 275. General flow chart
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 390 / 448
POWER SUPPLY FAILURE GREEN LED START OFF
IS REMOTE ALARM AND PRESENT ? (N.B.)
NO
SWITCH THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT FIRST OFF AND THEN ON
DOES STATION POWER SUPPLY FAILURE GREEN LED LIGHTS UP ? END NO REPLACE THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT THE ALARM STOP AND YES
TRANSITORY FAILURE
IS YES REGULAR OPERATION RESTORED ? END
OVERLOAD LIKELY TO HAVE BEEN CAUSED BY ONE OF THE ASSEMBLY UNITS
REMOVE ALL THE UNITS FROM THE SUBRACK INSERT THEM BACK ONE AT A TIME UNIT WHEN THE ONE CAUSING THE FAILURE HAS BEEN DETECTED HENCE REPLACE IT.
END
N.B. IF NO REMOTE ALARMS ARE USED PROCEED TO CHECK FOR PRESENCE OF STATION POWER SUPPLY IF ABSENT, GREEN LED OF ALL THE POWER SUPPLY UNITS WILL BE OF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 276. Power supply alarm
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 391 / 448
4.2 Troubleshooting by means of Craft Terminal

The alarm information of the NE 1651 SM/1661 SMC can be identified on the craft terminal through the Alarm Status & Control Application (AS&C). The history of past events can be obtained by means of the Maintenance Memory application or the History application. To access the relevant procedures, follow the indications given in Chapter 3. DISPLAY OF THE NETWORK ELEMENT STATUS on page 371, and Chapter. 5 LOG ACCESS on page 373. ALARM, STATUS & CONTROL APPLICATION on page 192 illustrates all the screens inherent to the various alarm states. Furthermore, data concerning stored alarms is specified and detailed in para. MAINTENANCE MEMORY APPLICATION on page 262. General information on the status and alarms of the NE are present on the Alarm Synthesis and in the general alarms and status top labels of the AS &C application. The relevant description and subsequent maintenance actions are fromTable 28. on page 394 up to Table 30. on page 396 Some indication are common to the two tables. Upon locating the alarms proceed as stated in Table 31. on page 399 thru Table 42. on page 408 to obtain all the relevant data, including the maintenance operations to carry out. Table 43. on page 409 thru Table 51. on page 413 indicate the Consequent alarms Actions for each unit. For the individuation of the causes of fault conditions the Operator can be helped by using the History or Maintenance Memory applications. In case the replacement of a unit is necessary, follow the indications reported in para. 5 on page 415. ATTENTION: When the units are in the protected configuration, the relevant urgent alarms are declared NOT URGENT. When the Equipment Controller unit is in CARD FAIL condition (red LED indicating unit local failure) never reinsert the extracted unit. indicated in three tables,
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 392 / 448
4.2.1 PRELIMINARY CONCEPTS and DEFINITION The following concepts and definitions are considered useful to facilitate maintenance operations with the aid of the previously indicated tables. The various units specified in the synchronous multiplexing hierarchy imply structuring the Transmission network into three levels (sublevels of the physical OSI level): Transmission bearer level. It is the support for the path level and can be further split into physical level (Transmission media proper) and Transmission section level. The sections can be either regenerator or multiplexer utilized for specific functions associated to the EOW channels of the SDH frame. The interface alarms (or section alarms, indicated in the tables) belong to this level (example: Line LOS, LOF, B2 etc). Path level It concerns the transfer of data between the access points and the path. It does not depend on the service nor on the type of Transmission media. It constitutes the circuit levels support. The path can either be lower order (LO) or higher order (HO) depending on the capacity of transferring data. Like the regenerator and multiplexer sections, the paths too have specific functions associated to the EOW channels of the SDH frame. The alarms listed in the cited tables, where path level troubleshooting is required, belong to this level (example TU AIS, TU LOP). Circuit level. This level concerns the transfer of information between the access points and the circuit proper. It is a direct support for the telecommunication services. It superimposes the SDH function and is considered as the transport agent hence no SDH orderwire channel associated functions are required. An example of this level alarm is tributary LOS.
The above level structuring in the Transmission network is depicted in Figure 277. hereunder.
G.703 STMN G.703 STMN TRIBUTARIES SDH MUX REGENERATOR SDH MUX STMN SDH MUX TRIBUTARIES
RSOH REGENERATOR SECTION
RSOH REGENERATOR SECTION
MSOH MULTIPLEXER SECTION
MSOH MULTIPLEXER SECTION
POH PATH
Figure 277. Transmission network level structure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 393 / 448
4.2.1.1 Troubleshooting starting from the Alarm synthesis indication In the following are presented the troubleshooting tables referred to the information given in the Alarm Synthesis screen and in the top bar of the Alarm Status & Control application . The following table is referred to the alarm/status recapitulation of the network or of an equipment (GLOBAL and Local Synthesis bar), that is contained in the Alarm Synthesis window. Table 28. Alarm Synthesis indication (Global Synthesis Network Stations)
LABEL ACRONYM EF DF AS AT UG NG HA SA DA SF ST
ALARM/STATUS DESCRIPTION Equipment FailureNo answer from NE Dialogue FailureWrong answer from NE Alarm Stop Alarm Receiving Attention Urgent alarm Not urgent alarm Housekeeping Alarms Service affecting Distant alarm Signal Failure Status Indicator
MAINTENANCE Reset Craft Terminal. If not OK. reset the Equipment Controller. If not OK, substitute the Equipment Controller
When URG and NURG alarms are stored, press button on Equipment Controller or use a CT command to activate AT See unit detailed indication in the following tables Check the relevant station alarm associated to the housekeeping indication Not operative See unit detailed indication in the following tables Not operative See unit detailed indication in the following tables Used on the OS to acknowledge the local CT connection Local CT is disabled by the OS, the operator cannot write. If enabling is requested, ask the OS Send the absent configuration files to the NE Send the configuration files that have been lost to the NE. If the alarm persist, replace the Equipment Controller.
TC
Craft Terminal connected to the NE
AE
Access enable
DC
Default configuration
LC BU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Loss of configuration Three Remote F Terminals connected
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 394 / 448
Table 29. Alarm Synthesis indication (Local NE)
LABEL ACRONYM EF DF
ALARM/STATUS DESCRIPTION Equipment FailureNo answer from NE Dialogue FailureWrong answer from NE
MAINTENANCE Reset Craft Terminal. If not OK. reset Equipment Controller. If not OK, substitute the Equipment Controller When URG and NURG alarms are stored, press button on Equipment Controller or CT command to activate AT See unit detailed indication in the following tables Check the relevant station alarm associated to the housekeeping indication See unit detailed indication in the following tables See unit detailed indication in the following tables Local CT is disabled by the OS, the operator cannot write. If enabling is requested, ask the OS Used on the OS to acknowledge the local CT connection Send the absent configuration files to the NE Send the configuration files that have been lost to the NE. If the alarm persist, replace Equipment Controller.
AT UG NG HI IN AC
Alarm Receiving Attention Urgent alarm Not urgent alarm Housekeeping indication Indicative alarm Abnormal Condition
AE
Access Enable
TC DC
Craft Terminal connected to the NE Default configuration
LC BU
Loss of configuration Three Remote F Terminals connected
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 395 / 448
Table 30. Alarm status and remote control general indication
MAINTENANCE
AT UG NG IN AC AE
Alarm receiving attention Urgent Alarm Not Urgent Alarm Indicative Alarm Abnormal Condition Access enable
See unit detailed information in the following tables
If local CT is disabled by the OS, the operator cannot write. If enabling is requested, ask to the OS Check the relevant station alarm associated to the housekeeping indication Performance Monitoring indication when threshold (fixed in the equipment configuration) have been overtaken. To reset use the Remote Control in AS&C application. Check the Ethernet link with the OS Check the Station power supply.
HI
Housekeeping indication
UT
Unavailable Time
ET LF
Ethernet Fail LINE SHELF Battery : Fusebroken alarm. OR alarm due to station power supply failure.
LB
LINE SHELF Battery control Check the Service Battery and ANDOR Failure / Missing (Service Batt. miss- subunit ing/ AND OR failure or missing) Check Local configuration and Routing Table configuration. Check the link with OS. Check the correct operating of OS. Reset and eventually substitute ESCT. Verify the link between the OS and the Mediation function. Check power supply unit and, if affected by a failure, replace it. Check the Station power supply Check the Service Battery and ANDOR subunit
OS
Operation System Isolation
MF
Mediation Function OS isolation
Power Supply alarms (1,2,3) DROP SHELF Battery Fusebroken alarm DROP SHELF Battery control Failure / Missing (Service Batt. missing/ AND OR failure or missing) Power Supply alarms (1,2)
DF
DB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Check power supply unit and, if affected by a failure, replace it.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 396 / 448
LABEL ACRONYM
ALARM/STATUS DESCRIPTION
4.2.2 Details on the alarms / status common of the various units The following alarms are common to all units
Card mismatch Software mismatch Card missing Card fail
unit inserted into a slot equipped with another type of unit unit with no updated software version slot equipped but card missing internal failure (hardware) see each single unit
The statuses common to all units are: Card not responding Active/Standby no dialogue between card and Equipment Controller. unit active (operating) or standby. Not applicable for AUX/EOW unit.
N.B. Card not responding is dealt as status and not as an alarm because it indicates a temporary condition which will be restored. If the condition persists it is due to a unit hardware failure. This will activate the Card Fail alarm.
The following operating status are common to some units only: Protection switch event Indication of switched TU (PPS), (21x2Mb/s Trib., 3x34 , 3x45 Mb/s Trib., 140/STM1 switch Trib., S1.1 Trib.) selected tributary to send clock to CRU (21x2Mb/s Trib.) Indication of switch activated in Remote Control operation (typical for test). In this release active only for: Protected Card (FOR SPARE ONLY) Low Priority Traffic (FOR SPARE ONLY) (NSRS) LAPD fail Full Matrix CRU Aggregate Electrical tributaries Indication of unit protected in N+1 Trib. protec tion. For 1:1 switch. Not operative in this release. Dialogue interrupted with Equipment Controller referred to DCC management (Aggregate and STM1 trib.)
Port selected for reference clock Commanded switch
The following Automatic Laser Shutdown status is given for optical units (Trib. and Aggregates):
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Shutdown Forced to ON and OFF Not implemented Abnormal Condition
The ON or OFF condition of ALS and the attempts to restore after ALS activate the ABN indication. The latter also indicates loopback commands or unit inserted into a slot whose configuration does not correspond to the equipped one.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 397 / 448
4.2.2.1 Units troubleshooting tables In the following are presented the troubleshooting tables subdivided into units These tables should be used: by observing the alarms indications reported on the units detailed views of the AS&C application on craft terminal (Alarms/Status column of the table) by observing the red LED on the front of each unit, indicating unit failure (Unit Fail column) by observing the URG, NURG, IND, ABN LEDs on the front of the Equipment Controller unit the URG alarm indicates a severe alarm that could have impact on the current traffic (interruption or degrade). Thus it requires a rapid intervention to restore the regular working condition of the equipment. The indications of Alarm/Status for each unit are obtained by clicking (when cursor becomes a magnifier) in the block representing the unit, in the general view of AS&C application. The complete denomination of an alarm is obtained by clicking (when cursor becomes a hand) in the relevant box symbolizing the alarm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 398 / 448
Table 31. Alarms of the STM4/STM16 Aggregates
Optical Indication Alarm Description Alarm Acronym LOS LOF Unit Int Loss Signal Loss of frame Equipment Controller Urg yes yes yes Nurg Ind Abn Check line Check line Check Remote Equipment Check Remote Equipment Maintenance
Multiplexer Section Alarm MSAIS Indication Signal Multiplexer Section FarEnd Receive Failure Multiplexer Section Signal Degrade on byte B2 MSFERF
yes
MSSIG DEG
yes
Check line when possible
Multiplexer Section MSEXBER Excessive Bit Error Rate on byte B2 AU4 Loss of Pointer AU4 Alarm Indication Signal Laser Degrade Laser Fail Laser Abnormal Condition Laser Temperature Excess Card Fail TEMP. Card Fail yes yes yes yes AU4LOP AU4AIS LD LF yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
Check line Check line Check Remote Equipment Replace unit when possible Replace unit Automatic Laser Shutdown in progress Replace unit when possible Replace unit Insert right unit Update SW version
yes yes yes yes yes yes
Unit inserted into slot Card equipped mismatch with other type of unit Software mismatch Card Missing PassThrough fail SW MIS Card Missing
Check Jumper kit or Replace the Unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 399 / 448
Table 32. Alarms of the STM1 Electrical Tributary (140/STM1 Switch. Unit)
Alarm Description
Alarm Acronym
Unit Int
Equipment Controller Urg yes yes yes Nurg Ind Abn
Maintenance
Loss Signal Loss of frame
LOS LOF
Check line (*) Check line (*) Check Remote Equipment (*) Check Remote Equipment (*)
Multiplexer Section Alarm MSAIS Indication Signal Multiplexer Section FarEnd Receive Failure Multiplexer Section Signal Degrade on byte B2
MSFERF
yes
MSSIG DEG
yes
Check line when possible (*)
Multiplexer Section MSEXBER Excessive Bit Error Rate on byte B2 AU4 Loss of Pointer AU4 Alarm Indication Signal Unvailable AU Path Indicates AIS signal received on the AU Path Excessive Bit Error Rate (POHVC4) Loss of Pointer Card Fail EX BER(B3) AU4LOP Card Fail yes AU4LOP AU4AIS
yes
Check line (*)
yes yes
Check line (*) Check Remote Equipment (*)
yes
Check All AU Path
yes
Check line on VC4 Path (*) Replace Matrix or STM1 Trib. units. Replace unit
yes yes
Unit inserted into slot Card equipped mismatch with other type of unit Software mismatch * Tributary side SW MIS
yes
yes
Insert right unit
yes
yes
Update SW version
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 400 / 448
Optical Indication
Table 33. Alarms of the STM1 Optical Tributary
Optical Indication Alarm Description Alarm Acronym LOS LOF Unit Int Loss Signal Loss of frame Equipment Controller Urg yes yes yes Nurg Ind Abn Check line (*) Check line (*) Check Remote Equipment (*) Check Remote Equipment (*) Check line when possible (*) Maintenance
Multiplexer Section Alarm MSAIS Indication Signal Multiplexer Section FarEnd Receive Failure Multiplexer Section Signal Degrade on byte B2 MSFERF
yes
MSSIG DEG
yes
Multiplexer Section MSEXBER Excessive Bit Error Rate on byte B2 AU4 Loss of Pointer AU4 Alarm Indication Signal Unvailable AU Path Indicates AIS signal received on the AU Path Excessive Bit Error Rate (POHVC4) Loss of Pointer Laser Degrade Laser Fail Laser Abnormal Condition Card Fail Card Fail misyes yes yes EX BER(B3) AU4BLOP LD LF yes AU4LOP AU4AIS
yes yes yes
Check line (*) Check line (*) Check Remote Equipment (*) Check All AU Path Check line on VC4 Path (*) Replace Matrix or STM1 Trib. units. yes Replace unit when possible Replace unit yes Automatic Laser Shutdown in progress Replace unit Insert right unit Update SW version
yes
yes yes
yes
yes yes yes
Unit inserted into slot Card equipped match with other type of unit Software mismatch * Tributary side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SW MIS
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 401 / 448
Table 34. Alarms of the 140 Mbit/s Trib. (140/STM1 Switch. unit)
Alarm Description
Alarm Acronym
Unit Int
Equipment Controller Urg yes yes Nurg Ind Abn
Maintenance
Loss signal Line Alarm Indication Signal AU4 Loss of Pointer Unvailable AU Path Indicates AIS signal received on the UU Path Excessive Bit Error Rate (POHVC4) FarEnd Receive Failure (POHVC4) Signal Label mismatch Card Fail
LOS LAIS
Check line, Tributary side Check Remote Equipment Trib. side Replace Matrix 140Mbit/s Trib. side or
AU4LPO
yes
yes
Check All AU Path
EX BER(B3)
yes
Check line on VC4 path Aggregate side. Check remote equipment on Path which terminate VC4, Aggregate side Configuration error Replace unit
FERF (G1)
yes
C2Mism Card Fail misyes
yes yes
Unit inserted into slot Card equipped match with other type of unit Software mismatch SW MIS
yes
yes
Insert right unit
yes
yes
Update SW version
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 402 / 448
Optical Indication
Table 35. Alarms of the 3 x 34 / 3 x 45 Mbit/s Tributary
Optical Indication Alarm Description Alarm Acronym Unit Int Loss of 34/45 Mbit/s signal Unvailable TU Path Indicates AIS signal received on the TU Path Alarm Indication Signal TUAIS on TU3 VC3 FarEnd Receive FERF Failure VC3 Signal Label misSgLbMIS match Card Fail Card Fail yes yes yes LOS Equipment Controller Urg yes Nurg Ind Abn Check line, Tributary side Maintenance
yes
Check all TU Path
yes
Check other equipment on Path, Agg. side Check other equipment on Path, Agg. side Configuration error Replace unit
yes
Unit inserted into slot Card equipped mismatch with other type of unit Software mismatch Near 15 M TCA. Threshold cross alarm for 15 M thresholds set on Eq. conf. application Far 15 M TCA. Threshold cross alarm for 15 M thresholds on far end equipment Near DAY TCA Far DAY TCA SW MIS
yes
yes
Insert right unit
yes
yes
Update SW version Check VC3 path from the remote termination to the local termination
yes
yes
Check VC3 path from local termination to remote termination.
yes yes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 403 / 448
Table 36. Alarms of the 21 x 2 / 21 x 1.5 Mbit/s Tributary
Alarm Description
Alarm Acronym
Unit Int
Equipment Controller Urg yes yes yes Nurg Ind Abn
Maintenance
Loss of 2 Mbit/s signal. LOS NOTE Loss of frame. NOTE LOF
Check line, Tributary side Check line, Tributary side Check other equipment on Path, Agg. side
Alarm Indication Signal TUAIS on TU12 Unvailable AU Path Indicates AIS signal received on the UU Path VC12 FarEnd Receive Failure FERF Alarm criteria received from far end equipment VC12 Signal Label mismatch. Incompliant VC12 SgLbMIS signal label Card Fail Card Fail yes
yes
Check All AU Path
yes
Check remote equipment on Path, Agg. side.
yes
Configuration error
yes
Replace unit
Card mismatch. Unit inCard serted into slot equipped mismatch with other type of unit Software mismatch Near 15 M TCA. Threshold cross alarm for 15 M thresholds set on Eq. conf. application Far 15 M TCA. Threshold cross alarm for 15 M thresholds on far end equipment Near DAY TCA Far DAY TCA NOTE Only for selected clock reference
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
yes
yes
Insert right unit
SW MIS
yes
yes
Update SW version Check VC12 path from the remote termination to the local termination
yes
yes
Check VC12 path from local termination to remote termination.
yes yes
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 404 / 448
Optical Indication
Table 37. 3/2 TransMux & 5 x 2Mbit/s Trib. Unit alarms
Optical Indication Alarm Description Alarm Acronym Unit Int Loss of 2 Mbit/s Frame LOF (Note) Loss of Multiframe on LOF CRC4 (Note) Loss of incoming Trib. signal AIS received on Tx Trib. Unvailable AU Path Indicates AIS signal received on the AU Path VC12 FarEnd receive VC12 FER failure VC12 Signal label mismatch Loss of 8 Mbit/s frame received AIS 8 Mbit/s FERF 8 Mbit/s Loss of 34 Mbit/s incoming Trib. Loss 34 Mbit/s Frame 34Mbit/s AIS 34 Mbit/s FERF SgLbMIS LOF AIS FERF LOSS LOF AIS FERF yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Replace unit Insert right unit Update SW version Check VC12 path from the remote termination to the local termination Check VC12 path from local termination to remote termination. Check line on PDH 34 Mbit/s Trib. side yes yes yes yes Check FarEnd PDH equipment 8Mbit/s level LOSS AIS Tx Equipment Controller Urg yes Check Line Tributary side yes yes yes Check line Trib. side Check Lower hierarchical level equipment. Check all the TU path Check FarEnd equipment on path Configuration error Nurg Ind Abn Maintenance
yes
yes
Internal failure (hardware) Card Fail Unit inserted into slot Card equipped match with other type of unit Software mismatch Near 15 M TCA. Threshold cross alarm for 15 M thresholds set on Eq. conf. application
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
mis-
SW MIS
yes
Far 15 M TCA. Threshold cross alarm for 15 M thresholds on far end equipment
yes
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 405 / 448
Optical Indication Alarm Description Alarm Acronym Unit Int Near DAY TCA Far DAY TCA NOTE Only for selected clock reference Equipment Controller Urg yes yes Nurg Ind Abn Maintenance
Table 38. Matrix Alarms
Optical Indication Alarm Description Alarm Acronym Unit Int Excessive Bit Error Rate (POHVC4) FarEnd receive failure (VC4POH) Signal label mismatch EX BER(B3) Equipment Controller Urg yes Nurg Ind Abn Check line on VC4 Path. Check remote equipment on path which terminate VC4 Configuration error Check other equipment (likely configuration error) Check line on path yes yes yes yes yes Check other equipment on Path Replace unit Update SW version Maintenance
FERF (G1)
yes
C2 Mism
yes yes yes
Loss of TU12 Multiframe LOM(H4) on VC4 TU Loss of Pointer TU Alarm Indication Signal Card Fail Software mismatch TULOP TUAIS Card Fail SW MIS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 406 / 448
Table 39. Clock Reference Unit alarms
Optical Indication Alarm Description Alarm Acronym Unit Int Internal Reference # 1 to # 6 Internal Reference # 1 to # 6 External Reference # 1 to # 6 External Reference # 1 to # 6 Card Fail Loss Drift Loss Drift Card Fail yes yes yes yes Equipment Controller Urg Nurg yes yes yes yes yes Replace Unit Insert right unit Update SW version Check external reference and connection with the equipment Maintenance
Unit inserted into slot equip. with Card another type of Unit Mismatch Software mismatch SW MIS
Table 40. AUX/EOW Alarms
Optical Indication Alarm Description Alarm Acronym Unit Int Loss of G. 703 signal Card Fail LOS G. 703 Card Fail Misyes yes yes Equipment Controller Urg yes yes yes Nurg Check line G. 703 Replace Unit Insert right unit Update SW version Maintenance
Unit inserted into slot equip. with Card another type of Unit match Software mismatch SW MIS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 407 / 448
Table 41. ADM 600 INTERFACE Alarms
Alarm Description
Alarm Acronym
Unit Int
Equipment Controller Urg yes yes yes yes Nurg Ind Abn
Maintenance
Loss of Signal Loss of FRAME
LOS LOF
Check Link LINEDROP Shelf Check Link LINEDROP Shelf Check Link LINEDROP Shelf Check Link LINEDROP Shelf Check Link LINEDROP Shelf yes Check Link LINEDROP Shelf Replace unit Check other Equipment Replace Unit Insert right unit Update SW version
Multiplexer Section Alarm MS AIS Ind Sig. Multiplexer Section Far MS FERF End Rec. F Multiplexer Section Excess. BIT Error Rate on MS EXBER B2 AU4 Alarm Ind. Sign. on AUAIS the Path Transmitter Fail Loss of Multiframe Card Fail MIT LOM CARD FAIL misyes yes yes yes yes (1) yes yes yes yes yes
Unit inserted into slot Card equipped with other type match of unit Software mismatch SW MIS
(1) Only with the ADM 600 Interface not protected, otherwise with ADM 600 1+1 EPS protected the NURG lamp will be activated
Table 42. STM 1 E MODULE Alarms
Optical Indication Alarm Description Alarm Acronym Unit Int Card Fail CARD FAIL yes Equipment Controller Urg Nurg Ind Abn Replace Unit Maintenance
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 408 / 448
Optical Indication
Table 43. Consequent Action Aggregate STM4/STM16
Consequent Action Alarm Fault AIS RSOH AIS MSOH AIS AU4 TRIB Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes FERF G1 FERF MS PPS LS
LOS LOF MSAIS MSEXBER AU4AIS AU4LOP EXBER (B3)
Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Table 44. Consequent Action Trib. STM1 (140/STM1 switch. trib.)
Consequent Action Alarm Fault AIS RSOH AIS MSOH AIS AU4 AGG Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes FERF G1 STM1 LINE FERF G1 AGG FERF MS PPS
LOS LOF MSAIS MSEXBER AU4LOP AU4AIS UPA
Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 409 / 448
Table 45. Consequent Action Optic STM1 Trib.
Alarm Fault
AIS RSOH
AIS MSOH Yes Yes Yes Yes
AIS AU4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
FERF G1 STM1 LINE
FERF G1 AGG
FERF MS Yes Yes Yes Yes
PPS
LS
LOS LOF MSAIS MSEXBER AU4LOP AU4AIS UPA
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Table 46. Consequent Action 3 x 34 / 3 x 45 Mbit/s trib.
Consequent Action Alarm Fault AIS OUT LOS AIS UPA SgLBUnequ SgLbMIS Yes Yes Yes Yes AIS C3 Yes Yes Yes Yes FERF G1 PPS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 410 / 448
Consequent Action
Table 47. Consequent Action Trib. 140 (140/STM1 switch. trib.)
Consequent Action Alarm Fault AIS C4 LOS AIS UPA C2Unequ C2Mism Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes AIS TRIB LINE AIS C12/3 FERF V5 FERF G1 PPS
Table 48. Consequent Action 21 x 2 / 21 x 1.5 Mbit/s trib.
Consequent Action Alarm Fault AIS TRIB LINE LOS LOF AIS TU UPA SgLBUnequ SgLbMIS Yes Yes Yes Yes AIS C12 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes FERF V5 PPS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 411 / 448
Table 49. Consequent Action 34/2 TransMux and 5 x 2Mbit/s Tributary
Alarm Fault
AIS TRIB LINE
AIS C12/3 Yes Yes Yes
FERF V5
FERF G1
PPS
2Mbit/s Loss 2Mbit/s LOF 2Mbit/s AIS 2Mbit/s SgLbUnequip. 2Mbit/s SgLbMIS Unavailable TU path 34Mbit/s LOSS 34Mbit/s LOF 34Mbit/s AIS 34Mbit/s UNEQ SgLb 34Mbit/s SgLbMIS 34Mbit/s UPA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 412 / 448
Consequent Action
Table 50. Consequent Action MATRIX
MATRIX Consequent Action Alarm Fault AIS AU4 FERF G1 VC4 Yes FERF G1 VC3 FERF G1 V5 AIS TU PPS
AU4UPA EXBER (B3) TUUPA C2UNEQ C2MISM LOM (H4) TULOP TUAIS
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Table 51. Consequent Action ADM 600 Interface
Consequent Action AIS AU4 LOS LOF MSAIS MSEXBER AU4AIS LOM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes FERF MS Yes Yes Yes Yes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 413 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
414 / 448
5 UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPARE

No particular indication is given as to spares handling which is left to the Maintenance Administration.
The replacement procedures are executed as follows: Hardware set the spare unit exactly as the unit to replace. The setting options are specified in the tables on the Circuit Schematics which relate the operations to achieve with the setting, and on the Layout drawings which indicate the exact location of all the setting arrangements. The cited documents are enclosed in the TECHNICAL HANDBOOK. Simply replace those units not provided with any software setting Replace those units having software setting (except for the Equipment Controller unit). Should the program release of the spare unit be compatible with that of the faulty one, the unit will become operative after having automatically downloaded the software setting options from the Equipment Controller. Should the release differ, then by means of the Craft Terminal download the software release updated on the replaced unit. Following the indications of the General Procedure Section 2.2 on page 433. With regard to the Equipment Controller unit refer to the following Par. 5.1 on page 415
5.1 Equipment Controller unit replacement

Various procedures are utilized to replace a faulty controller unit (for both ESCT and SMEC 2 ), they depend on the type of spares available: Spares belonging to the same type of equipment and with SW release identical to the unit to replace. Spares belonging to the same type of equipment but with SW release differing from that of the unit to replace. Spares belonging to other types of equipment or unknown. In the of the case of ESCT Unit the subunit Memory espansion M8 F2R must be equipped.
The flowcharts of Figure 278. on page 416 and Figure 279. on page 417 illustrates the procedures to follow for each above mentioned type of spare unit. The procedures aim at replacing the faulty unit without causing configuration changes and/or unwanted faults. Therefore, while replacing the Equipment Controller unit the equipment is regularly operating except for the functions carried out by unit to be replaced (the switching operation of the plesiochronous tributaries too).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 415 / 448
REMOVE THE FAULTY EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER UNIT
I11 OPEN (ON), I1 2 CLOSED (OFF)

TO FORCE THE CONFIGURATION DATA AUTOMATIC RESET
INSERT THE SPARE UNIT INTO THE ASSIGNED SLOT
THE RESET IS AUTOMATICALLY PERFORMED DURING THE CONTROLLER RESTART CONFIGURATION DATA THE URG ALARM LED AND THE UNIT ALRM LED ( )ARE LIGHTING UP
AT THE END OF THIS PROCEDURE THAT LASTS UTMOST 1 MIN. THE ABN LED LIGHTING SHOWS THE CONFIGURATION DATA RESET COMPLETION
CHECK THAT THE MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE WITH RIGHT RELEASE HAS BEEN INSTALLED ON THE PC IF OTHERWISE, LOAD IT AS INSTRUCTED IN THE COMMISSIONING SECTION
SPARE: SAME RELEASE
SPARE: SAME EQUIPMENT DIFFERENT RELEASE
SPARE: DIFFERENT EQUIPMENT OR UNKNOWN SOFTWARE SOURCE
C A B
EXTRACT THE EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER UNIT
DO YOU WANT TO UPLOAD CONNECTION DATA TO SET UP THE LINK WITH OS/RECT ? NO SET THE SPARE EQUIP. CONTR. UNIT WITH THE DIPSWITCH
YES
SET THE SPARE EQUIP. CONTR. UNIT WITH THE DIPSWITCH
I11 OPEN , I12 OPEN

INSERT AGAIN THE SPARE EQUIPMENT CONTROL. UNIT. CHECK IN THE MAINT. MEMORY THE END OF DATA UPLOAD
I11 CLOSE , l12 CLOSE
INSERT AGAIN THE EQUIP. CONTROLLER UNIT
EXTRACT EQUIP. CONTROLLER UNIT
CONNECT THE PC AND ACTIVATE THE MANAGEMENT SW AS INSTRUCTED IN THE COMMISSIONING SECTION
SET THE SPARE EQUIP. CONTR. UNIT WITH THE DIPSWITCH
I11 CLOSE , l12 CLOSE

INSERT AGAIN THE EQUIP. CONTROLLER UNIT
LAUNCH THE CONFIGURATION FILES THROUGH THE VARIOUS CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS NOTE : ALWAYS SEND FIRST THE CONNECTION CONFIGURATION FILE, THEN THE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION ONE AND FINALLY THE REST.
CHECK THE OS/RECT CONNECTION. THE OS/RECT OPERATOR IS ABLE TO SEND THE CONFIGURATION FILES
NOTE:
SEE NEXT FIGURE
END OF PROCEDURE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 278. EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER Unit replacement 1
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 416 / 448
HWPRESET THE SPARE UNIT IDENTICAL TO THE ONE BEING REPLACED EXCEPT FOR THE I1 DIPSWITCH :
THE EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE WITH RIGHT RELEASE MUST BE AVAILABLE
THE EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE WITH RIGHT RELEASE AND THE SWPEQ. CONTROLLER SWDL PRODUCT SOFTWARE MUST BE AVAILABLE
IS THE EQUIPMENT SW WITH RIGHT RELEASE LOADED ON THE PC? YES
NO
IS THE EQUIPMENT SW WITH THE RIGHT RELEASE INSTALLED ON THE PC? YES
NO
LOAD IT ON THE PC AS INSTRUCTED IN THE PARA 2.1 OF THE GENERAL PROCEDURE SECTION THE SWPEQ CONTROLLER SWDL PRODUCT SOFTWARE MUST BE AVAILABLE
INSTALL IT ON THE PC AS INSTRUCTED IN THE PARA 2.1 OF THE GENERAL PROCEDURE SECTION
IS THE MANAGEMENT SW LOADED ON THE PC IN THE SAME RELEASE LIKE THAT OF THE SPARE UNIT ?
NO
IS THE MANAGEMENT SW AVAILABLE ?
NO
YES YES LOAD IT ON THE PC AS INSTRUCTED IN THE CHAPTER 3 OF THE COMMISSIONING SECTION IS THE SWPEQUIPMENT CONTROLLER SWDL PRODUCT INSTALLED ON THE PC? YES INSTALL ATION OF THE PC AS DESCRIBED IN THE PARA 2.3.1 IN THE GENERAL PROCEDURES SECTION NO
CONNECT THE PC TO THE EQUIPMENT AND ACTIVATE THE MANAGEMENT SW AS INSTRUCTED IN THE COMMISSIONING SECTION
ACTIVATE THE SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD APPLICATION AND DOWNLOAD THE RIGHT EQUIPMENT RELEASE AS INSTRUCTED IN THE GENERAL PRODUCERS SECTION, PARA 2.1
CONNECT THE PC TO THE EQUIPMENT, ACTIVATE THE SWPEQ. CONTROLLER SWDL PRODUCT, AND PROCEED AS INSTRUCTED IN THE PARA 2.3.2 OF THE GENERAL PROCEDURES SECTION TO DOWNLOAD THE RIGHT EQUIPMENT RELEASE
AT THE END OF DOWNLOADING THE RIGHT RELEASE MANAGEMENT SW IS ACTIVED. EXECUTE THE LOGIN PROCEDURE
NOTE:
SEE PREVIOUS FIGURE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 279. EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER Unit replacement 2
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 417 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
418 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
GENERAL PROCEDURES
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
419 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
420 / 448
1 INTRODUCTION
This section deals with the operations concerning the Software download procedures.
2 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
The following details the operations inherent to software download. Software download permits to softwareload the equipment thereby facilitating release version updating following product evolution. The software download operations utilize the applicative software kit SWP1651 SM of the new Release containing the equipment software program. To software download: install the SWP1651 SM of the new Release application on the P.C. load the SWP1651 SM of the new Release application on the equipment
To execute the download use is made of the SWPCRAFT TERMINAL 1651SM applicative. The type of software download operations depend on operating phase they belong. Specifically : Updating the software version during the inservice phase (OPERATION) and with Rel.w 2.1, following the indications stated in para. SW DOWNLOAD FROM REL. 2.1 on page 422 In order to upgrade the Equipment SWP starting from Rel. 1.2., an intermediate step before Rel.2.1 is necessary. ( refer to Rel. 2.1 Operator s Handbook.). Unit replacement with a spare or extensions with different SW version (MAINTENANCE PHASE). Two cases are defined: EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER replacement. The sequence of operations is carried out following the procedure indicated in Figure 278. on page 416 and in Figure 279. on page 417. In Figure 279. reference are made to the download operation presented in the following paragraphs 2.1 on page 422 and 2.3.on page 434. Replacement or extension of units other than Equipment Controller The operations are described in the paragraph 2.2 on page 433 .
The software product utilizes the Windows system. The information reported in para. 4 INTRODUCTION on page 49 of the DESCRIPTIONS section is also applicable to instruments, commands and windows handling. PC startup and windows system control are specified in chapter 2 on page 353 of the COMMISSIONING section.
The units with Software Mismatch indication have different software version.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
The Software Download applicative contained in the SWP CRAFT TERMINAL 1651SM is described in para. 4.9 on page 303 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD APPLICATION of the Description Section.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 421 / 448
2.1 SW Download from REL. equal/greater than 2.1

N.B. Instead of the number of the release, are here indicated the terms previous or old for the release already present on the equipment and the terms running or new for the release to download on the equipment. The same procedure is used when downloading different versions of the same release. PRELIMINARY CHECK BEFORE DOWNLOADING Through Craft Terminal check that unstable Alarms are absent and no unit is affected with CARD NOT RESPONDING or AUTOMATIC LASER SHUT DOWN conditions. In these circumstances , after having solved the problem, select the CLEAR option in the Maintenance Memories application and then close the Craft Terminal management applicative. Verify that no Remote Force Command is active and that the ABN alarm is lightingoff.
Verify that the AREA ADDRESS of the OS in the OS configuration of the Local configuration application is correct.
All backward Download or backward Activation of SW version must be done on congruent Units.
The following procedure must be used to properly install the Sw package taken into account the Equipment Controller type installed on the ADM ( ESCT or SMEC2) and which SW release is running. If the Equipment controller to download is an ESCT with SW release w 2.1.00 and t 2.1.85 it must be loaded for a first time with the new light SWP 1651SM as described starting from the following point 2) up to point 7). Further download can be performed as indicated for the SMEC2 Unit. The ESCT unit with the Rel w 2.1.85, or SMEC2 unit must be downloaded with the complete SWP ,following the procedure of the next point1 ) then jump to the point 6 ) . The software version of the units can be checked in the file SWKIT.TXT of the SWP 1651SM, diskette 1 as far as the complete package is concerned. For the light package the file SWKIT.TXT to be read is contained in disk 3. The first row pertains to the Equipment software version to be loaded. 1) Install the complete SWP 1651SM package of the new release on the PC, (equipment SW applicative) using the following floppies order : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 by performing the following operations : a) b) c) d)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Insert the first diskette of the sequence in driver A Open Windows File Manager and select driver A. Activate the CTSFMNG.EXE file The figure Install SW Package appears; by clicking on the same title the screen of Figure 280. on page 424 is displayed. By clicking on the Confirm label the installation begins. Sequentially insert the other diskette when asked for the next one till the complete installation.
e) f)
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 422 / 448
2)
install the light SWP 1651SM package on the PC using the following floppies in sequence : 3, 4, 5, 6, 2 by following the a ) to f ) sequence of operation previously described. Download the light SWP on the Equipment and activated it, as described in the following points: g) Run the management applicative on the PC. Open the management applicative and select the SW Download application, (see Figure 281. on page 425).The Figure 282. on page 425 appears. To obtain the equipment downloading screen carry out the following operations: h) Clicking on Software Download Menu of Figure 282. on page 425, Figure 283. on page 426 will appear. Click on SW Downloading and then Figure 284. on page 426 appears. Click on Download, Figure 285. on page 427 is displayed.
3)
Delete the two figures representing the NE release on the NE type field that must be 1651SM. By selecting the SW Package SELECTION a list of the SW packages installed will be displayed. Select the SW version pertaining to the package to be downloaded (light or complete). Select Code Present for downloading the cards present on the equipment. By selecting Forced Download all units will be downloaded even if they are in new release. If no selection is made only the units of a different release will be downloaded. By selecting Implicit Activation at the end of download the new SW will become automatically operative. If this selection is not made, at the end of the Download, activate the new SW by entering the Software option, then the SW Management to be activated. N.B. The Server identification selection must be Server on ECT
i) j)
Select SW new package Select Download at the bottomleft of the screen indicated in Figure 285. on page 427, and after acknowledgement continue to download. The Download progress screen is displayed showing Download status. At the end of the procedure the indication Download completed successfully will be displayed.
ATTENTION After having started the SW Download the Operator may wait up to 15 min. to acknowledge a message by the system k) Check in the SW Information Application in Figure 286. on page 427 that the new version has been enabled and activated. Figure 286. on page 427 is obtained by clicking on SW Package Information on the screen of Figure 285. on page 427.
4)
If the download of the light sw package is aborted , verify in the Maintenance memory application if the cause is a SW DL Err Programming FEP SWDL Group event, User commands Group entity. If true, go on without problems to point 6 ) . If not, try again to perform the Download, starting from the first point and if it fails again activate a trouble shooting procedure. If the download is successfully performed, go to point 6 ) . Proceed as indicated in points g ) to k ) to download the complete sw package When download is completed, signoff the Craft terminal Management applicative and launch it again.
5) 6)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
7)
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 423 / 448
8)
Recover the configuration files relevant to the previous release through the RECEIVE function to update the Craft Terminal whit the Configuration files of the NE current Release.
N.B.
During the activation of the new downloaded SW, the NE active configuration files are automatically converted by the Controller. If the equipment is provided with the VC4 Matrix Units, the new downloaded SW adds a new configuration table referred to the 140 Mbit/s Tributaries port enabling in which all the ports are enabled. The other configuration files on CT, if any, (and not active upon the activation of the downloaded new SWP) to be used with the new SW Release, must be converted through the ADM.EXE file mentioned at para 2.1.1 on page 428. If necessary, they must be sent to the equipment according to the following sequence: firstly the connection files and then the equipment ones.
Figure 280. Install Software Package
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 424 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R Figure 281. Application Choice Software Download (data are an example)
Figure 282. Software Download main screen (data are an example)
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
425 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R Figure 283. Software Download menu (data are an example)

Figure 284. SW downloading choice (data are an example)
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
426 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.152 R Figure 285. Software downloading application (data are an example)
Figure 286. SW information (data are an example)
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
427 / 448
2.1.1 Conversion Files from the previous Release to Rel. 2.7 As cited in para 2.1, point 8 ) on page 424, the active configuration files upon the activation of the downloaded new SW Release, are automatically converted. After the equipment download it is possible to convert the Configuration Files not active during the ACTIVATION of the new SWP, from the previous release format to the new release one. The conversion program is called adm.exe and it is located in the directory: c:\<your_directory>\<equipment_name_and_rel> . Where <your_directory> is the directory where the SWP has been loaded. The default is c:\alcatel\<equipment_name_and_rel> The following chap. 2.1.1.1 describes the sequence for the Connection Configuration file conversion and the chap. 2.1.1.2 on page 432 applies to all other type of Configuration files (Local, Routing Table, Drop Shelf, Equipment).
At the end of the conversion procedure, remember to send to the Equipment the Configuration Files just converted, following the sequence: firstly the Connection ad then the Equipment ones.
2.1.1.1 Connection Configuration Files conversion from the previous Release to Rel. 2.7 Having downloaded the equipment in Rel. 2.7 and with the SWP of the same release on the Craft Terminal, proceed as follows: a) Look for the conversion program called adm.exe as indicated in the previous chap. 2.1.1. In this example for the current Release, the directory: c:\ alcatel\1651sm26\adm.exe is to be selected. activating the adm.exe program, the Figure 287. appears .
b)
Figure 287. Conversion program first screen
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 428 / 448
c) d)
open the FILE option: convert application It appears a window that lists all the Configuration Applications as shown in Figure 288.
Figure 288. Conversion program Configuration Application Selection
e)
activating the Connection Configuration Application, the Figure 289. will be shown.
Figure 289. Conversion program Old version of Connection Config. file selection f)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Look for the Old version of description file of Connection Configuration (.b56 extension) to be converted in the current release, select it and press OK.
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 429 / 448
g)
h)
press OK.
Figure 290. Conversion program Old version of Equipment Config. file selection to be associated to the Connect. Config. File i) It appears the Figure 291. using which the User must now attribute a name to the Connection Configuration file to be converted in the current Release (new version), and then press OK.
sm27
27
Figure 291. Conversion program New version of Connection Config. file choice
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 430 / 448
After a waiting popup it appears a table in which the User must select the description file of the Old version of the Equipment Configuration (.b60 extension, see Figure 290. in order to associate this Old version of the Equipment Config. File, to the Old version Connection Config. File, selected in the previous point f ) .
j)
It follows the window of Figure 292. in which it is possible to add comments about the new converted file, and press OK.
27
2.7
Figure 292. Conversion program New version converted file comments k) The OK message of Figure 293. ends the conversion procedure. The conversion program can be minimized to allows eventual further utilization starting from the point c ).
Figure 293. Conversion program Acknowledgement message
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 431 / 448
2.1.1.2 Configuration Files conversion for all Applications other than Connection Configuration
For the Config. Files different from Connection ones ( that means :Local, Routing Table, Drop Shelf, Equipment Config. Files) the procedure will be described following the previous chapter 2.1.1.1 on page 428 as far as it is applicable . Having downloaded the equipment in Rel. 2.7 and with the SWP of the same release on the Craft Terminal, proceed as indicated in the previous chapter 2.1.1.1 from the first point a ) up to the point d ). Apply the points e ) and f ) to the Configuration File other than Connection. After the OK command the conversion is achieved. Then jump to the point i ) to give a name to the new converted file. Also this procedure ends with the points j ) and k ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 432 / 448
2.2 Replacement or Extensions of Units other than Equipment Controller, with no updated SW
This condition is possible when handling spares with other ADM equipment or with other releases of the same equipment. Proceed as follows: Make sure that the management software is available, if otherwise install it as specified in the INSTALLATION section, chapter 3 on page 355. Make sure that the equipment software has been installed, if otherwise proceed to install it as specified in para. 2.1 on page 422. Insert the unit in a free slot on the shelf and equip it through the Equipment Configuration application. From the Application Choice menu ( Figure 281. on page 425 ) select Software Download: Figure 282. on page 425 will appear. Click on Software Download Menu to obtain the screen of Figure 283. on page 426. Click on SW Down loading, the screen of Figure 284. on page 426 will appear. Select Download, and than Figure 285. on page 427 (SW Downloading) will be displayed. Figure 285. on page 427 permits to select the following: Code Present Implicit activation N.E. Type: set the indication 1651SM, without release indication SW package selection: select the running software N.B. The Server identification selection must be Server on ECT
Dont select Forced Download
Click on Download label. The screen of Download Progress is presented showing the download status. At the end of the procedure the screen displays the indication of Activation Completed Successfully.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 433 / 448
2.3 Spare Equipment Controller download, with unknown software

The sequence of operation for Equipment Controller replacement with spare, is presented in the flowchart of Figure 278. on page 416 and Figure 279. on page 417. This chapter describes the use of the SWPEq. Controller SWDL This applicative must be used when a spare Equipment Controller unit has to be installed on the equipment, when the SW release on the spare unit differs from the current one, and his management software is not known or not available. This applicative gives direct access to the SW download of the equipments management SW. Through it the Equipment Controller unit will be updated to the SW being currently used. Proceed as indicated in the paragraph below.
2.3.1 Installing the SWP equipment controller SWDL applicative on the P.C. Insert the SW KIT Equipment Controller SWDL diskette into the disk unit (A or B). Enter command: WIN A:\SETUP Upon receiving a transitory window, the screen of Figure 294. on page 436 will appear displaying the products general data. To obtain information on installation data select HELP (AIUTO) By selecting EXIT (ESCI) the screen of Figure 295. on page 437 is displayed, and then by clicking on the EXIT (ESCI) key the screen of Figure 296. on page 438 will appear. By clicking on the OK key, the procedure is aborted. By clicking onto CONTINUE (CONTINUA) the screen of Figure 294. on page 436 is accessed again. Select CONTINUE (CONTINUA) while working on screen of Figure 294. on page 436 to obtain that of Figure 297. on page 439 into which the DIRECTORY will be inserted. The default directory appears. By clicking on the EXIT (ESCI) key, the screen of Figure 295. on page 437 will appear hence aborting the procedure. By selecting HELP (AIUTO) further information on installation is obtained. Click on the CONTINUE (CONTINUA) key to startoff the software download program illustrated in Figure 298. on page 440.
This screen gives the possibility to suspend download by clicking on the suspend (sospendi) key, a confirm message will subsequently appear. After a transitory indication, the screen of Figure 299. on page 441 will be automatically displayed stating that installation is completed. By clicking on the OK key the directory is created specifying the icons that are automatically present on the Windows Manager Program (see screen of Figure 300. on page 442 ). If installation is not correct, messages will be sent to the operator.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 434 / 448
2.3.2 Downloading the running release on the equipment

The Read me icon permits to obtain information needed to execute the application. To access the Download Application sequentially click the icons namely, Communication, Server and Manager. Figure 301. on page 442 will appear.
The sequence to follow is the same stated in para 2.1 on page 422,depending on the type of Equipment Controller and on the SW release running.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 435 / 448
INSTALLATION PROGRAM PRODUCTS INSTALLATION THIS PROGRAM EXECUTES THE COMPLETE PRODUCT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
CONTINUE
EXIT
HELP
Figure 294. Initial setup SW Download
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 436 / 448
INSTALLATION PROGRAM INSTALLATION INTERRUPTED INSTALLATION INCOMPLETE. PRODUCT WILL NOT BE PROPERLY INSTALLED IF YOU QUIT NOW. HOWEVER THE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAN BE LAUNCHED AGAIN
CONTINUE
EXIT
Figure 295. Download installation interruption

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 437 / 448
INSTALLATION PROGRAM INCOMPLETE INSTALLATION THE PROGRAM HAS NOT BEEN COMPLETELY INSTALLED LAUNCH THE SETUP PROGRAM AGAIN
OK
Figure 296. Installation incomplete
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 438 / 448
INSTALLATION PROGRAM PRODUCTS INSTALLATION THE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE WILL COPY THE FILE INTO THE FOLLOWING DIRECTORY: PATH : C:\ECT\NECTAS\V340
ANY PREVIOUS VERSION WILL BE OVER WRITTEN
CONTINUE
EXIT
HELP
Figure 297. Directory editing

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 439 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
FILE DESTINATION INSTALLATION PROGRAM A:\SR.SDFSRV.EXE SETUP C:\ECT\NECTAS\V340\COMSFINT.EXE V1.0.1
01
957.140.152 R
SUSPEND
Figure 298. Installation in progress
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
440 / 448
INSTALLATION PROGRAM COMPLETE INSTALLATION THE INSTALLATION HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED FOR FURTHER INFORMATION SEE THE OPERATORS HANDBOOK
OK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 299. Installation completed
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 441 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 300. Installation icons
01
957.140.152 R
Figure 301. Software Download main screen
3AL 38249 AA AA
448
442 / 448
3 UPGRADING PROCEDURE FROM REL. 2.5/2.5.1 C TO REL. 2.7/2.7.1

These procedures describe the correct setting steps to follow in order to upgrade the Equipment at the current Release for which the use of new 16x16 Matrix unit becomes mandatory instead of the Full Matrix Unit and the Connection Card Unit is no more to be used.
3.1 Substitution of Connection Card with new 16x16 matrix Unit

In this operation all VC4 DropInsert will be lost. Only the VC4 Passthrough of the Node will be saved. It would be possible to save the local DropInsert by means of a temporary network configuration putting them in Passthrough in another Node of the Network. In practice apply the following steps: 1) Substitute the two Connection Cards with a new 16x16 Matrix Unit card equipped as Matrix Main ( if the Matrix EPS is desired, configure a second 16x16 Matrix Unit card equipped as Matrix Spare) Send the new Equipment Configuration File describing the new configuration. If the AS&C main screen shows a SW MISMATCH indication on the 16x16 Matrix Unit, then Download them with the Rel 2.5 C , otherwise go to the step 4 ). Configure the Node with the DropInsert connection if needed, keeping into account the new Matrix Units installed. Recovered in this way the traffic, Download the Equipment with the new Rel 2.7 .
2) 3)
4)
5)
3.2 Substitution of the Full Matrix Unit with new 16x16 matrix Unit
1) With the Equipment still in Rel. 2.5 C, substitute the old Full Matrix Stand by Unit with the new 16x16 Matrix. Send the new Equipment Configuration File describing the new configuration. If the AS&C main screen shows a SW MISMATCH on the 16x16 Matrix Unit, then Download it with the Rel 2.5 C, otherwise go to the step 4 ). Extract the Main Full Matrix Unit activating in this manner the EPS protection that put into service the 16x16 Matrix Unit just downloaded. Insert the second 16x16 Matrix Unit and repeat for this unit the previous step 2 ) and if needed the step 3 ). Download all the Equipment with the Release 2.7
2) 3)
4)
5)
6)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 443 / 448
3.3 DVB and 21x2 Mbit/s Retiming Units spare parts management
Para. 3.3.1 describes the insertion of a Rel. 2.5 C downloaded spare unit, into the current release equipment. Para. 3.3.2. describes the reverse condition, i.e. the insertion of a Rel. 2.7 spare unit, into a Rel. 2.5 C equipment. The following procedure refers to the DVB Tributary but is also applied to the 21x2Mb unit with Retiming. 3.3.1 Insertion of a Rel.2.5 C spare unit into a Rel. 2.7 equipment Place the spare DVB unit into the equipment and access to the Craft Terminal functions. In the Equipment Configuration application configure the relative slot as it was assigned to a 3x45 Mb unit. In the AS&C application verify that an SW Mismatch indication is presented on the same slot. Download the unit inserted into Rel. 2.7 and activate it. In the AS&C application verify that a CARD MISMATCH indication is displayed on the same slot. In the Equipment Configuration application configure the involved slot as it was assigned to the DVB unit. Send the new configuration file.
3.3.2 Insertion of a Rel.2.7 spare unit into a Rel. 2.5 C equipment Place the spare DVB unit into the equipment and access to the Craft Terminal functions. In the Equipment Configuration application configure the relative slot as it was assigned to a 3x45 Mb unit. Send the new configuration file. In the AS&C application verify that a Card Mismatch indication is presented on the same slot. Download the unit inserted into Rel. 2.5 C and then activate it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 444 / 448
4 1651SM RING NETWORK UPGRADING INTO 1661SMC RING NETWORK 4.1 Introduction
The procedure described below is utilized to upgrade a twofiber link from the current release of 1651SM to 1661SMC without loss of traffic. This means modifying the line characteristics of the N.E., i.e., from 1651 SM to 1661 SMC, with subsequent replacement of the STM 4 Aggregate units with the STM 16 Aggregate units. ATTENTION : This upgrading is not allowed with REACT or EACT SWP . This procedure is intended for ring protected connections. It is also possible to upgrade pointtopoint connections but with no protection mechanism enabled , the traffic will be lost for the time necessary to upgrade the equipments.
4.2 Actions and preliminary verifications for 1651SM

In order to avoid temporary loss of traffic ( max. 30 seconds ), depending to the AU4s allocation and the composition ( structured or not structured ) of the data streams managed by STM4 Aggregates on the nodes terminating a path, some workarounds, concerning the Connections Configuration, can be adopted . It is to be considered that for a successful result of this procedure, the main card has to be active wherever ( that is for wichever kind of card ) the EPS protection scheme is enabled. In the following cases of AU4s connection, the amount of traffic loss is limited to switch time. The need of a possible workaround is indicated: [1] [2] All AU4s ( from #1 to #4 ) not structured (HO) connected: No workaround is required.
First two or three AU4s ( #1 and #2 or #1, #2 and #3 ) not structured (HO) connected: No workaround is required. Four AU4s ( from #1 to #4 ) structured (LO) connected : Configure the Enhanced connectivity mode on each AU4. Less than four AU4s structured (LO) connected: Realize TUs d/i prot connections in Enhanced connectivity mode on the available ( empty ) AU4s so to fill all the line capacity (STM4) and configure the Enhanced connectivity mode also on the already connected AU4s.
[3]
[4]
In the cases of AU4s connection below reported, a temporary traffic loss ( max. 15 seconds ) could occur when updating Equipment Configuration file ( see par. 1.3 ) . As regards these cases, the upgrade procedure is suggested to be done in not congested traffic period ( see par. 1.3 for more details ). [5] Four AU4s structured and not structured connected : Configure the Enhanced connectivity mode on each structured AU4. N.B. The workaround just described, is valid only if : all the managed traffic is connected either to the Tributary cards from Tr1 to Tr4 or to the Tributary cards from Tr5 to Tr8.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 445 / 448
structured connections have to be allocated on the first AU4s ( from #1 on ) and not structured connections have to be allocated immediately after the AUs structured and, among the not structured connections, the passthrough ones must be the last to be allocated.
[6]
Less than four AU4s structured and not structured connected : Configure the Enhanced connectivity mode on each structured AU4 and realize AU4s d/i prot ( that is not structured ) on the available AU4s so to fill all the line capacity (STM4). N.B. The workaround just described, is valid only if : all the managed traffic is connected either to the Tributary cards from Tr#1 to Tr#4 or to the Tributary cards from Tr#5 to Tr#8 structured connections have to be allocated on the first AU4s ( from #1 on ) and not structured connections have to be allocated immediately after the AUs structured and, among the not structured connections, the passthrough ones must be the last to be allocated.
The upgrade from STM4 Aggregate to STM16 Aggregate ( see par. 1.3 ) leads to temporary (30 seconds) loss of traffic in the following cases of AU4s connection: [7] Less than four AU4s not strutctured with, at least, either AU4#1 or #2 or #3 not connected or in passthrough connection.
[8]
AU4s structured and not structured ( the whole four or less than four ) connected to tributary cards belonging to different benches (that is distributed towards the whole group of tributaries from Tr#1 to Tr#8).
As previously suggested about cases [5] and [6], also in these cases, the upgrade procedure is suggested to be done in not congested traffic period ( see par. 1.3 for more details ).
4.3 Upgrade
See Figure 302. on page 448
The following, details the operations inherent to upgrade a 1651SM ring network into 1661SMC ring network in order to give a sequence of actions that must be followed in the substitution of the Aggregates. 1st step Load the STM16 Aggregates to be used for upgrading phase with the Connection Configurations shown in Table 52. on page 448. and with the Laser ON condition active. This operation must be done on stand alone equipment not belonging to the ring under upgrading, equipped with Full Matrix and eight STM1 Tribs to check the working connections and, with the main card active wherever ( that is for wichever kind of card ) the EPS protection scheme is enabled. 2nd step Disconnect the Section # 1 (Pattern Loss/AIS<50ms), then extract STM4 Aggregate West of the NE #1 and insert the STM16 Aggregate card, just provisioned as East Aggregate on the standalone equipment. Extract STM4 Aggregate East of the NE#2 and insert the STM16 Aggregate card provisioned as West Aggregate. After an optical power check, connect the fibers. 3rd step 01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 446 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Disconnect the Section # 2 (Pattern Loss/AIS<50ms and no alarms present on struct. AU 4s), then extract STM4 Aggregate West of the NE #2 and insert the STM16 Aggregate card provisioned as East Aggregate on the standalone equipment. Extract STM4 Aggregate East of the NE#3 and insert the STM16 Aggregate card provisioned as West Aggregate . After an optical power check, connect the fibers. 4th step Using the local Craft Terminal send in NE # 2 the relevant new Equipment Configuration (Pattern Loss/AIS<50ms) and Local Configuration for DCC utility. 5th step Repeat the steps 3rd and 4th for the Section # 3 , that is, NE # 3 and NE#4 up to the Section # nth , that is, NE # nth and NE#1. Last step Using the RECT / EM tool and starting from the NE#1, remove, if desired, first, the Enhanced Connectivity mode from the structured AU4s before configured, then ( i.e. in a second step ), the fictitious connections eventually installed to fill to STM4 capacity line. Finally, send in each NEs the relevant new connections to recover the complete new ring configuration . Consider that, in general, and according to the needs of the user, the physical substitution of STM4 Aggregate cards with STM16 Aggregate cards ( below described in 2nd, 3rd and 5th steps ) can be executed at the same step, providing, in a second time, for updating the Equipment Configuration file of each node ( with consistent STM16 Aggregates configuration ) through the RECT / EM. In this case: Complete 1st step by provisioning the STM16 Aggregates to be used with the relevant Local Configuration for DCC utility and provision, also, each node of the ring to update with relevant Local Configuration for DCC utility, about both STM4 ( already enabled ) and STM16 interfaces. Then , do not execute the 4th step, and when all the STM16 cards are inserted ( not configured, yet ), go to Last step, updating first, each node of the ring with the consistent STM16 Aggregate cards configuration, then the Connections Configuration as, already described.
This way to realized the procedure is useful in those cases of AU4s connection ( above described in par. 1.2 ), where the upgrade of aggregate cards could produce a temporary traffic loss: after the physical substitution of aggregate cards, the user can decide the right moment when updating the Equipment Configuration, minimizing the trouble due to possible loss of traffic.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 447 / 448
Table 52. Connection Configurations to be used in the upgrade operations
STM 1 TRIB TRIB # 1 TRIB # 2 TRIB # 3 TRIB # 4 TRIB # 5 TRIB # 6 TRIB # 7 TRIB # 8
AU4 NOT STRUCTURED AU4 # 1 AU4 # 2 AU4 # 3 AU4 # 4 AU4 # 1 AU4 # 2 AU4 # 3 AU4 # 4
MODE D / I Bidir Unp E D / I Bidir Unp E D / I Bidir Unp E D / I Bidir Unp E D / I Bidir Unp W D / I Bidir Unp W D / I Bidir Unp W D / I Bidir Unp W
section # 1 Agg. W E NE # 1 Agg. STM 4 NE # 2 Agg. STM 4 NE # 3 W E Agg. STM 4 section # 2 Agg. STM 4 W NE # nth STM 4 Agg. STM 4 E
section # nth
W Agg. STM 4
Agg. STM 4 E
section # 3
Figure 302. 1651SM ring network to be chanced in a1661SMC ring

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
END OF DOCUMENT
ED
01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 448 / 448
AU4 DROP INSERT ALLOCATION

Operator&#39;s Handbook Alcatel 1661SM-C 2.5 Gbits Compact AddDrop Multiplexer

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Operator&#39;s Handbook Alcatel 1661SM-C 2.5 Gbits Compact AddDrop Multiplexer

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Operator s Handbook

3AL 38249 AAAA Ed.01

3AL 38249 AAAA Ed.01

1651SM 2.7.1&1661SMC 1.7.1 OPER.HDBK

010312 DATE CHANGE NOTE

G. CAPRIOLI ITAVE C. FAVERO APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

E. MONZANI ITAVE ORIGINATOR

1651SM2.7.1&1661SMC1.7.1 OPERATORS HANDBOOK

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 1 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 2 / 448

2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 3 / 448

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 4 / 448

377 378 378 378 378

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

50 50 51 53 53 54 55 56 57 57 58 58 62 63 64 64 65 65 66 67 68 69 69 70 70 72 72 76 76 76 77 77 78 78 79 79 87 88 90 91 92 93 94 96 97 99 101 101 102 102

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 5 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 6 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 7 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 8 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 9 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

16 16 19 25 35 60 61 121 193 198 199 202 272 275 282

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 10 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 11 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK 1.1 General information

1.2 Handbook applicability

3AL 37365 AAAA 3AL 34434 AAAA

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 15 / 448

1.4 Product-release handbooks

ANV Part No. 3AL 38248 AAAA 3AL 35754 AAAA

FACTORY Part No. 955.110.222 F 955.100.182 F

Table 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control

HANDBOOK 1651SM Rel.2.7.1 & 1661SMC Rel.1.7.1 Operator s Handbook

ANV Part No.

FACTORY Part No. 957.140.152 R

3AL 38249 AAAA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 16 / 448

1.5 Purpose of the handbook

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 17 / 448

1.6 Handbook structure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 18 / 448

1.7 Handbook configuration check

4. Corrective Maintenance (Troubleshooting) 5. Unit Replacement with a Spare Table continues

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 19 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 20 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 957.140.152 R 3AL 38249 AA AA 448 21 / 448

Mouth to mouth resuscitation method

Operator's Handbook Alcatel 1661SM-C 2.5 Gbits Compact AddDrop Multiplexer

Operator's Handbook Alcatel 1661SM-C 2.5 Gbits Compact AddDrop Multiplexer